Home

Synchrony Cell Exchange User`s Guide

1. 022 3 32 Figure 3 22 DS3 Cell Interface Module DSI e eene 3 33 Figure 3 23 DS3 Cell Interface Module Functional Block 3 34 Figure 3 24 BNE Pin Location 3 35 Figure 3 25 E1 Cell Interface Module 3 36 Figure 3 26 E1 Cell Interface Module Functional Block 3 37 Figure 3 27 RJ45 Pin Location jessie thts tret nia Ae REIR Pea sts tete eter e eto asada 3 39 Figure 3 28 Cell Interface Module 200222 0000000000000 00 3 40 Figure 3 29 Cell Interface Module Functional Block 3 41 Figure 3 30 BNC Pin 3 42 Figure 3 31 Structured Legacy Interface Module 3 43 Eigure 3 32 T1 Mapping ee a AA ARAN GRAM ARAM AR GUAR GUAR ANAS Snes 3 44 Figure 3 33 Channel Mapping intret ete eee cach e teo a aetas e oes 3 44 Figure 3 34 STL to VPI VCI eene eene rennen enne 3 45 Figure 3 35 Structured T1 Legacy Interface Module Functional Block 3 46 Figure 3 36 Trunk Conditioning eese eene nnns nennen 3 47 Figure 3 37 Another E
2. NC 1 DCD RD 2 RD SD 3 SD NC 4 DTR SIGGND 5 SIG GND 6 DSR RTS 7 RTS CTS 8 CTS NC 9 RI 9 PIN 25 PIN FEMALE MALE NON REDUNDANT 610133 X Figure B 2 CPU Craft Interface to Modem CXUG 10 6 99 CXUG 10 6 99 DSC DSL HSL SCM Figure B 3 DSC DSL HSL SCM Modules to RS 530 V 11 613008 X Sheet 1 of 2 B 7 B 8 DSC DSL HSL SCM Figure B 3 DSC DSL HSL SCM Modules to RS 530 V 11 613009 X Sheet 2 CXUG 10 6 99 CXUG 10 6 99 LINK 2 OR DSL HSL entreeLINK ILD RTA RTB Figure B 4 DSL HSL Modules DCE to LINK 2 or entr eLINK ILC Module 613004 X B 9 DSL HSL SCM RS 449 SDA SDB RDA RDB DMA DMB SIG GND STA STB LL RL RTA RTB TTB RRA RRB TRA TRB RSA RSB CSA CSB 26 PIN 37 PIN MALE MALE s EL lt gt Figure B 5 DSL HSL SCM Modules to RS 449 613005 X Sheet 1 of 2 CXUG 10 6 99 DSL HSL SCM RS 449 SDA SDB RDA RDB DMA DMB SIG GND STA STB LL RL RTA RTB TTB RRA RRB TRA TRB RSA RSB CSA CSB 26 PIN 37 PIN MALE FEMALE s EL Figure B 5 DSL HSL SCM Modules to RS 449 613006 Sheet 2 CXUG B 11 10 6 99 DSC DSL HSL SCM V 35 jeu sr To i A SHIELD 2 gt gt gt SIG LOCAL LOOP LOOP MAINT TEST IND 9 26
3. PH 4 29 MODULE STATISTIGS vant ae eae pb 4 30 CXUG 10 6 99 CPU Module CPU nnn nnadhckdhehhGadaRakeBAAnBAhannhaknaananaanas 4 32 Station Clock Modak SCM eoe sese teet ese tee pese ese ese ese ese eae Toa gd 4 33 Dual T1 Cell Interface Module T IC 45 ced htec 4 34 Cell Interface Module 2 2 2 0000000000 00000000000 4 37 OC3c Cell Interface Module 22 4 39 Dual Synchronous Cell Interface Module 4 40 DS3 Cell Interface Module 83 00002200 0 0 20000000000000000000 4 41 Eteone ace Module EIC rotto sto oe sto oo 4 42 Cell Interface Module ier tte t e e e eee Paice eee Foe eee Dae 4 43 Structured Legacy Module 5 4 44 Dual Synchronous Legacy Interface Module 51 0 4 46 High Speed Synchronous Legacy Interface Module 81 4 42222222 221 4 47 High Speed Serial Interface Legacy Module HSSL eene 4 48 Hub Router Interface Module 2 2 1 2 00000000000000000000000000000 4 49 Low Speed Asynchronous Legacy Interface Module LS 4 50 Unstructured Legacy Interface Module UTL eene 4 52
4. 3 73 Jumper Settings cene PHPREPUPRIPPEHIM ERRORES 3 75 Specifications desee Dee Deere Te re De e Renee Pe tesa 3 75 Ifi d1CatOESA doe ie roe eot eim eoe ce esee e aot ort tette rtr et eet 3 76 C teeta ots 3 76 UNSTRUCTURED LEGACY INTERFACE MODULE UE3L ene 3 77 less e Ye Eye 3 77 ee ee EE 3 79 Specifications ete e DU PRODR ORDERED DRE 3 79 Indicators ERE OA eae ese 3 79 tc del eit tote peste le be ed tte bs ote be solace Pe Fete DE Ee aba ie Deka otn Eee ood 3 80 BASIC INTERFACE MODULE 3 81 DV EL VIC e EE DEL I 3 81 Jumper inen aeu ede pt ere ere unui nuns ae Pee e E Pv 3 83 SPCC CAM ONS ic east c eee 3 83 IndiCatorS 5 e 3 83 4 WIRE ANALOG INTEFACE MODULE EML esee nennen 3 84 e ebbe eoe E e olent he ole be 3 84 Jumper Settings cen Appears 3 86 Specifications 9 to coim potente etes foto e 3 86 Indicators o sei t n e dessert ee ee 3 86 Pino ts quet getto
5. High SCROLL UP LINE SCROLL DOWN LINE SCROLL UP PAGE SCROLL DOWN PAGE Press ENTER to update the config database andreturnto the Main Menu 11 22 CFG Con Mgmt Map ALARM ESC ESC Previous Figure 5 39 Connection Management Mapping Window LSAL Configuring connections to and from LSAL interfaces is very similar to configuring other connections see Configuring Interface Connections 1 Select the Connect Mgmt command from the Configure menu 2 To configure the connections move the cursor to highlight one of the interfaces 3 Press F2 or ENTER to bring up the connection management map for that interface 4 Usethe Up Down arrow key to move to the Inact field 5 Press F3 to add a new connection or F4 to delete an existing connection Follow the steps described in Configuring Interface Connections to add new connections 6 When done press F1 or move to EXECUTE button and press ENTER to update the configuration database and return to the main menu or UPDATE and ENTER to update the configuration and remain in this window 5 42 CXUG 10 6 99 Unstructured T1 Legacy Interface Module UTL Configuring Interfaces To configure a new Unstructured T1 Legacy Interface Module UTL interface follow the steps described in Configuring Physical Interfaces to enter the name the interface type the slot the physical interface and acti
6. Figure 2 9 Loading New Image CXUG 10 6 99 2443 Loading New Software Using FTP 2 14 These procedures describe upgrading software from version 3 2 and subsequent versions to 4 0 For upgrading versions prior to 3 2 see Table 2 1 and the Release Notes You can load new software versions to a remote CX device using FTP The procedure is similar to the procedure used from a CRAFT port This requires that your network be configured for management using either LANE or Classical IP You use a telnet window to set up the load procedure and a separate window with an FTP session to start the load To load a new software version to a remote CX device using FTP 1 Open an MS DOS window or xterm window as appropriate and path to the directory where the hex file for the new version resides on your PC or workstation This file initially comes from a diskette and must be decompressed before loading Instructions for decompressing and installing software from a diskette are contained in the readme txt file accompanying the software 2 Copy the hex file to the file name CPUROM HEX for loading cp cpu400 hex CPUROM HEX or copy cpu400 hex CPUROM HEX Start a telnet session with the CX and log into the Cell Exchange system as admin Select Software Ver under the Configure menu Enter the name of the new version supplied with the diskette gv Gs 49 Select LOAD and press ENTER Observe that the Mai
7. O ess room Figure 2 2 CX 1500 DC Power Connector Module Rear Chassis CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT Timeplex Inc MOTEL GTO Use Fuse Type 3 15A L 250V AMPS 2 08 CAUTION For continued protection or Ri VOTIS IPIE from risk of fire replace with only No same type and rating of fuse Figure 2 3 CX 1540 AC Power Connector Module Rear Chassis Module Installation Procedures The CX system is delivered with all user specified modules installed If additional modules are to be subsequently installed follow these basic procedures 1 Select an available slot to install the new module CXUG 10 6 99 2 3 2 4 PRECAUTION The CPU Module must be installed in slot 8 of Model CX 1500 for non redundant operation and in slots 7 and 8 for redundant operation The CPU Module may be installed in any slot except slot 1 of Model CX 1540 The CPU Module must be installed in slot 5 of the CX 1580 for non redundant operation and in slots 5 and 6 for redundant operation 1 Loosen the two captive screws holding the blank front panel to the chassis 2 Insert the module into the chassis Use care to ensure that the DIN connector is correctly lined up and fully seated into the backplane 3 Tighten the two screws that attach the module front panel to the chassis NOTE Never force the screws when starting them If they become difficult to turn back them off and start over 4 At
8. eese ener 3 12 Figure 3 7 DC Power Supply Module Functional Block 3 13 Figure 3 8 Station Clock Module 3 14 Figure 3 9 HDB 26F DCE Pin Location 3 15 Figure 3 10 Dual Cell Interface Module T1C sse eene 3 16 Figure 3 11 Dual Cell Interface Module Functional Block Diagram eee 3 17 Figure 35 12 3 18 Figure 3 13 Cell Interface Module 0 0422 6 3 19 Figure 3 14 Cell Interface Module Functional Block 3 20 Figure 3 15 SC Duplex Connector 3 23 Figure 3 16 OC3C Cell Interface Module OC3C ccc ccccccccceeesesesnneeeeeeeeeeeeennaeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaaeeeeeeeneeee 3 24 Figure 3 17 OC3C Cell Interface Module Functional Block Diagram eee 3 25 Figure 3 18 SC Duplex Connector nter treten tes sashes 3 28 Figure 3 19 Dual Synchronous Cell Interface Module 05 3 29 CXUG XIV 10 6 99 Figure 3 20 Dual Synchronous Cell Interface Module Functional Block Diagram 3 30 Figure 3 21 HDB 26F DTE Pin
9. 2 j SIGNAL GROUND E DX ix SIGNAL GROUND po 13 SIGNAL GROUND Dc 4 SIGNAL GROUND 2 DX gt 2 SIGNAL GROUND CXHSSI 612751 CABLE Figure B 21 HSSL HSSI to DTE B 20 CXUG 10 6 99 CONNECTOR A CONNECTOR B TO HSSL DCE TO DTE T ES lt d DTE READY d pa 5 TRANSMITTED DATA TO DCE a lt i pu 5 NOTUSED E 31 Tene b et D DCE READY m ei bc rn TEST MODE Me gt lt D lt 3 RECEIVED DATA FROM DCE 12 LOOPBACK B F ba NOT USED d Ex NOT USED gt ce P gt NOT USED P gt lt 6 4j NOTUSED Se XT h NOT USED 40 n Tce soon 2 DX rn NOT USED Se nS a 2 NOTUSED e we 4 NOTUSED T 10 LOOPBACK A is n jg SIGNAL GROUND DX 7 SIGNAL GROUND E po SIGNAL GROUND US Dc SIGNAL GROUND 5 oe iw 25 SIGNAL GROUND CXHSSI XVR 612529 CABLE Figure B 22 HSSL HSSI Crossover CXUG B 21 10 6 99 Appendix C Cable Applications This appendix provides functional application diagrams for all available CX device cables CPU MODULE VT100 TERMINAL CRAFT INTERFACE PORT 610133 X Figure C 1 Nonredundant CPU Module Cabling SCM MODULE 6
10. 2 Typical Logon Screen o tee eme eroe a ia Seat tae tees 4 3 Figure 4 3 Password Menun ctt cete te cete e ceo a a ce e aa ce e Cabe A e ea cde ge Ra aede 4 4 CXUG 10 6 99 XV Figure 4 4 Main Menu Screen em A PATODI EE EEEE ED inate 4 5 Figure 4 5 Main Menu Screens iere eei Re wah nen enn eke hanna hie 4 7 Figure 4 6 Date Time Window from Configure 4 8 Figure 4 7 System Reset Window from Configure 4 9 Figure 4 8 Alarm Log Window from View 4 9 Figure 4 9 Module Status Window from View Menu esses nee eene 4 10 Figure 4 10 Admin Info Window from View 4 11 Figure 4 11 Timing Source Window from View eene enne 4 12 Figure 4 12 LEC Status Window from View 4 12 Figure 4 13 SNMP Stats Window from View Menu eese enne emen 4 13 Figure 4 14 Initialize Database Window from Diagnostics Menu eere 4 14 Figure 4 15 Save Database Window from Diagnostics 4 14 Figure 4 16 Restore Database Window from Diagnostics Menu eese 4 15 Figure 4 17 Module Reset Window from Diagnostics 4 16 Eip re4 18 SNMP Window clot est ete eet e b ee Le b te E e 4 17 Figure
11. ee NT cab tette deeb eR cere BR 1 19 Synchtony ST 1 2 2 0 2 d epe tbt ette iet aet Bade Bae deb e deb ee eee 1 19 etree ee aa tata re td ceo a po novo n cte d 1 19 QR RUNE EE ORO URN EL De DDR 1 19 Other Vendors Equipment etd e tete 1 19 cu Le 2 1 SITEFREPARATION 2 1 2 1 2 1 Required Tools and 2 1 Chassis Installation 2 1 Grounding 2 2 Power ES 2 2 Module Installation Procedutes 2 8 t s i e a e e es 2 3 SOFTWARE INSTALLATION Bette Bes chen teta eee 2 5 Diskette Installations 22 21 22 2 0 riesco on et bet tete Le ette e Qe ean 2 5 SOFTWARE UPGRADE 5 2 5 General Informations toein enee
12. eee pe tote mper 3 87 ricum CM 4 1 4 1 Local Management 5 4 1 Initial ede ee eese teet her ttr eei eere eee Pre 4 3 MENU OPERATION 2 3 5 3 3 2 8 e tee P dain 4 5 Meni Selection sete kh ar t EFE e Ad 4 6 Command Operation ce teme ee et ees 4 6 MAIN 4 7 Configure Menu cte eee ae CAN A te deo eee ol pite Det 4 8 VW EE DL 4 9 Di gnostics Menu ee e e tm AAAs 4 13 NETWORK MANAGEMENT 4 16 LANE Operation iin RRRERRRAERHRRRHERPERER RRRHRES 4 17 Nn ater S 4 19 Setting the MAC Address of the 4 20 TELNEF 156 4 20 Local Sessionis mno eie ete aos 4 2 Remote SESSION Ae ls Meee ea 4 25 FEP S ded 4 28 Saving a Database Using PTP e a S 4 28 Restoring a Database Using 4 29 PA UE
13. Channel 9 Channel Conn EXECUTE Aggregate data rate for channel grouping Press ENTER To update the config database and return to the Main Menu 09 52 CFG Intf STL ESC ESC Previous Figure 5 23 Interface Configuration Window Structured T1 The arrow keys are used to move between the different fields Beginning from the Framing field the down arrow key can be used to move the cursor through each field in the following order the space bar is used to move through the possible selections which are given below in parentheses starting with the default e Framing ESF or SF e Coding B8ZS or AMI e Line Build Out Equal 0 7 5 15 0 22 5 133 266 266 399 399 533 533 655 e 96 Err Sec Threshold 100 10 25 50 75 e Tx Clock Out On Board Recovered Ref Clock Internal e Trunk Conditioning Data Code Idle UAC or MUX OOS e Trunk Conditioning Signaling Idle 0 Busy 1 or Busy 1 Idle 0 e Idle Channel Conditioning Voice Idle or Data Idle e ATM CES wicas basic 5 24 CXUG 10 6 99 When done move to the EXECUTE button and press ENTER to update the configuration database and return to the main menu Configuring Channel Groups The STL interface configuration menu provides a channel assignment data entry field for each of the 24 T1 channels Whenever the cursor is positioned in one of the channel assignment fields the user is prom
14. C 7 Figure C 14 HSSE Module Cabling ertet ee tete ae C 8 Figure C 15 UD3E Module Cabling terrre treo tret a C 8 Figure C 16 VEJL 3 n t tet i e ete e eet e eio e e eb te be lebte C 8 Tables Table 1 1 Cell Exchange System 1 3 Table 1 2 Physical Electrical and Environmental Characteristics 1500 1 17 Table 1 3 Physical Electrical and Environmental Characteristics 1540 1 17 Table 1 4 Physical Electrical and Environmental Characteristics 1580 1 18 Table 2 1 Upgrade Path Version 3 1 1 and 2 6 Table 2 2 Software Flow Diagrams 2 2 9 Table 3 1 Module Summary eese eene nennen enne en hnnr eret nnns enhn nest ener nnne 3 1 Table 6 1 Alarm Messages csssccccessscecesssseeeeesssceeccessaeeccesseecesssaeecsesaeecsessaeeecessaaeesessaeeeeessaeees 6 2 Table B 1 Cable Applicability Matrix B 1 Table B 2 Cable Applicability Matriz nennen 2 Table B 3 Cable Index tn taret e era e erede Saee ce bete slaves B 3 Table D 1 CX 1500 CX 1540 CX 1580 Field Replaceable Units eese D 1 Table D 2 2 2 eee e
15. 6 Tab to the VPI field for the output interface and enter the VPI then to the VCI field and enter the VCI in the same manner as described in paragraph 3 7 Tab to the Connection Name field A unique connection name of up to 14 characters may be entered if desired 8 Tab to the Priority field and select the queuing priority for the destination interface This is tumbler field pressing the SPACE bar will move between the selections high medium or low priority for each VPI VCI The queuing priority setting may be used to minimize cell delay variation of CBR traffic or to prioritize traffic on over subscribed circuits As traffic enters the Cell Exchange each cell is assigned a priority based on the setting selected for the VPI VCI Any type traffic CBR VBR or ABR may be assigned any priority Although normally CBR traffic would be assigned high priority other types of traffic CXUG 10 6 99 CXUG 10 6 99 could be set to higher priority and CBR to lower as desired As traffic exits the CELL EXCHANGE it does so via the assigned priority queue for that traffic Queuing takes place on the output port 9 When done press lt F1 gt to update the configuration Configuration changes take place immediately upon execution 10 Press lt F3 gt to add more connections or lt F4 gt to delete 11 When done with all connections for this interface highlight the lt EXECUTE gt button and press ENTER to update the con
16. DB Convert 4 0 3 2 4 0 N 3 2 3 1 3 2 Y CPU Toggle 4 0 3 2 4 0 N 3 2 3 1 3 2 Y Load SW New Online CPU 4 0 3 2 4 0 N 3 2 4 0 3 2 Y Code Swap 4 0 3 2 4 0 Y 4 0 3 2 3 2 N DB Convert 4 0 3 2 4 0 Y 4 0 3 2 4 0 N CPU Toggle 4 0 3 2 4 0 Y 4 0 3 2 4 0 N Node Reset 4 0 3 2 4 0 Y 4 0 3 2 4 0 N CXUG 10 6 99 2 9 Loading New Software Using the Craft Interface These procedures describe upgrading software from version 3 11 to 4 0 For upgrading versions prior to 3 1 1 see the Release Notes To upgrade software using the craft interface 1 Log in with the appropriate password default is admin 2 Select Software Ver from the Configure menu Figure 2 4 Dia 15 sole cs Connect Mgmt Hulticast Location Name fidmin Ports System Timing Software Ver SNMP Press ENTER F2 to go to the Software Version configuration screen 15 54 Main Menu MES seeeeeeeeeeeecx UQ to Logout Connected 0 18 10 vT100 9500 amp N 1 SCROLL CAPS NUM Capture Print echo Figure 2 4 Configure Menu 3 When the window shown in Figure 2 5 appears ensure that there is only one software image in Flash If only one image appears as shown proceed to Step 5 CXUG 2 10 10 6 99 CXUG 10 6 99 Dig 213 cls e New Version Name Sg LORD Uersions Currently Loaded in the System test xmod Connected 0 23 13 vr100 19600 amp N 1 SCR
17. LANE IP Interface Tumbler field to select the SNMP interface for LANE or IP access Only one type of service can be selected LANE or IP Service Type Toggle field to select the type of service LANE or IP Telnet Disconnect Timeout Edit field for entering a timer value in seconds 60 999 NOTE This window has one or more secondary windows associated with it Care must be taken that the configuration shown in the primary window is the one desired Moving to the secondary window automatically accepts or executes the configuration displayed in the primary window LANE Operation The following is a short list of features that the LANE NMS Operation provides CXUG 4 17 10 6 99 e Allows Operations the capabilities so that a remote management system can operate and maintain the ATM network e Allows OA amp M functions for SVCs provided in accordance with sections 13 14 and 15 of Bellcore GR 1248 CORE Issue 3 e Provides sufficient ATM operational capabilities so that an electronically bonded remote Management System can operate and maintain the CX 1500 s e Supports the following network management standards for interface to management systems Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP v2 0 RFC1577 Interim Local Management Interface ILMI v4 0 af ilmi 0065 000 MIBs as an integral part of the CX 1500 specifications LANE Emulation LEC version 1 0 2 0 UNI Signaling UNI 3 1 e Supports LANE over a single ATM
18. CHANNEL CONFIG setect to modify channel configuration 99 45 CFG Intf HRIM QOCOOCOCOCOCOCOOOOOOOC ESC ESC Previous Connected 0 02 39 VT100 560081 SCROLL CAPS NUM Capture Print echo Figure 4 23 HRIM Configuration Window 3 Using the ARROW keys move to the CHANNEL CONFIG button and press lt ENTER gt This will bring up the window shown in Figure 4 24 CXUG 4 22 10 6 99 T CX1500 HyperTerminal OF x File Edit View Call Transfer Help Di al3 cls Name hrim 5 Slot 5 Intf A Type Hub Router Ch Remote ATM IP Rem Net Rem Enet IP Mask BW 134 196 15 2 0 0 0 0 6 6 6 6 5 SCROLL UP LINE SCROLL DOWN LINE EXECUTE SCROLL UP PAGE SCROLL DOWN PAGE E E Figure 4 24 HRIM Channel Configuration Window Use the ARROW keys to move the cursor into the channel configuration field Press F3 to add a new record Enter the identification and address information for the local CPU When finished move to the EXECUTE button to update the database and return to the main menu or UPDATE to update the database and remain in this window Press lt ENTER gt to execute the selected command Return to the main menu and select SNMP from the Configure menu The screen shown in Figure 4 25 will appear Te MX1500 HyperTerminal ioj x Edit Call Transfer Help Community Strings Read Enc Write public Trap public LANE IP Interface h
19. Network Management Simple Network Management Protocol View Menu The View menu allows the operator to display system parameters Submenus include Alarm Log This menu provides a description of the alarms and provides a timestamp When this menu item is selected a screen similar to Figure 4 8 is displayed A complete listing of alarms is shown in Chapter 6 Slot Number Module Type Dual Sync Cell OC3 Cell Dual Sync Leg LSAL Dual T1 Cell DS3 SEL CPU Hub Router OC3 Cell High Speed Leg Undefined Undefined STL Undefined Power A Power B Module Status Active Idle Active Active Inactive Invalid Down Active Active Active Active N A N A Inactive N A Active Inactive Press F2 to show the intf status for the highlighted selection 9 32 View Module Status ALARM ESC ESC Previous Figure 4 8 Alarm Log Window from View Menu 4 9 Module Status This menu provides a top level view of what modules are installed in the Cell Exchange system and defines their status When you select this menu item the screen shown in Figure 4 9 is displayed Slot Number Module Type Module Status Dual Sync Cell Active OC3 Cell Idle Dual Sync Leg Active LSAL Active Dual T1 Cell Inactive DS3 Invalid SEL Down CPU Active Hub Router Active OC3 Cell Active High Speed Leg Active Undefined N A Undefined N A STL Inactive Undefined N A Power A Active Powe
20. UTEL HSSL UD3L UE3L Number 613008 X HDB 26 M to DB 25 M RS X X 530 613009 X HDB 26 M to DB 25 F RS X X 530 613012 X HDB 26 M to DB 15 M 613004 X HDB 26 M to DB 25 M X X 613005 X HDB 26 M to DB 37 M X X 613006 X HDB 26 M to DB 37 F X X 613003 X HDB 26 M to DB 34 M X X 613007 X HDB 26 M to DB 34 F X X 610127 X RJ 45 to RJ 45 Straight X X 610126 X RJ 45 to RJ 45 Crossover X 612751 X HSSI M to DCE M X 612529 X HSSI M crossover M 613013 X RJ 45 M to 25 pin DTE M X 613014 X RJ 45 M to 25 pin DTE F X 613015 X RJ 45 M to 9 pin DTE M X 613016 X RJ 45 M to 9 pin DTE F X 61362 RJ 45 to DB 15 F X 120405 X BNC M to BNC M X X X X COMATPX RJ 45 M to RJ 45 M Straight 1013 COMATPX RJ 45 M to RJ 45 1162 Crossover CXUG B 2 10 6 99 Table B 3 Cable Index Part No Cable Model Connector Figure Description 650252 X CPU VT100 9F 9 Pin DB F 9 Pin DB F B 1A CPU craft interface to VT100 terminal 650074 X CPU VT100 25F 9 Pin DB F 25 Pin DB F B 1B CPU craft interface to VT100 terminal 650075 X CPU VT100 25M 9 Pin DB F 25 Pin DB M B 1C CPU craft interface to VT100 terminal 610133 X ST NCP MDM 9 Pin DB F 25 Pin DB M B 3A CPU craft interface to VT100 terminal via modem 613008 X DSC 530M 26 Pin HDB M 25 Pin DB B 4 DSC Module DTE to RS 530 ATM M facility
21. e ELAN Name Edit field IP Operation NOTE For IP an HRIM module is required To configure for IP operation select the appropriate interface Figure 4 19 and service type Enter a timeout value Using the arrow keys select the lt IP gt button then press lt ENTER gt This will bring up the window shown in Figure 4 20 IP over ATM Configuration Parameters VCI 33 HRIM Channel CPU IP Address 3 0 0 5 CPU Subnet Mask 255 0 0 0 CPU ATM Address 4700000000000000000000000000000000000000 Gateway IP Address 3 0 0 3 Trap Addr 1 3 0 0 9 Trap IP Addr 2 3 0 0 9 Trap IP Addr 3 3 0 0 9 EXECUTE Press ENTER To update the config database and return to the Main Menu 09 32 CFG IP Config ESC ESC Previous Figure 4 20 IP Configuration All fields are edit fields Use the arrow keys to move around the screen Enter information using the keyboard Parameters that define an IP configuration are VPI Edit field VCI Edit field HRIM Channel Tumbler field pressing the SPA CE bar will show the configured channels CXUG 4 19 10 6 99 e CPU IP Address Edit field e CPU Subnet Mask Edit field e CPU ATM Address Edit field e Gateway IP Address Edit field e Trap IP Addr 1 Edit field e Trap IP Addr 2 Edit field e Trap IP Addr 3 Edit field For information on configuring local and remote nodes using IP see also Chapter 5 Configuring for IP Operation For
22. e Monitors the physical interface for Hook Status e Collects statistics on module performance Cell Bus Microprocessor Power Section The Cell Bus Microprocessor Power section of the 4 wire Analog Interface Module consists of the following e ATM Cell Bus Switching Logic IC ATM Cell Bus Switch along with a RAM IC provides connectivity to the backplane board e 96 Pin DIN connector used to connect onto the ATM Cell Bus e Motorola 68340 microprocessor e Capacitor filtering provided for control and noise suppression Unique Functionality Section The 4 Wire EML Interface Module includes the following unique functions e Supports two 4 wire analog voice channels e Each voice channel configured as Type 1 2 or 5 E amp M e Connector is DB 9 female e High speed AAL1 segmentation and reassembly function A functional block diagram of the EML Interface Module is shown in Figure 3 66 ATM CELL BUS WITCH TYPE ae ANALOG VOICE FUNCTIONS CPU 68340 FILTERS 5 z a Figure 3 66 4 wire Analog Interface Module Functional Block Diagram CXUG 3 85 10 6 99 Jumper Settings No jumper settings are required on the 4 Wire EML Module Specifications Port Capacity Two Connector DB 9 Female Timing Internal Ref Clock Status amp Statistics Standard status and statistics provided Diagnostics Terminal Loopback Bi directional Applicable Standards ITU G 712 G 714 Power lt 7 5
23. 10 6 99 to configuring other connections Figure 5 49 shows the configuration map for an Unstructured E3 interface Name Salisbury Intf A Type UESL VPI VCI i Interface Name VPI VCI Chan Connection Name Priority 3 32 Walkersville 2 23 WalkerOne Med SCROLL UP LINE SCROLL DOWN LINE SCROLL UP PAGE SCROLL DOWN PAGE Press ENTER to update the config database and return to the Main Menu 11 15 CFG Con Mgmt Map ALARM ESC ESC Previous Figure 5 49 Connection Management Mapping Window UE3L Configuring connections to and from UE3L interfaces is very similar to configuring other connections see Configuring Interface Connections 1 2 5 52 Select the Connect Mgmt command from the Configure menu To configure the connections move the cursor to highlight one of the interfaces Press F2 or lt gt to bring up the connection management map for that interface Use the Up Down arrow key to move to the Inact field Press F3 to add a new connection or lt F4 gt to delete an existing connection Follow the steps described in Configuring Interface Connections to add new connections When done press F1 or move to the EXECUTE button and press ENTER to update the configuration database and return to the main menu or UPDATE and ENTER to update the configuration and remain in this window CXUG 10 6 99 Basic Interface Module Configuration
24. 3 75 Indicators Type Label Color Meaning LED OPNL Green Illuminates when operational code begins running after the boot process is complete Blinks during operational code download Off No power to module UD3L failed CPU failed LED S Red When the S SYNC LED is ON it indicates that synchronization with the source has been lost OFF is the Normal indication LED B Red When the B Buffer LED is ON it indicates that the clock synthesis buffer is completely full or completely empty OFF is the Normal indication LED Red Indicates loss of signal to the module LED V Red Indicates Bi polar Violation Pinouts 3 76 Pinouts for the BNC connectors are as shown in Figure 3 59 Figure 3 59 BNC Pin Location CXUG 10 6 99 Unstructured E3 Legacy Interface Module UE3L Overview CXUG 10 6 99 The Unstructured E3 Legacy UE3L Interface Module is the gateway for synchronous non ATM E3 traffic into the ATM network The UE3L Module provides an E3 34 368 Mbps interface channel per module The UE3L Module converts legacy traffic into ATM cells The Module does not require any particular framing format the entire 1 544 2 048 Mbit s data rate is carried as cell payload Data entering the module is unstructured meaning that NO framing format is used The data is strictly clear channel non channelized In other words the entire payload is used for data transport Legacy
25. 4 Wire EML Module Accepts synchronous non cell legacy traffic and converts the data to ATM CBR cells Places the cells on the ATM cell bus Monitors the physical interface Collects module performance statistics Accepts synchronous non cell legacy traffic and converts the data to ATM CBR cells Places the cells on the ATM cell bus Monitors the physical interface Collects module performance statistics Accepts synchronous non cell legacy traffic and converts the data to ATM CBR cells Places the cells on the ATM cell bus Monitors the physical interface Collects module performance statistics Processes CBR data source and generates AAL1 cells Provides support for one daughterboard Cell rate error signal Monitors the physical interface for alarms Collects statistics on module performance Takes voice analog input and converts it to a 64 Kbps PCM signal Translates the PCM signal to AAL1 cell format for transmission across the ATM network Supports connections between E amp M analog and T1 050 interfaces Monitors the physical interface for alarms Collects statistics on module performance CXUG 10 6 99 CPU Module Overview The CPU Module is designed around a Motorola 68340 microprocessor and is used to control and configure the unit collect statistics and provide all general management functionality within the unit The CPU module also provides master timing for the cell bus A view of the front panel of the
26. As a result the Cell Exchange cannot propagate timing across the network This will limit some of the applications for which the product can be configured NOTE The OC3C module can accept system timing NOTE The way the Cell Exchange handles timing must be understood before designing a network Please refer to the timing section in Chapter 1 for the full clocking descriptions Synchrony ST 1000 and LINK 2 may be connected through the CX using the UTEL module The UTEL module allows timing to propagate from one end of the network to the other keeping the Synchrony ST 1000 and LINK 2 in synchronization Configuring Interface Connections CXUG 10 6 99 The final step in the configuration process is to set up the connections for each interface Select the Connect Mgmt command from the Configure menu This will bring up the screen shown in Figure 5 8 Intf Name Intf Type Physical Intf Inact Walkersville Dual T1 Cell A Emmitsburg Structured T1 A SCROLL UP LINE SCROLL DOWN LINE SCROLL UP PAGE SCROLL DOWN PAGE Press F2 to go to the connection map for the highlighted selection 09 52 CFG Con Mgmt ALARM ESC ESC Previous Figure 5 8 Connection Management Window To configure the connections move the cursor to highlight one of the interfaces Press lt F2 gt or lt gt to bring up the connection management map for that interface Figure 5 9 5 7 5 8 Name Walkersville Slot 5 In
27. CPU Module is shown in Figure 3 1 Figure 3 1 Front Panel of CPU Module CPU The CPU Modules may be installed in a redundant configuration in the CX 1500 and CX 1580 to improve network reliability The recommended slots for single and redundant configuration are shown below Chassis Primary Single CPU Operation Redundant CPU Operation CX 1500 Slot 8 Slots 7 and 8 CX 1540 Slot 2 3 or 4 None CX 1580 Slot 5 Slots 5 and 6 CXUG 10 6 99 3 5 The CPU Module provides all configuration control and management functions for the Cell Exchange system either from a local craft interface or by using the remote SNMP management feature The CPU module controls all microprocessors controllers on other modules located in the same chassis using the ATM bus message format structure The CPU module is also responsible for LANE ATM Q 2931 signaling between the Cell Exchange system and LAN Emulation Servers A functional block diagram of the CPU Module is shown in Figure 3 2 ATM CELL FILTERS BUS 5 SWITCH 5 z DRIVERS E E E E 2 a amp u CPU 68340 RECEIVERS Figure 3 2 CPU Module Functional Block Diagram Cell Bus Microprocessor Power Section The Cell Bus Microprocessor Power section of the CPU Module consists of the following e ATM Cell Bus Switching Logic IC ATM Cell Bus Switch along with a RAM IC provides connectivity to the backplane board e 96 Pin D
28. Changing Passwords Logon Access Levels CXUG 10 6 99 Since various personnel will use the Cell Exchange the management system allows three different levels of access The following paragraphs describe the levels and the degree of access associated with each level Level 1 Maintenance User Able to login to view status and alarm conditions Level 2 Management User Able to login to modify the configuration of the system in addition to maintenance user functions Level 3 System Administrator Able to login to set or change passwords in addition to all management and maintenance user functions 4 8 Changing Passwords Occasionally the system administrator or other authorized person may have to change passwords due to the departure of personnel compromise of the existing passwords or some other reason To change a password select the Passwords command from the Configure menu This will bring up the screen shown in Figure 4 3 Default passwords for each access level are shown passwords are not case sensitive Administrator Level Password admin Management Level Password manage Maintenance Level Password maintain EXECUTE 09 57 CFG Password AL ARM TOO Ie Figure 4 3 Password Menu ESC ESC Previous NOTE Only the administrator level can change passwords 1 Highlight the password to be changed 2 Make the change 3 Select execute CXUG 10 6 99
29. DSL HSL Modules DCE and SCM Module to V 11 RS 530 613009 X DSC 530F 26 Pin HDB M 25 Pin DB B 4 DSC Module DTE to RS 530 ATM F facility DSL HSL Modules DCE and SCM Module to V 11 RS 530 613004 X DSL HSL ILC 26 Pin HDB M 25 Pin DB B 5 DSL HSL Modules to LINK 2 or M entr eLINK ILC Module 613005 X DSL HSL SCM 449M 26 Pin HDB M 37 Pin DB B 6 DSL HSL Modules to LINK 100 DLI O M Module and RS 449 SCM Module to RS 449 613006 X DSL HSL SCM 449F 26 Pin HDB M 37 Pin DB B 6 DSL HSL SCM Modules to RS 449 F 613003 X DSL HSL SCM V35M 26 Pin HDB M 34 Pin DB B 7 DSC DSL HSL SCM Modules to V 35 M Winchester 613007 X DSL HSL SCM V35F 26 Pin HDB M 34 Pin DB B 7 DSC DSL HSL SCM Modules to V 35 F Winchester 61362 BADP 8 Pin Mod 15 Pin DB F B 10 STL Module to ST Dpanel 4 DSX 1 via BIM PBX cable 61359 T1C Module to CSU Smart Jack straight via DSX 1 CSU cable 61385 61359 BIM PBX F 15 Pin DB M 15 Pin DB M B 11 STL Module via BADP cable to ST Dpanel 4 DSX 1 61385 DSX 1 CSU 15 Pin DB M 15 Pin DB B 12 T1C Module via BADP cable to CSU Smart Jack 120405 X TX3 DS3 Male Male BNC B 13 DS3 Module to DS3 45Mbps facility ANSI T1 107 E3C Module to E3 equipment 34 Mbps E1C UTEL Modules to G 703 unbalanced via Balun HRIM Module to 10Base 2 Ethernet CXUG 10 6 99 B 3 Table B 3 Cable Index Cont d Part No Cable Model Connector Figure Des
30. If configuring from a remote location check the alarm log to ensure that the module has been configured successfully and is online Enter as many interfaces as needed by using the F3 key to add interfaces To enter configuration details for the interface press F2 This will bring up the screen shown in Figure 5 6 The information required on each screen will differ depending upon the type of interface module selected CXUG 10 6 99 Intf Name Walkersville Slot 5 Intf A Intf Type Dual T1 Cell Framing ESF Coding B8ZS Line Build Out Equal 0 Err Sec Threshold 100 Scramble Cells Enable Tx Clock Out Recovered EXECUTE Press ENTER To update the config database and return to the Main Menu 09 52 CFG Intf T1 ESC ESC Previous Figure 5 6 Detailed Interface Configuration Dual T1 Cell Interface 9 Enter appropriate information This screen shows the information required for a T1 cell interface a Using the TAB or lt ARROWS3 key move to the Framing field This is a tumbler field press the lt SPACE gt bar to move through the available choices b Using the TAB or lt ARROWS3 key move to the Coding field This is also a tumbler field press the SPACE bar to move through the selections c Using the TAB or ARROW key move to the Line Build Out Equal field and toggle through the available choices d Using the TAB or ARROW key move to the Err
31. Loading New mage eee tee ee ete ke Mae tee Eee EL Ee De eee Eee rs 2 13 Eip re2 10 Configure 4 ee bete eee teta Ee bab Ee Hebe Lote bebe et 2 16 Figure 2 11 Software Version Window ssccccesssececeessseeecesseeccesseeeceeseseeeceessaeeesessaeeesessaaeeeeesaes 2 16 Figure 2 12 New Version 2 17 Figure 2 13 Flash Memory Message eec e bett e eee ei Leu 2 18 Figure 2 14 Start Xmodem Send nennen nennen 2 18 Figure 2 15 Xmodem Selection Window esssssesesseeeeeeeeeene eene EE ETE 2 19 Figure 2 16 Software Load Indicator Window essen enne 2 19 Figure 2 17 Loading New 2 20 Figure 2 18 Software Version Command sees 2 22 Figure 2 19 Software Version Selection Screen nennen nennen nennen 2 23 Figure 3 1 Front Panel of CPU Module CPU 3 5 Figure 3 2 CPU Module Functional Block 3 6 E1p r 3 3 DB 9M Conector tete eto Phe ete Pte bee 3 7 Figure 3 4 AC Power Supply Module 1500 2 3 9 Figure 3 5 AC Power Supply Module Functional Block 3 10 Figure 3 6 DC Power Supply Module CX 1500D
32. Menu Operation CXUG 10 6 99 Once logged on the operator is automatically presented with the Main menu screen shown in Figure 4 4 The Cell Exchange management system uses this menu driven user interface for both operations and maintenance The screen is divided into four sections menu name menu specific selections prompt line and status line Menu Configure Diagnostics Connect Mgmt Multicast Interface Data Time Location Name Menu Specific Admin Ports Selections System Timing System Reset Passwords Software Ver SNMP Prompt Line Press ENTER F2 to go to the Connections Management screen 10 50 Main Menu ALARM Q to Logout Status Line Figure 4 4 Main Menu Screen The menu name section is self explanatory The menu specific section provides information or command selections relative to the menu that has been selected The prompt line is a user help function containing information about the commands available for selection and the outcome of the selection A prompt message will appear to show the user what information should be entered or which key should be pressed depending on the location of the cursor or the command selected The prompt line will also display alarm messages When an alarm condition occurs or goes away a brief message will be displayed If multiple alarms occur they will be queued and each message will be displayed for a ver
33. Name Hyattsburg Slot 14 Intf A Type Structured T1 Framing Coding Line Build Out Traffic Type TC State TC Data Code TC Signaling Maj Alm Action CGA Status ALM Status Err Sec Thres Errored Secs ESF B8ZS Voice Applied Idle Idle 0 Busy 1 Trunk Condition No CGA s None 10095 69 OOF Count Slip Count 0 Sig Freeze Cnt 1 s Density Cnt Eight 06 Cnt B8ZS Sig Cnt Card Status Port Status Loopback STL gt ATM Cells Active Up No 165700 ATM gt STL Cells Discarded Cells Discard Cell Secs Last Statistics Reset Hour REFRESH CELL STATS 13 00 16 25 View Intf STL T1 TR OR ke RK ESC ESC Previous Figure 4 47 Specific Interface Window Structured T1 Entries in this window include Framing Reflects the user selection from the configuration window Coding Reflects the user selection from the configuration window Line Build Out Reflects the user selection from the configuration window Traffic Type Indicates the type of traffic received TC State Indicates whether Trunk Conditioning is being applied TC Data Code Reflects the user selection from the configuration window TC Signaling Reflects the user selection from the configuration window Maj Alarm Action Indicates whether alarm action is set to No Action or Trunk Condition CGA Status Pr
34. PLCP Enable Disable Line Build Out 0 To 225 Feet 225 To 450 Feet Scramble Cells Enable Disable Tx Clock Out Recovered On Board Tx Format C bit parity forced C bit parity preferred M23 Forced When done move to the EXECUTE button and press ENTER to update the configuration database and return to the main menu 5 18 CXUG 10 6 99 Configuring Connections Connections are configured via the Connection Management menus Figure 5 18 shows the configuration management mapping window for the DS3 Name Urbana Inf A Type DS3 Inact VPI VCI i Interface Name VPI VCI Chan Connection Name Priority Emmitsburg Emmit One Low SCROLL UP LINE SCROLL DOWN LINE SCROLL UP PAGE SCROLL DOWN PAGE Press ENTER to update the config database andreturnto the Main Menu 11 22 CFG Con Mgmt Map ALARM fries ESC ESC Previous Figure 5 18 Configuration Management Mapping Window DS3 Configuring connections to and from DS3 interfaces is very similar to configuring other connections see Configuring Interface Connections 1 Select the Connect Mgmt command from the Configure menu 2 configure the connections move the cursor to highlight one of the interfaces 3 Press F2 or ENTER to bring up the connection management map for that interface 4 Usethe Up Down arrow key to move to the Inact field 5 Press F3 to add a new connection or F4 to delete an existing connec
35. Selecting the lt HISTORY gt button provides statistics for this module similar to those shown in Figure 4 40 CXUG 10 6 99 4 55 Basic Interface Module BIM To view the statistics for the Basic Interface Module BIM select Module Status from the View menu More information can be obtained for a particular module by highlighting the module and pressing lt F2 gt This will bring up the logical interface screen for this module similar to Figure 4 38 Additional information for each logical interface can be obtained by highlighting the interface and pressing lt F2 gt which will bring up the screen shown in Figure 4 58 Name BIM 9 Slot 9 Int A Type Basic Int Module Card Status BIM gt ATM Cells 0 Interface Status Loopback BIM lt ATM Cells Interface Mode Discarded Cells Discard Cell Secs Status Bit 0 Status Bit 1 Out of Sync Events Status Bit 2 Out of Seq Cells Status Bit 3 Invalid Cells Corrected Cells Last Statistics Reset Hour 23 00 Buffer Events REFRESH HISTORY 10 01 View Intf BIM vui PENA ESC ESC Previous Figure 4 58 Specific Interface Window BIM Interface Mode Reflects the configuration of the daughter card DCE DTE Status Bit 0 3 Reports signals from the daughter card All other entries are the same as previously described Selecting the lt HISTORY gt button provides statistics for this module similar to tho
36. The UD3L Module provides a DS3 T3 unframed 44 736 Mbps interface channel per module The UD3L Module converts legacy traffic into ATM cells The Module does not require any particular framing format the entire 44 736 Mbit s data rate is carried as cell payload Data entering the module is unstructured meaning that NO framing format is used The data is strictly clear channel non channelized In other words the entire payload is used for data transport Legacy data is placed in AAL1 CBR type format given a VPI VCI address and transmitted over the ATM network This module is non channelized and is intended to be used in a point to point configuration A front panel view of the UD3L Module is shown in Figure 3 57 Figure 3 57 Unstructured DS3 T3 Legacy Interface Module UD3L The UD3L Legacy Interface Module performs the following primary functions e Takes non cell bearing traffic Legacy traffic and converts the data stream to ATM CBR cells adding the appropriate cell overhead e Takes the cells and places them onto the ATM cell bus e Monitors the physical interface for alarms e Collects statistics on module performance 3 73 Cell Bus Microprocessor Power Section The Cell Bus Microprocessor Power section of the UD3L Interface Module consists of the following e ATM Cell Bus Switching Logic IC ATM Cell Bus Switch along with a RAM IC provides connectivity to the backplane board e 96 Pin DIN connector used to
37. groups one or more 64KHz DSO channels to be passed to and from ATM cell bearing equipment The STL card supports either 4 or 8 T1 interfaces Both ESF and SF framing formats are supported 1 interface configuration is discussed in the following section A front panel view of the Structured T1 Legacy Interface Modules is shown in Figure 3 31 OPNL OAOcOEOG OBOD 8 Port Figure 3 31 Structured T1 Legacy Interface Module STL Channel groups are configured as either voice or data For channels configured as data the STL sets up clear channel 64KHz connections For voice connections the STL enables in band robbed bit signaling to pass through the network Figure 3 32 The user defines the various voice and data channel groupings via the STL interface configuration menu described in the configuration chapter Each channel group consists of one or more channels The channels can be either contiguous or non contiguous CXUG 3 43 10 6 99 4or8TI Interfaces VPI VCI X VPI VCI Each T1 channel mapped to different VPI VCI pairs Figure 3 32 T1 Mapping STL connections are established via the connection management menu See Configuring STL Connections in Chapter 5 The Cell Exchange system allows any channel group to be connected to e Any VPI VCI of any configured cell bearing interface e Any compatible STL channel group that is any channel group that carries the same typ
38. instead of Sync Legacy 3 Following page 4 57 insert the following new information Structured E1 Legacy Interface Module To view the statistics for the Structured E1 Legacy Interface Module SEL select Module Status from the View menu The window that appears provides a top level view of the hardware installed in the chassis Information is available for each slot including module type and module status More information can be obtained for a particular module by highlighting the module and pressing F2 This action will bring up the logical interface screen shown in Figure 4 60 Intf_ Name Intf Type Slot Physical Intf Intf Status Middletown SEL 7 A Up SCROLL UP LINE SCROLL DOWN LINE SCROLL UP PAGE SCROLL DOWN PAGE Press ENTER F2 to go to the interface statistics screen 09 44 View Intf SEL ALARM TODO BR ESC ESC Previous Figure 4 60 Logical Interface Status Window SEL The logical interface status window displays status information for each logical interface defined for a specific module In addition to configuration information name type slot physical interface active the status of the interface is shown This represents a snapshot of the current state of the MX17358 1 10 of 29 4 30 00 interface up or down Additional information for each logical interface can be obtained by highlighting the interface and pressing lt F2 gt The screen shown in Figure 4 61 wi
39. osito fosa eb feos fefe foo folc eee Sot etie 6 1 Alarims Craft nterf ce 2 0 cnp en nn en een 6 1 GENERAL TROUBLESHOOTING 5 6 5 MODULE INDICATIONS 5 2 2 3 2 2 0 0 0 EEUU LUI EI He eae Debet Lee Det Pete Potete 6 6 AC Power Supply 6 6 DC Power Supply 6 7 CPU Module eec OA A 6 7 CXUG xii 10 6 99 Other Modules c 0 cccccccssscceveccsveccevecceseccvcccsveccsvcccsssccsvcecsesecsssccsecetscctsscensecessecensesesees 6 7 BB ho ene CERO REE a 6 7 Replacement ProCcedUres o nire eei rapere ied aerae eade da 7 1 ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE ESD ANTI STATIC 7 1 REMOVING AND REPLACING CHASSIS 7 1 REMOVING AND REPLACING MODULES 2 7 2 Model CX 1500 Power Supply Module or DC eee 7 2 CPU Modules n css et ete PERI REI teen ten eae atte OESTE 7 3 Other MOU eS oss cos i aea eaaet aea aae eaae adno eese 7 4 Appendixes Asynchronous Transfer Mode Overview cesses A 1 Cable eee 1 Cable Applications C 1 Field hepldceable Units i iii aranana ra
40. provide constant bit rate CBR cell streams for IAN 150 traffic AD 10 The CX family will interoperate with the AD 10 via the CX legacy cards using to provide constant bit rate CBR cell streams for AD 10 traffic Other Vendors Equipment Other vendors systems connect with the CX via ATM interfaces or via legacy interfaces as with TimePlex equipment ATM interfaces are commonly used to connect to higher speed ATM switches or ATM services based on ATM switches The CX is capable of supporting ATM traffic from any system that supports ATM Forum compliant interfaces that match the interface types supported on the CX The CX 1500 has demonstrated interoperability with ATM switches from Fore and other vendors For specific information contact TimePlex CXUG 1 19 10 6 99 Chapter 2 Installation Site Preparation Minimal site preparation is required for the Cell Exchange system They are easily mounted into a standard 19 inch rack Equipment Installation Unpacking The Cell Exchange system is shipped in cartons with adequate packing material to protect them from damage due to shock and vibration Upon receipt of either system inspect the condition of the carton for obvious damage After opening inspect the equipment for signs of damage and inventory the equipment against the enclosed packing list Notify the carrier and TimePlex immediately if there is any damage or shortages Required Tools and Equipment There a
41. system to interface with ATM switches Engineering Workstations and ATM cell bearing transmission systems The data rate is 155 Mbps The OC3 Cell Interface Module terminates an OC3 facility interface recovers clock accesses the A TM cells within the SONET payload and provides these cells to the Cell Exchange system switching fabric A front panel view of the OC3 Cell Interface Module is shown in Figure 3 13 Figure 3 13 OC3 Cell Interface Module OC3 The module performs the following primary functions e Takes cell data and uncouples the cells from the physical interface e Takes the cells and places them onto the ATM Cell bus Monitors the physical interface for alarms e Collects statistics on module performance CXUG 3 19 10 6 99 Cell Bus Microprocessor Power Section The Cell Bus Microprocessor Power section of the OC3 module consists of the following e ATM Cell Bus Switching Logic IC ATM Cell Bus Switch along with a RAM IC provides connectivity to the backplane board e 96 Pin DIN connector used to connect onto the ATM Cell Bus e Motorola 68340 microprocessor e Capacitor filtering provided for control and noise suppression e ATM Physical Interface chip e Optical interface device to interface with external devices Unique Module Functionality Section 3 20 The OC3 Cell Module is a compact subassembly that provides the hardware necessary to terminate a OC3 facility interface recover
42. the View menu More information can be obtained for a particular module by highlighting the module and pressing lt F2 gt This will bring up the logical interface screen for this module similar to Figure 4 38 Additional information for each logical interface can be obtained by highlighting the interface and pressing lt F2 gt which will bring up the screen shown in Figure 4 52 This screen contains information that is tailored to the interface Name Bethesda Slot 9 Intf A Type Hub Router Card Status Up HRIM gt ATM Cells 0 Interface Status Up Tx AAL5 Frames HRIM lt ATM Cells 0 Rx AALS Frames Discarded Cells 0 Rx Abort Errors Discard Cell Secs 0 Rx Length Errors Rx CRC Errors Last Statistics Reset Hour 10 00 REFRESH HISTORY 12 25 View Intf HRIM ALARM ESC ESC Previous Figure 4 52 Specific Interface Window HRIM Tx AALS Frames Number of AALS frames transmitted Tx AALS Frames Number of AALS frames received Rx Abort Errors Number of aborted frames received Rx Length Errors Number of times there is a mismatch between the declared packet length and the actual packet length received Rx CRC Errors Number of instances when the Cyclic Redundancy Check does not match The remaining entries are as previously described Selecting the HISTORY button provides statistics for this module similar to those shown in Figur
43. via DSX 1 CSU cable 61385 LSAL Module to data terminal equipment 61359 BIM PBX F STL Module via BADP cable to ST Dpanel 4 DSX 1 CXUG 10 6 99 D 3 Table 0 3 Cables Cont d Part No Cable Model Description 61385 DSX 1 CSU T1C Module via BADP cable to CSU Smart Jack 120405 X TX3 DS3 DS3 Module to DS3 45Mbps facility ANSI T1 107 E3C Module to E3 equipment 34 Mbps E1C SEL UTEL Modules to G 703 unbalanced via Balun HRIM Module to 10Base 2 Ethernet 613012 X DSC X 21 DSC Module to V 11 X 21 DCE COMATPX 1160 LSAL module to asynchronous equipment FOXNO0004 OC3 SM OC3 Module to 155 Mbps single mode service SONET 0005 OC3 MM OC3 Module to 155 Mbps multimode service SONET D 4 CXUG 10 6 99 Index 4 Wire Analog Interface Module 3 84 4 Wire EML Module cell bus 3 85 configuring 5 55 indicators 3 86 jumper settings 3 86 overview 3 84 pinouts 3 87 specifications 3 86 statistics 4 57 unique functionality 3 85 Abort Command Key 4 7 Access Level maintenance user 4 3 management user 4 3 system administrator 4 3 Access Levels 4 3 AC Power Supply Module 3 9 indicators 3 11 specifications 3 10 Alarms STL Module 3 49 Alarm Messages 4 29 Alarms 4 29 6 1 6 5 troubleshooting craft interface 6 1 Anti Static Procedures 7 1 ATM Cell 1 5 3 1 3 6 3 16 3 20 3 25 3 30 3 34 3 37 3 41 3 45 3 52 3 56 3 60 3 69 3 74 3 78 3 82 3 85
44. 11 DC POWER SUPPLY MODULE 0 3 12 SPCCHICATIONS E NEEE E EE AEO E E 3 13 IndICat Es 5 e er eere b d eta AS 3 13 STATION CLOCK MODULE vetere tees eee pee pee ve e TERT Ted 3 14 LOS AUTRE 3 14 MS PECTIC ALI ONS ites cose core cox titan sce EUH 3 15 ene NANA es 3 15 e858 ke Ss ES OE an oa sh nba bene asa YE eae MAN ea EP 3 15 DUAL T1 CELL INTERFACE 0 3 16 ONE EEE S IEE A E DU MM 3 16 Jumper Settings oot RETE ERR ERROR y 3 17 SpeclficatioDs 2 12 5 5 ebd tede bot bebe be ete leet etae pelea eie Pune pe Patel eta te e gea cete 3 17 IndicatoOES esie ette pe ce e c be Pre Hen tere ee dae Ve EET ve vet Teo TY e od 3 18 Sess er epe eie e e EI CUL 3 18 CELL INTERFACE MODULE ccccccceeseseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeees 3 19 OVERVIEW Neto e ere e ERE rt rer DDT DE 3 19 Specifications sien ite ea bea 3 21 Indicators AOA te ett tate te tet eM tot oi pes 3 23 e e ere n eed eerte A 3 23 OC3C CELL INTERFACE MODULE OC3C uu 3 24 eet eee 3 24 SpeclfiCatio
45. 1500 Power Supply Module AC or DC PRECAUTIONS Observe electrostatic discharge ESD precautions when handling any Cell Exchange system module If ESD precautions are not taken sensitive components may be permanently damaged Individual external DC power must be turned off to the chassis prior to removal installation of the individual power supply Severe damage to components may occur if power is not turned off CXUG 7 2 10 6 99 Note that Power Supply A is the left hand supply and Power Supply B is the right hand supply when looking at the front of the CX 1500 To remove the Power Supply Module 1 Turn off the power for the power supply you wish to replace Use the rear AC switch for the AC chassis or the external DC breaker for the DC chassis The Power Supply FAIL LED will illuminate on the face plate and system will provide an alarm that the power supply is down The POWER LED will remain illuminated indicating that 5 VDC backplane power is still present Loosen the four captive screws securing the power supply to the chassis Remove the power supply by pulling it straight out Be careful not to twist or bend the module To replace the Power Supply Module 1 Confirm that the power is turned off for the power supply slot Use the rear AC switch for the AC chassis or the external DC breaker for the DC chassis 2 Slide the replacement module straight back into the chassis aligning the power connector and DIN con
46. 34 PIN MALE MALE Figure B 6 DSL HSL SCM Module to V 35 613003 X Sheet 1 of 2 B 12 CXUG 10 6 99 DSC DSL HSL SCM V 35 pace ed ys pr I A SHIELD 5 I gt gt gt SIG LOCAL LOOP LOOP MAINT TEST IND e Ft E ERES GE ea a Pe 26 PIN 34 PIN MALE FEMALE Figure B 6 DSL HSL SCM Module to V 35 613007 X Sheet 2 CXUG B 13 10 6 99 STL LINK 2 BFM BIM 1 LINK 100 DLI 1 entr eLINK CSU ST 1000 ST 20 Dpanel 4 PRI CSU Smart Jack 8 PIN 8 PIN MODULAR MODULAR Figure B 7 STL Module to LINK 2 BFM BIM 1 Modules LINK 100 DLI 1 Module entr eLINK CSU Module or ST D Panel 4 PRI T1M E1M T1C to CSU Smart Jack Straight 610127 X CSU Smart Jack T1C CROSS OVER 8 PIN 8 PIN MODULAR MODULAR Figure B 8 T1C to CSU Smart Jack Crossover 610126 X B 14 CXUG 10 6 99 ST 1000 ST 20 DPanel 4 DSX 1 STL VIA BIM PBX CABLE CSU Smart Jack VIA TIC DSX 1 CSU CABLE 8 PIN 15 PIN MODULAR FEMALE Figure B 9 STL Module to ST D Panel 4 PRI T1M E1M Via BIM PBX Cable T1C to CSU Smart Jack Straight Via DSX 1 CSU Cable 61362 STL VIA ST 1000 ST 20 BADP CABLE DPanel 4 DSX 1 15 PIN 15 PIN MALE MALE Figure B 10 STL Via BADP Cable to ST D Panel 4 DSX 1 61359 CXUG B 15 10 6 99 TIC VIA B
47. 4 Move to the Telnet Disconnect Timeout and enter a timer expiration in seconds 60 to 999 5 Move to the LANE button and press lt ENTER gt MX17358 1 22 of 29 4 30 00 6 When the LANE configuration window opens enter the ATM Address the CX MAC address NOTE Ifthe address appears as 00000000000000 14 zeros the user should go back and assign a MAC address e Go to the login screen shift or remove reinsert serial cable e Enter the password Enter the 12 digit hex code for the MAC address 009010 followed by the CPU serial number This only applies to the ACTIVE CPU in a redundant CPU configuration NOTE user does not have to modify this field if the MAC address is set It will be retained automatically 7 Enter an IP address for this CX device 8 Enter the subnet mask e g 255 0 0 0 NOTE In Step 9 below any LANE component LES LECS or BUS you are not required to enter must already be defined in the network 9 Select the LECS ADDR Method AUTO PROG ILMI or NONE e AUTO user does not enter LECS LES or ELAN use well known address e PROG user enters LECS only e ILMI not currently implemented e NONE user enters LES address 10 Enter the gateway IP address 11 Enter the IP address es to which to send traps 12 Enter the name of the Emulated LAN to join Connecting the Workstation to an OC3 Interface Establishing a LANE connection to a network management workstat
48. 4 19 LANE eene 4 18 Figure 4 20 IP Configuration esses EEr E EE EE E 4 19 Figure 4 21 Locally Connected TELNET Session eese eene 4 21 Figure 4 22 Interface Configuration Window eese eene nennen nnne enhn nnn 4 22 Figure 4 23 HRIM Configuration Window sssssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeee enne enne enne een 4 22 Figure 4 24 HRIM Channel Configuration Window esses eene eren 4 23 Figure 4 25 SNMP Configuration Window 4 23 Figure 4 26 IP over ATM Configuration 1 4 24 Figure 4 27 Remotely Connected TELNET Session eese eene nennen rennen 4 25 Figure 4 28 HRIM Configuration Window sse eene nennen nnne enne nnne 4 25 Figure 4 29 HRIM Channel Configuration 1 4 26 Figure 4 30 SNMP Configuration Window esses eee nnne 4 26 Figure 4 31 IP over ATM Configuration Window eese nennen rennen 4 27 Figure 4 32 Connection Management 1 4 28 Figure 4 33 Module Status een eene ens 4 30 Figure 4 34 Logical Interface Status Window eese eene enne 4 30 Figur
49. 5 41 Connection Management Mapping Window UTL to Cell Bearing 5 44 Figure 5 42 Connection Management Mapping Window UTL to UTL eene 5 44 Figure 5 43 Interface Configuration Window 5 46 Figure 5 44 Connection Management Mapping Window UEL to Cell Bearing 5 47 Figure 5 45 Connection Management Mapping Window UEL to 2 2 2 5 47 Figure 5 46 Interface Configuration Window UD3L sese eene nennen 5 49 CXUG 25 10 6 99 XVII Figure 5 47 Connection Management Mapping Window UD3L eene 5 50 Figure 5 48 Interface Configuration Window 5 51 Figure 5 49 Connection Management Mapping Window 5 52 Figure 5 50 Interface Configuration Window BIM essere hene 5 53 Figure 5 51 Connection Management Mapping Window BIM eene 5 54 Figure 5 52 Interface Configuration Window 4 Wire eene 5 55 Figure 5 53 Connection Management Mapping Window 4 Wire EML eee 5 56 Figure 5 54 Multicast Configuration Window eese eene enne 5 57 Figure 5 55 Configuring Member Interfaces eeeeessseeesseeeeeeeeeee eene nnne nennen nere 5 58 Figure 6 1 Alarm Log Window 2 22 B peii de ea EH Eee Het eee dete be ele be
50. 6 99 Dual Synchronous Cell Interface Module DSC Configuring Interfaces To configure a new interface follow the steps described in Configuring Physical Interfaces Enter the name the interface type Dual Sync Cell the slot the physical interface A or B and the active status Press lt F2 gt to enter the configuration menu Figure 5 15 shows the Synchronous Cell configuration menu with all fields set to the default values Intf Name Frederick Slot 1 Intf A Intf Type Dual Sync Cell Data Rate in Kbps 8000 Scramble Cells Enable TT Clock Source ST Queue Mode Split For Secured Networks Disable Transmit Zero Blocks Disable Resync Signal Idle State Low Resync Delay Seconds 10 Resync Period Seconds 30 Resync Duration Seconds EXECUTE Press ENTER To update the config database and return the Main Menu 0952 cra Intf Sync ALARM ESC ESC Previous Figure 5 15 Interface Configuration Window Dual Sync Cell To configure this interface position the cursor on the Data Rate field by using the up and down arrow keys The arrow keys are used to move between the different fields Beginning with the Data Rate field use the down arrow key to move the cursor through each field Enter text using the keyboard The space bar is used to move through the possible selections in tumbler fields given below in parentheses starting with the default e Data Rate in
51. 99 Ver 3 6 RR IK TR IO Craft Port public private public Active Inactive View Admin Info ALARM Se REE RE dune ESC ESC Previous Figure 4 10 Admin Info Window from View Menu The entries on this screen include Software Version The version of the software that is currently in use by the CX device Database Version The version of the database currently installed Location Optional entry for the physical location of the switch Admin Phone Number Optional entry for the contact phone number Management Interface Interface being used to connect to the CX 1500 CX 1540 SNMP Read Community Access level for reading the network SNMP Write Community Access level for writing to the network SNMP Trap Community Access level for receiving traps from the network Power Supply A and B Status of installed power supplies Timing Source This menu provides information on the source of the timing that is presently being used Selecting this menu item brings up the window shown in Figure 4 11 4 11 System Timing Source Timing Source Configured Timing Source in Service Interface Status Rx Tx Clock 2003 down Rx Internal REFRESH Refresh this screen 14 17 View SysTim ing ALARM FORT III I I ESC ESC Previous Figure 4 11 Timing Source Window from View Menu LEC S
52. A Type Unstructured E1 VPI VCI i Interface Name VPI VCI Chan Connection Name Priority uel 12 0 93 Columbia High SCROLL UP LINE SCROLL DOWN LINE SCROLL UP PAGE SCROLL DOWN PAGE Press ENTER to update the config database andreturnto the Main Menu 14 27 CFG Con Mgmt Map ALARM eee ESC ESC Previous Figure 5 45 Connection Management Mapping Window UEL to UEL Configuring connections to and from UEL interfaces is very similar to configuring other connections see Configuring Interface Connections 1 Select the Connect Mgmt command from the Configure menu 2 configure the connections move the cursor to highlight one of the interfaces CXUG 5 47 10 6 99 5 48 Press F2 or lt gt to bring up the connection management map for that interface Use the Up Down arrow key to move to the Inact field Press F3 to add a new connection or lt F4 gt to delete an existing connection Follow the steps described in Configuring Interface Connections to add new connections When done press F1 or move to the EXECUTE button and press ENTER to update the configuration database and return to the main menu or UPDATE and ENTER to update the configuration and remain in this window CXUG 10 6 99 Unstructured DS3 T3 Legacy Interface Module Configuration UD3L Configuring Interfaces UD3L To configure a new interface follow the steps described in C
53. BIM Configuring Interfaces BIM To configure a new interface follow the steps described in Configuring Physical Interfaces to enter the name the interface type the slot the physical interface and the active status indication Press lt F2 gt to enter the interface configuration menu Figure 5 50 shows the interface configuration menu with all fields set to the default values Intf Name BIM 5 Slot 5 Intf Intf Type BIM Data Rate 1024 Adaptive Clock Yes Use TT No Invert ST No ST and RT Clock Source Internal Control Bit 0 Off Control Bit 1 Off Control Bit 2 Off Control Bit 3 Off EXECUTE Press ENTER To update the config database andreturn to the Main Menu 12 48 CFG Intf BIM ESC ESC Previous Figure 5 50 Interface Configuration Window BIM The arrow keys are used to move between the different fields Beginning at the Data Rate field the down arrow key can be used to move the cursor through each field in the order shown Enter text using the keyboard The space bar is used to move through the possible selections which are given below in parentheses starting with the default CXUG 10 6 99 Data Rate edit field 8 to 2048 Kbps in 8 Kbps intervals Adaptive Clock Yes No Use TT No Yes Invert ST No Yes ST and RT Clock Source Internal Reference External Control Bit 0 through 3 Off On 5 53 Configuring Connections Connections are configured
54. Bad Configuration Incorrect OC3 timing Crypto parameters Alarm Array members CPU Not Ready CPU Ready MX17358 1 4 30 00 Appendix B Cable Diagrams 1 Page B 2 replace Table B 2 with the following Table B 2 Cable Applicability Matrix Legacy Module Type Part Description STL SEL DSL HSL HRIM LSAL UTEL HSSL UD3L UE3L Number 613008 X HDB 26 M to DB 25 M RS X X 530 613009 X HDB 26 M to DB 25 F RS X X 530 613004 X HDB 26 M to DB 25 M X X 613005 X HDB 26 M to DB 37 M X X 613006 X HDB 26 M to DB 37 F X X 613003 X HDB 26 M to DB 34 M X X 613007 X HDB 26 M to DB 34 F X X 610127 X RJ 45 to RJ 45 Straight X X 610126 X RJ 45 to RJ 45 Crossover 612751 X HSSI M to DCE M X 612529 X HSSI M crossover M 613013 X RJ 45 M to 25 pin DTE M X 613014 X RJ 45 M to 25 pin DTE F X 613015 X RJ 45 M to 9 pin DTE M X 613016 X RJ 45 M to 9 pin DTE F X 61359 DB 15 M to DB 15 M X 61362 RJ 45 to DB 15 F 120405 X BNC M to BNC M X X X X RJ 45 M to RJ 45 M Straight 1013 MX17358 1 4 30 00 27 of 29 2 Pages B 3 and B 4 replace Table B 3 with the following Table B 3 Cable Index Part No Cable Model Connector Figure Description 650252 X CPU VT100 9F 9 Pin DB F 9 Pin DB F
55. E1 Legacy Interface Module eene 3 68 Figure 3 54 Unstructured T1 E1 Legacy Interface Module Functional Block Diagram 3 69 Figure 3 55 BNG Pim Locations otro 3 72 Figure 3 56 RJ 45 Pimnouts i dene TREE 3 72 Figure 3 57 Unstructured DS3 T3 Legacy Interface Module UD3L serene 3 73 Figure 3 58 Unstructured DS3 T3 Legacy Interface Module Functional Block Diagram 3 74 Figure 3 59 BNC Pin Location irna a a r T EE TEE EEEE EE E a E ET EEE 3 76 Figure 3 60 Unstructured Legacy Interface Module 3 77 Figure 3 61 Unstructured Legacy Interface Module Functional Block Diagram 3 78 Figure 3 62 BNG Pin Locations ccc naan an tied Hi eit Met SAAR e eaa taaa iia 3 80 Figure 3 63 Basic Interface Module 00222 000000000000 2 3 81 Figure 3 64 Basic Interface Module Functional Block 3 82 Figure 3 65 4 wire Analog Interface Module 3 84 Figure 3 66 4 wire Analog Interface Module Functional Block 3 85 Figure 3 67 DB 9 Pin Location 1 iere ar i b rere E date ens 3 87 Figure 4 1 Local Cell Exchange VT100 Connection seen nennen 4 1
56. ENTER to update the configuration and remain in this window 5 54 CXUG 10 6 99 4 wire Analog Interface Module Configuration EML Configuring Interfaces 4 Wire EML CXUG 10 6 99 To configure a new interface follow the steps described in Configuring Physical Interfaces to enter the name the interface type the slot the physical interface and the active status indication Press lt F2 gt to enter the interface configuration menu Figure 5 52 shows the interface configuration menu with all fields set to the default values Intf Name EML 5 Slot 5 Int A Intf Type 4 Wire EML PCM Samples 47 Mode Network Receive Gain 3 5 dB Transmit Gain 1 2 dB Interface Type V Law mu Reference Select Interna EXECUTE Press ENTER To update the config database and return to the Main Menu 12 48 Int 4 Wire ESC ESC Previous Figure 5 52 Interface Configuration Window 4 Wire EML The arrow keys are used to move between the different fields Beginning at the PCM Samples field the down arrow key can be used to move the cursor through each field in the order shown The space bar is used to move through the possible selections which are given below in parentheses starting NOTE with the default PCM Samples 1 to 47 Mode Network PBX Receive Gain edit field any value between 17 3 to 2 1 dBm in 0 1 dBm increments Transmit Gain edit field any value between 0 4
57. ER VETE NOSES a Feed ek a eve ea ve baa EP E ives 3 59 Jumper Settings adn awa wwe e rie Tree led 3 61 Specifications 3 61 TIN GI CATOLS m vien eed 3 61 PinOUts 24 ser 3 61 HUB ROUTER LEGACY INTERFACE MODULE HRIM 3 63 OVervWe WE sss SE es 3 63 Specifications REPETI EN 3 63 NTI CatOESL reos rie er e ER TETTETETT ENE ENEE etri 3 64 Pinouts A uae nnn euet 3 64 LOW SPEED ASYNCHRONOUS LEGACY INTERFACE MODULE LSAL 3 65 tees det reae ooo beer ea ree TET dE 3 65 Specifications NE 3 66 ere eet hea eee eee ee AR ARO s 3 66 RETRO 3 67 UNSTRUCTURED 1 1 LEGACY INTERFACE MODULE UTEL 3 68 OVerVIe Wo Ge tet o Od tek da e eel peto ia Dole cal elds ea 3 68 Jumper osos OR RS RR a ee ee 3 70 ix SpecilicatiOns sve awe avi av av AM A ARES Ie RE Re P ORE Eo Pa eee 3 71 IMCICALOTS PEE 3 71 PinOuts ne arin ee aN RR 3 72 UNSTRUCTURED DS3 T3 LEGACY INTERFACE MODULE 0031 3 73 Sau os
58. HRIM URCVA 3 64 CXUG 10 6 99 Low Speed Asynchronous Legacy Interface Module LSAL Overview The Low Speed Asynchronous Legacy Interface Module LSAL is an asynchronous interface module that allows for the transmission of up to eight 8 low speed asynchronous data channels over an ATM network using AAL 5 type PVCs Channels are individually addressable by assigning a VPI VCI to each channel The LSAL Module allows users to transport asynchronous traffic point to point through an ATM network provides the capability to control lead mapping RTS CTS and provides reliable transport An Automatic Repeat Request ARQ feature has been incorporated into the LSAL module to provide for retransmission of cells dropped due to a timeout or indication of non receipt negative acknowledgement by the receiving entity The LSAL Module does not provide statistical multiplexing or any form of terminal server type functionality A front panel view of the LSAL Module is shown in Figure 3 51 Figure 3 51 Low Speed Asynchronous Legacy Interface Module LSAL CXUG 3 65 10 6 99 Specifications Ports Eight Asynchronous Media Shielded Electrical EIA 561 Connector RJ 45 Female Virtual Connections Eight individual AAL 5 type connections Line Format Single Ended Asynchronous Port Speed 75 bps 38 4 Kbps NOTE Sum of all port speeds must not exceed 153 6 Kbps Timing Internal Timing Reference Control Lead Mapping RTS
59. Interface Module is shown in Figure 3 17 CXUG 10 6 99 Optical ATM ATM CELL Interface Physical BUS Interface SWITCH CAPACITOR FILTERS 5 o 2 a CPU 68340 Figure 3 17 OC3C Cell Interface Module Functional Block Diagram 3 25 Three types of OC3C modules are available to allow the user to select various drive distances The only differences are the fiber optic components one being LED and the other two MLM lasers Reach Short 0 2 km Short Intermediate 0 15 km MLM Laser Single Mode SC Duplex Long 0 40 km MLM Laser Single Mode SC Duplex PRECAUTION not connect one long reach interface directly with another OC3C card without 8 dB attenuation in between Specifications Port Capacity Media Connector Line Encoding Framing Transmit Clock Diagnostics Alarm Surveillance Alarms Statistics Maintenance Actions Applicable Standards Power One Short Haul Multimode Fiber Intermediate Long Haul Single mode Fiber SC Duplex Non Return to Zero NRZ STS 3c STM 1 Recovered Receive OC3C rate Ref Clock Internal On Board 155 52 MHz Facility Loopback Terminal Loopback Section Line and Path LOS LOF LOP FEBE AIS FERF BIP HCS SONET maintenance signaling generation RDI and AIS ATM Forum STS 3c UNI v3 1 ITU T 1 432 ANSI 1 2 93 020 T1S1 92 158 ITU T G 957 Bellcore TR NWT 000253 lt 7 Watts Optical Transce
60. Module Status from the View menu More information can be obtained for a particular module by highlighting the module and pressing lt F2 gt This will bring up the logical interface screen for this module similar to Figure 4 38 Additional information for each logical interface can be obtained by highlighting the interface and pressing lt F2 gt which will bring up the screen shown in Figure 4 44 This screen contains information that is tailored to the interface Intf Name Urbana Slot 6 Intf A Intf Type 053 Loss of Signal ALM DS3 gt ATM Cells Loss of Frame CLR HEC Error Cells Hardware Failure CLR Misrouted Cells Loss of Cell Sync CLR DS3 lt ATM Cells Loss of Cell Delineation ALM Discarded Cells DS3 AIS CLR Discard Cell Secs 0 DS3 RAI CLR Card Status Idle PLCP LOF CLR Port Status Down PLCP RAI CLR Loopback No Tx Format C bit forced Last Statistics Reset Hour 10 00 REFRESH HISTORY 12 25 View Intf DS3 ALARM KNEES ESC ESC Previous Figure 4 44 Specific Interface Window DS3 Entries in this window include Loss of Signal Indicates presence or absence of a valid DS3 signal at the interface Loss of Frame Presence or absence of a DS3 frame Hardware Failure Self explanatory Loss of Cell Sync Indication of whether the interface is in synchronization with cells Loss of Cell Delineation Indication of whether the interface is i
61. O O O POWER Indicates that 5V is being read at the bus ld Illuminates when the 5 volts generated by the power supply is below 4 75 volts or above 5 25 volts Indicates that the power supply module has failed or no AC is present CX 1540 Chassis In the Model 1540 chassis the single AC power supply module is installed internally The Power Supply Module will handle the full power load required for the number of interface modules placed in the chassis AC power distribution within the CX 1540 is relatively simple Standard AC power is received at the backplane of the chassis and transferred via the power connector interface to the internal Power Supply The Power Supply converts the AC input to 5 VDC for transistor transistor logic TTL use then sends it to a voltage regulator and the backplane bus The voltage regulator reduces the 5 VDC input to a 1 2 VDC output for Gunning Transistor Logic GTL use There are three signal components to the DC power output 5 VDC TTL 1 2 VDC GTL and ground Specifications Input Voltage 90 to 230 VAC Input Frequency 47 to 63 Hz Input Current 0 8 amps Output Voltages 5 VDC TTL 41 2 VDC GTL Indicators me ue Gm Caring 71 POWER Indicates that 5V is being read at the bus CXUG 10 6 99 3 11 DC Power Supply Module 3 12 The CX 1500D is equipped with a DC Power Supply Module The power supply slots are locate
62. Old 47 00 79 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 A0 3E 00 00 01 00 ICD New C5 00 79 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 A0 3E 00 00 01 00 e The LECS can also be bypassed completely by configuring the ATM address of a LES in the LEC Once the LEC locates the LECS it sets up a connection and forwards some useful information such as its ATM address its MAC address its LAN type and its maximum frame size The LECS responds with the actual LAN type the actual maximum frame size and the ATM address of a LES By providing a LES address the LECS implicitly assigns the LEC to an emulated LAN Joining an Emulated LAN Once a LEC knows the ATM address of the LES it sets up a connection to the LES When the LES receives the connection setup message from the client it learns the LEC s ATM address from the calling party field in the message Typically it responds by adding the LEC as a leaf node on a point to multipoint connection The LEC then registers its MAC address and associated ATM address with the LES and the LES assigns the client an LEC ID The specification allows the LES to either discard the address or store it for future reference At this point the LEC now can resolve MAC addresses to ATM addresses Classical IP Classical IP over ATM CLIP integrates IP and ATM technologies and minimizes the changes required to accommodate the technology in existing routers switches and hosts The end to end IP routing architecture is the
63. Power Supply Module installed a failed module will shut down the Cell Exchange system a If the FAIL LED is illuminated and the Cell Exchange system is still operational the power supply is OK but there is a malfunction in the LED circuitry The module should be replaced as soon as possible If the Cell Exchange system is not operational and the front panel of the power supply module is blank AC input to the module has been lost or the fuse is blown If there is a redundant power supply installation the backup power supply will automatically assume the load Check the front panel LEDs for one of the following indications a If the red FAIL LED is illuminated the power supply module has failed Since the green POWER LED only indicates that 5 VDC is being read at the bus the LED may be illuminated even though the power supply has failed If the front panel of the power supply module is blank AC input to the module has been lost or the fuse is blown CXUG 10 6 99 DC Power Supply Module If the red FAIL LED illuminates on a Power Supply module there is a possibility the module has failed Here are a few quick checks to verify the status of the module 1 If there is only one Power Supply Module installed a failed module will shut down the Cell Exchange system a If the FAIL LED is illuminated and the Cell Exchange system is still operational the power supply is OK but there is a malf
64. Presence or absence of a valid path signal label Line AIS Presence or absence of an Alarm Indication Signal at the interface 4 37 Path AIS Presence or absence of a valid STS 3c pointer from the network side Line RFI Presence or absence of a Remote Failure Indication at the interface Path RFI Presence or absence of an RFI from the network side Path Trace Mismatch Indicates whether the Path Trace text matches the actual path trace reported gt Number of cells passed from the interface to the network HEC Error Cells Number of cells with header errors Misrouted Cells Number of cells that do not match any VPI VCI configuration O3C ATM Number of cells from the network to the interface Discarded Cells Number of cells discarded due to FIFO overflow Discard Cell Secs Number of seconds in which cells were discarded Card Status Up normal indicates that the card has been recognized by the CPU and a software download has been successfully executed Port Status Indication of whether a valid signal is being received at the interface Selecting the lt HISTORY gt button provides statistics for this module similar to those shown in Figure 4 40 CXUG 4 38 10 6 99 OC3c Cell Interface Module OC3C To view the statistics for the OC3c Cell Interface Module select Module Status from the View menu The window that appears provides a top level view of the hardware installed in the chassis I
65. Regular e Size 10 Script OEM DOS The management system application runs within the Cell Exchange using the terminal keyboard for input and the terminal screen for display Pull down menus provide an easy to use environment Simply open the connection from the terminal screen and the window shown in Figure 4 2 will appear Password admin TimePlex Cell Exchange Model 1500 Version 4 0 09 30 99 Enter password AL ARM KE Figure 4 2 Typical Logon Screen CXUG 4 2 10 6 99 Initial Logon To access the Cell Exchange for configuration or software setup the operator must first complete the logon procedures The management system requires operators to logon with a password for the level of access desired There is one password assigned to each access level Passwords are assigned and controlled by the local system administrator To logon e Power up the Local Management Station e Once the LMS has completed its internal startup procedures call up the logon screen If the logon screen is not displayed or only partially displayed refresh the screen by pressing ENTER at the password entry prompt or removing and reinserting the null modem cable Once the logon screen has repainted the normal logon process can continue e Follow the prompts on the screen e The default password is admin NOTE Once logged it is strongly recommended that the password be changed as described in the section entitled
66. SEL Interface Module includes the following unique functions Module equipped with one complete independent synchronous channel e Connectors are RJ 45 female type e High speed AAL1 segmentation and reassembly function A functional block diagram of the SEL Interface Module is shown in Figure 3 72 a E DRIVERS amp RECEIVERS AIN CE BUS WITCH INTERFACE TYPE DRIVERS amp RECEIVERS FUNCTIONS XE CPU 68340 FILTERS 2 2 Q z a Figure 3 72 Structured E1 Legacy Interface Module Functional Block Diagram MX17358 1 4 30 00 7 of 29 Specifications Port Capacity Media Electrical Connector Line Format Data Format Line Build Out Framing Port Speed Granularity Timing Virtual Connections Timing Conditioning Status amp Statistics Diagnostics Alarm Surveillance Translation Capacity Power Standards Compliance 8 of 29 Four or eight Shielded Multi twisted pair cable low capacitance EIA 530 DCE RJ 45 Balanced ATM Cells 75 Norm 120 Norm 75 P R 120 P R 75 HRL1 75 HRL2 and 120 HRL CAS CRC4 or CAS 2 048 Mbps 8 Kbps increments Synchronous Receive Timing Adaptive Receive Timing Internal or External Transmit Timing Reference 8 Port Max 240 AAL 1 type CBR VPI VCI connections Recovered Internal Reference Onboard Trunk Conditioning Data Code Idle UAC or MUX OOS Trunk Conditi
67. Serial Interface Legacy HSSL 4 48 Figure 4 52 Specific Interface Window HRIM 1 4 eee 4 49 Figure 4 53 Specific Interface Window LS nennen nennen 4 50 Figure 4 54 Specific Interface 4 52 CXUG XVI 10 6 99 Figure 4 55 Specific Interface 0 4 53 Figure 4 56 Specific Interface Window UDDGL sese eren enne nennen 4 54 Figure 4 57 Specific Interface Window UEG3L 4 55 Figure 4 58 Specific Interface Window BIM eese nnne nnne nennen nnreennnn 4 56 Figure 4 59 Specific Interface Window 4 Wire 4 57 Figure 5 1 Configure Menu Location Name 5 1 Figure 5 2 Location Name Screen x 5 2 o fo bete ibaa ode dn densities 5 2 Figure 5 3 Confisure Menu Interface needed tute atari 5 2 Figure 5 4 Interface eee 5 3 Figure 5 5 Entering Interface InN OMA OD 5 3 Figure 5 6 Detailed Interface Configuration Dual Cell 2 5 5 Figure 5 7 System Timing Window eese eene 5 6 Figure 5 8 Connection Management Window esses 5 7 Figure 5 9 Configuration Mana
68. Unstructured E1 Legacy Interface Module UEL eee 4 53 Unstructured DS3 T3 Legacy Interface Module UD3L eene 4 54 Unstructured Legacy Interface Module 4 55 Basic Interface Module BIM NE NE aano 4 56 4 wire Analog Interface Module EML essere 4 57 lt 5 1 SETTING LOCATION 5 1 CONFIGURING PHYSICAL 5 5 2 SETTING SYSTEM 0 0 5 6 Network 5 7 CONFIGURING INTERFACE 5 7 5 5 10 Configurimp Interfaces 2 4 be d bb bbb bbb bbs 5 10 DUAL CELL INTERFACE MODULE TI10O eese nnne 5 11 Conti suring Interfaces lt tc cccseccicccecveecestenes aes een Neue dede ea 5 11 Configuring Connectors eee e AA AA ae 5 12 OC3 OC3C CELL INTERFACE MODULE 5 13 Configuring 5 13 Configuring Connections in oisi ee eee e eg
69. a particular ATM connection CXUG 10 6 99 Limitations on Cell Exchange Multicast Operation Involving Legacy Interfaces Legacy interfaces used in non multicast point to point are assigned fixed VPIs and VCIs for use internal to the Cell Exchange These are as follows Interface Type VPI VCI LSAL port A 1 32 LSAL port B 2 32 LSAL port C 3 32 LSAL port D 4 32 LSAL port E 5 32 LSAL port F 6 32 LSAL port G 7 32 LSAL port H 8 32 4W EM port A 1 32 4W EM port B 2 33 STL SEL channel group toward STL SEL Intf 1 32 Intf first channel in group 256 STL SEL channel group from STL SEL Intf 1 32 Intf first channel in group NOTE When used as a multicast group member the VPI and VCI used by the HSL HSSL UTL UEL UD3L UE3L DSL and BIM are unrestricted except that the two ports on a single DSL card must use different VPI VCIs port a uses 1 32 port B uses 2 32 This architectural feature of the Cell Exchange must be taken into account when including legacy interfaces in a multicast group Since all members of the group must receive the multicast on the same VPI VCI when one of the multicast group members is a legacy port the VPI VCI used must be that dictated by the legacy port This presents two limitations described below Limitations on Multicast Groups Containing Multiple Legacy Ports Since all members of the multicast will receive the sa
70. applied over affected channels toward connected equipment Y 450 L channel groups O link ig 97 1 S 5 5 24 2x VPI VCI occurs 05077 5 2 4 4 7 5 CUM STL Trunk Conditioning example 1 Figure 3 36 Trunk Conditioning The STL initiates trunk conditioning whenever 1 connections are disabled or 2 received cell loss occurs for 3 seconds Trunk conditioning is applied in the outbound direction toward the connected equipment Trunk conditioning is applied only on the affected channels For data channels trunk conditioning simply inserts idle data into the affected channels For voice channels idle data insertion is applied after trunk conditioning first toggles the signaling bits as follows e All zeroes 2 5 sec followed by all ones 2 5 sec when Idle 0 Busy 1 is selected for trunk conditioning signaling After one toggle cycle idle data is inserted e All ones 2 5 sec followed by all zeroes 2 5 sec when Busy 1 Idle 0 is selected for trunk conditioning signaling After one toggle cycle idle data is inserted The STL removes trunk conditioning following 9 seconds of error free cell reception Figure 3 37 shows another typical example of trunk conditioning CXUG 3 47 10 6 99 cell loss detected link O conditioning app failure over affected channels o
71. at a rate from 8 kHz to 20 MHz in 8 kHz steps Interface Modules The Interface Modules are part of a broad group of modules that have been developed for the Cell Exchange systems Each Interface Module provides a specific service as described in Chapter 3 Modules CXUG 1 9 10 6 99 Timing The following describes the various timing systems and their functions that are resident in the Synchrony Cell Exchange system These timing systems are used specifically in ATM networks to support AAL1 CBR circuit emulation type traffic There are four major timing systems in the Cell Exchange system These are e System Timing Channel Port Timing Data Bus Timing External Timing System Timing System Timing is the term that is used when selecting a single timing source to be used as the Reference Timing Source by the Cell Exchange system Only one timing source may be selected at a time The Cell Exchange systems have the capability to select a pre determined timing source that can be used by the rest of the Channel Port Modules as a reference clock source As shown in Figure 1 6 the timing signal that may be chosen as the timing reference source is labeled REF I note that all of the REF I lines are tri stated for selection purposes which are microprocessor controlled Located on the same Figure the timing signal that may be used as the timing reference is labeled REF O Data Bus Timing A high speed 25 MHz clock residen
72. be launched from one of three interfaces e Craft Interface Telnet to a remote node CXUG 10 6 99 e LANE Telnet from NMS station IP Connection Telnet from NMS station TELNET has session security This is identical to the user login and three levels of security supported by the Craft Station interface There can only be one TELNET session active to a CX node From the NMS workstation TELNET is invoked by selecting the Node Icon from the HPOV map then using the HP OpenView menu MISC Terminal Connect TELNET xterm Of MISC gt gt Terminal Connect gt gt TELNET cmdtool Function Key mapping for different terminal types is provided using an external utility Map F4key The function key mapping is active for the current Unix user session Upon logout or reboot the function key mapping is lost The utility Map F4key should be placed in the cshrc file so that it will be invoked automatically on user login Local Session The procedures to establish a local TELNET session a locally connected PC and HRIM and CPU on same chassis as shown in Figure 4 21 are described below CX Node HRIM CPU CPU IP Addr 134 196 15 2 CPU IP Mask 255 255 255 0 CPU Default G W 134 196 15 1 IP Addr 134 196 15 1 ATM IP Mask 255 255 255 0 Ethernet IP Addr 134 196 14 1 Ethernet IP Mask 255 255 255 0 HRIM IP Broadcast Addr 134 196 14 255 Default G W 0 0 0 0 Ethernet MAC Addr 009010
73. click Start and hit the ENTER key or F1 to send the contents of the database to the local management station When the transfer is complete the screen is cleared and the following prompt is displayed in the prompt line Select Transfer Capture text Stop then press ESC ESC to exit After the Capture Text is stopped the save operation is complete and pressing ESC ESC returns to the Main Menu Restore DB This menu allows the user to restore the database from a previously saved file Selecting this menu item brings up the screen shown in Figure 4 16 EXECUTE Press F1 ENTER to restore the database from a file 11 24 Restore DB ALARM ESC ESC Previous Figure 4 16 Restore Database Window from Diagnostics Menu Pressing the F1 or ENTER key will begin the operation The prompt line will change to Select Transfer Send Text File enter the file name and click Open Select the Transfer Send Text File ASCII in the HyperTerminal window and the restore operation will begin NOTE The Send File menu option which uses FTP cannot be used for the Database Restore function FTP is not used by the CX in the Restore Database function Database restoration may take up to 2 minutes depending on the contents of the file During this operation no feedback is provided to the user When the transfer is completed the Cell Exchange will be rebooted to ensure that any needed datab
74. control and management functions for the Cell Exchange systems from a local craft interface remote dial up modem management feature or a Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP interface The CPU module controls all microprocessors controllers on other Modules located in the same chassis using the ATM bus message formatting structure The CPU module ATM bus is also responsible for ATM Q 2931 signaling used in communications with LAN Emulation servers CPU Redundancy CXUG 10 6 99 In order to sustain network operation in the event of a CPU failure a redundant pair of CPU Modules may be installed in the CX 1500 or CX 1580 When two CPU Modules are present they are installed in slots 7 and 8 in the CX 1500 or slots 5 and 6 in the CX 1580 Only one of the two CPUs actively controls the CX 1500 shelf operation at any given time The CPU in control is referred to as the active CPU and the other is called the standby CPU The active CPU can be distinguished from the standby by examining the ACTV LED located on the front panel of the CPU Module or by examining the alarm log entries from the craft port The standby CPU s primary responsibilities are to passively monitor shelf activity and be ready to assume the active role whenever the active CPU fails for any reason A CPU switchover can be enabled disabled and manually initiated from the craft port on either CPU See Chapter 4 Operation 1 7 The first CPU to boot up will become the
75. displayed on the status line If an error is encountered during execution the completion status string will be displayed in reverse video on the status line If the command is executed successfully the status string will be displayed in normal video Commands returning status information will only display a status string on the status line if an error occurred during execution If execution is successful the retrieved status information will be displayed in the command parameter window Main Menu Menus are provided for Configure View and Diagnostics Figure 4 5 shows the Main Menu with all submenus displayed for reference Configure Diagnostics Connect Mgmt Alarm Log Loopback Multicast Module Status Init Database Interface Admin Info Save DB Data Time Timing Source Restore DB Location Name LEC Status Switch CPU Admin Ports SNMP Stats Switch Disable System Timing Switch Enable System Reset Start Stats Stop Stats Module Reset Passwords Software Ver SNMP Press ENTER F2 to go to the C onnections Managem ent screen 10 50 Main Menu ALARM Q to Logout Figure 4 5 Main Menu Screen CXUG 4 7 10 6 99 Configure Menu The Configure menu allows the operator to specify and update configuration parameters and to set or display certain administrative information This menu also allows the system administrator to assign or change passwords and access levels Submenus include Connection Ma
76. download LED Rx Syn Green Indicates that the module has achieved frame synchronization with the received DS3 when lit loss of frame synchronization when extinguished LED Ce Syn Green Indicates that the module has achieved synchronization with the ATM cell HEC in the received DS3 payload when lit loss of cell synchronization when extinguished Pinouts Pinouts for the BNC connectors are as shown in Figure 3 24 Figure 3 24 BNC Pin Location CXUG 3 35 10 6 99 E1 Cell Interface Module E1C Overview The E1 Cell Interface Module functions identically to the Cell Interface Module except that it operates at 2 048 Mbps The Module has two E1 ports and is designed to connect other native ATM equipment operating with an E1 cell bearing interfaces into higher level ATM networks The EIC Module terminates two independent E1 facility interfaces recovers clock accesses ATM cells within the E1 payload and sends these cells to the switching fabric In the transmit direction it maps ATM cells into the E1 framed payload formats the payload per ATM forum specifications and clocks it out on the facility A front panel view of Cell Interface Module is shown in Figure 3 25 Figure 3 25 E1 Cell Interface Module E1C The E1 Cell Interface Module performs the following primary functions e Takes the cells and places them onto the ATM cell bus e Monitors the physical synchronous interface for alarms e Co
77. eight RJ 45 connectors and one BNC connector forming an Ethernet hub Each of the RJ 45 connected systems is on the same LAN segment One 10Base2 and 4 or 8 10BaseT connectors share an aggregate 10BaseT hub A front panel view of the HRIM Module is shown in Figure 3 48 Figure 3 48 Hub Router Legacy Interface Module HRIM Specifications CXUG 10 6 99 Ports Media Connector Virtual Connections Status amp Statistics Diagnostics Four 1OBT One 10B2 or Eight 1OBT One 10B2 Twisted Pair Coax RJ 45 Female BNC 32 IP hosts or subnets mapped to 32 ATM channels Standard status and statistics provided Network Physical Loopback 3 63 Alarm Surveillance ILMI SNMP Agent Applicable Standards TEEE 802 3 RFC 1577 Routed Protocol TCP IP Power lt 7 Watts Indicators ue me Dmm OPNL Green when operational code begins running after the boot process is complete Blinks during operational code download Pinouts Pinouts for the BNC are shown in Figure 3 49 Pinouts for the RJ 45 connectors are shown in Figure 3 50 and its accompanying table Figure 3 49 BNC Pin Location E XMT to terminal equipment hub J RCV from terminal equipment hub 8 9SV Cl Figure 3 50 RJ 45 Pinouts Pin Direction Signal Pin Direction Signal 1 To TE Hub UXMTB 3 To HRIM URCVB mk m To TE Hub UXMTA E us To
78. field When done move to the EXECUTE button and press ENTER to update the configuration database and return to the main menu The IP address of router interface field is an edit field Any valid IP address may be entered into this field This field represents the IP address of the HRIM interface on the local Ethernet LAN The IP mask of router interface field is an edit field Any valid IP subnet mask may be entered into this field This field represents the IP subnet mask of the local Ethernet LAN The IP broadcast address field is an edit field Any valid IP address may be entered into this field This field represents the IP broadcast address of the local Ethernet LAN The IP address of the default gateway field is an edit field Any valid IP address may be entered into this field This entry adds a default route via the entered gateway address The Ethernet MAC address field is an edit field Any valid 12 hex character MAC address may be entered here The default value will be 009010000000 hex The 009010 represents the IEEE assigned OUI for the SLI TimePlex joint venture The last three bytes can be any value between 000000 and FFFFFF hex 5 35 The IP address of ATM interface field is an edit field Any valid IP address may be entered into this field This field represents the IP address of the ATM interface for this HRIM The IP mask of ATM interface field is an edit field Any valid IP subnet ma
79. follow the steps described in Configuring Physical Interfaces to enter the name the interface type the slot the physical interface and the active status indication Press F2 to enter the interface configuration menu Figure 5 48 shows the interface configuration menu with all fields set to the default values Intf Name Salisbury Slot 5 Intf A Intf Type UESL Adaptive Clock Disable Transmit Clock Source Recovered Line Build Out 0 to 225 Feet Coding HDB3 Transmit All Ones Disable EXECUTE Press ENTER To update the config database and returnto the Main Menu 12 48 cFa UESL ESC ESC Previous Figure 5 48 Interface Configuration Window UE3L The arrow keys are used to move between the different fields Beginning at the Adaptive Clock field the down arrow key can be used to move the cursor through each field in the order shown The space bar is used to move through the possible selections which are given below in parentheses starting with the default e Adaptive Clock Yes No e Transmit Clock Out Recovered Ref Clock Internal On Board e ine Build Out 0 to 225 Feet 225 to 450 Feet e Coding AMI HDB3 e Transmit All Ones Disable Enable Configuring Connections Connections are configured via the Connection Management menus see Configuring Interface Connections Configuring connections to and from synchronous legacy interfaces is very similar CXUG 5 51
80. for service is Model No Serial No Warnings Precautions and Notes Be sure that you understand all directions warnings and limitations before using this product In this manual WARNINGS present information or describe conditions which if not observed could result in injury PRECAUTIONS reflect conditions that could cause product damage or data loss NOTES describe limitations on the use of the equipment or procedure CXUG 3 15 00 V If Product Is Received Damaged Forward an immediate request to the delivering carrier to perform an inspection and prepare a damage report SAVE container and packing material until contents are verified Concurrently report the nature and extent of damage to Customer Support so that action can be initiated to repair or replace damaged items or instructions issued for returning items The responsibility of the manufacturer ends with delivery to the first carrier ALL CLAIMS for loss damage or nondelivery must be made against the delivering carrier WITHIN 10 DAYS OF RECEIPT of shipment To Return Product vi Please obtain instructions from Customer Support before returning any item s Report the fault or deficiency along with the model type and serial number of the item s to Customer Support Upon receipt of this information Customer Support will provide service instructions or a Return Authorization Number and other shipping information All items returned under this warranty
81. functions e Accepts an external timing signal from a Master Station Clock e Monitors the attached clock signal for activity 3 14 CXUG 10 6 99 Specifications Port Capacity One Media Shielded Multi twisted pair cable low capacitance Electrical EIA 530 DCE Connector HDB 26 Female Line Format Balanced Clock Rates 8 kHz 20 MHz in 8 kHz increments Power lt 7 Watts Indicators LED OPNL Green Illuminates when operational code begins running after the boot process is complete Blinks during operational code download LED CLCK Green External clock source is present at the interface connector LED ACTV Green SCM is selected as timing reference on timing screen Pinouts The high speed DB 26 connector pinouts are shown in Figure 3 9 and the accompanying table Figure 3 9 HDB 26F DCE Pin Location lt lt From Master Clock Source All other pins are N C No Connection CXUG 3 15 10 6 99 Dual T1 Cell Interface Module T1C Overview The Dual T1 Cell Interface Module is part of a broad group of standard interface modules designed for use in the ATM Cell Exchange systems The Dual T1 Cell Interface Module is a compact sub assembly that occupies one of the slots available in the Cell Exchange system It can connect to other equipment as a DSX 1 interface or terminate a public T1 on its built in T1 CSU A front panel view of the Dual T1 Cell Interface Module is shown in Figure 3 10
82. interface e Management of the CX 1500 is directly interoperable with and manageable by ATM Network Management Systems system based on HP OpenView To configure for LANE operation select the appropriate interface Figure 4 19 and service type Enter a timeout value Using the arrow keys select the lt LANE gt button then press lt ENTER gt This will bring up the window shown in Figure 4 19 LAN Emulation Client Configuration Parameters Def Gateway ATM Address 00901000000100 Trap IP Addr 1 IP Address 1 1 1 20 Trap IP Addr 2 Subnet Mask 255 0 0 0 Trap IP Addr 3 LECS Address Method NONE LECS Addr sememmmeeeoeeneneooeneanene Ea LES ATMAddr 47000580ffe1000000f20f2a4b0020480f2a4b0a ELAN Name EXECUTE Press ENTER To update the config database and return to the Main Menu 07 52 CFG LANE Config ESC ESC Previous Figure 4 19 LANE Configuration All fields except the LECS Address Method are edit fields Use the arrow keys to move around the screen Enter information using the keyboard The LECS Address Method field is a tumbler field CXUG 4 18 10 6 99 Use the space bar to toggle through the allowable entries Parameters that define a LANE Client are e ATM Address Edit field e IP Address Edit field e Subnet Mask Edit field e LECS Address Method NONE AUTO ILMI PROG e LECS ATM Addr Edit field e LES ATM Addr Edit field
83. marked N A in the interface configuration menu Whenever the cursor is positioned in one of the channel assignment fields the user is prompted as follows Channel assignment Valid choices I idle D1 D30 data V1 V30 voice To configure a channel group choose a unique channel group ID and enter it into each of the channel assignment fields of the group Channel group IDs for data channels begin with D and channel group IDs for voice channels signaling enabled begin with V Only one ID can be assigned to a particular channel An idle channel a channel that does not belong to a group is configured by entering an in the channel assignment field All channels are initially idle when a new interface is configured Configuring Connections Connections are configured via the Connection Management menus Figures 5 57 and 5 58 show the configuration maps for SEL interfaces 17358 1 14 29 4 30 00 Name Middletown 7 Intf A Type Structured E1 Interface Name VPI VCI Chan Connection Name Priority Germantown 2 12 German PBX200 High SCROLL UP LINE SCROLL DOWN LINE SCROLL UP PAGE SCROLL DOWN PAGE F1 Execute Add Connection F4 Delete Connection 09 13 CFG Con Mgmt Map ALARM fee ESC ESC Previous Figure 5 57 Connection Management Mapping Window SEL to Cell Bearing Name Middleton 7 Inti A Type Structured E1 Interface Name VPI VCI Chan Connection Name Prior
84. modules 10 Other versions of the software are selected and made active in the same manner CXUG 10 6 99 2 23 Chapter 3 Modules This section provides a functional overview of installable Cell Exchange system modules Summary of Modules Table 3 1 summarizes the functions performed by the various modules available for the Cell Exchange systems Table 3 1 Module Summary Common Modules and Station Clock Module mmm uncon CPU Module CPU Configuration control and management functions Controls processors on other modules AC Power Supply Module Converts AC input voltage to 5 VDC and 1 2 VDC output DC Power Supply Module Converts DC input voltage to 5 VDC and 1 2 VDC output Station Clock Module SCM Monitors the attached clock signal for activity Accepts an external timing signal from a Master Station Clock Dual T1 Interface Module T1C Accepts T1 cell data Places the cells on the ATM cell bus Monitors physical interface Collects module performance statistics OC3 Cell Interface Module OC3 Accepts OC3 ATM cell data Places the cells on the ATM cell bus Monitors physical interface Collects module performance statistics CXUG 34 10 6 99 3 2 Table 3 1 Module Summary Cont d Cell Bearing Interface Modules Cont d component 0 00 7 Interface Module Dual Synchronous Cell Interface Module DSC DS3 Cell Interface Module DS3
85. oei ieiti 2 5 Proc dures for Software Up orade eee e ers 2 6 single 2 7 Elow DiagrarmJs ote beds bab eub eub bibe iid us 2 9 Loading New Software Using the Craft 2 10 Loading New Software Using 2 14 CXUG 10 6 99 Vil viii Loading New Software Using Xmodem eese eere nere 2 15 Software Download Process Considerations 2 20 SOFTWARE VERSIONS rr a te ah BRAT OR Oh Oh Oh Oh Anon Onan aan 2 22 Cote 21 oc E NIME 3 1 SUMMAR Y OEMMODULEDBS eret visse end 3 1 CPULMODUEE ete ate sre at te ae E E ta LI CM LI Ne 3 5 QV EE VIC Wiss aU FERE UV PESE PR FOIE PL TEE UE 3 5 Specifications E 3 7 IndICators 3 7 3 7 AC POWER SUPPLY MODULE rtt tt tt ts 3 9 7X 1500 Ch SS18 3 9 Specifications i552 1 paene pret 3 10 E Crete ve due eve eere aUo Hove ves Us 3 11 CX 1540 Chassis e tee per ro e e 3 11 Specifications oeeie 3 11 LEAG ITEKO EEEE AAAA AET 3
86. of admission congestion control and security Multiplexing and switching in ATM are always done on VPs first and then on VCs ATM Cell ATM uses very large scale integration VLSI technology to segment data at high speeds into units called cells Cells transit ATM networks by passing through switches which analyze information in the header to switch the cell to the appropriate output port The cell moves from switch to switch as it works its way to its destination ATM technology is based entirely on cell structure The ATM cell is a 53 byte fixed length cell consisting of a 48 byte information field cell payload to carry user or network information and a 5 byte header that contains information used to route the cell to its destination Figure A 1 The header and cell payload remain constant at both the user network interface UND and network network interface NNI Cells are assigned on demand depending upon the source activity and available resources Unlike earlier LAN or WAN techniques ATM cells can be sent over a wider variety of media types e g copper wire or fiber optic cable and a wider range of transmission speeds e g up to 622 Mbps Cell Payload 48 octets GFC Generic Flow Control VPI Virtual Path Identifier VCI Virtual Channel Identifier PTI Payload Type Indicator CLP Cell Loss Priority HEC Header Error Check Figure A 1 ATM Cell Structure The main function of an ATM switch is to receive cells on one
87. of doing this is needed The ARP server performs the function of giving out the ATM address of stations on the ATM network It is a software based process and can reside on either a switch or a server host There can only be one ARP Server per Logical IP Subnet LIS but one LIS can support more than one LIS Hosts that are incapable of supporting Classical IP over ATM must have static entries made in the ARP server s cache with a mapping of IP address to an appropriate PVC This will allow a CLIP host to talk to a non CLIP host In order that communication may take place in the opposite direction static entries must be made in the opposite direction for every CLIP host that the non CLIP host wishes to communicate with Because ATM is a connection oriented technology the traditional Address Resolution Protocol used on broadcast networks is no longer sufficient To use SVCs end stations must have a way of mapping IP addresses into ATM addresses and virtual connections automatically on demand CLIP solves this problem by specifying an ATMARP server which performs address resolution for network endpoints The ATMARP server may be a software module running on a file server or workstation or it may be built into a router or ATM switch on the network Configuring the CX Network The following subsections provide information on e Configuring the CX network to use either LANE or classical IP e Configuring the network for TELNET connections Co
88. piss 5 14 DUAL SYNCHRONOUS CELL INTERFACE MODULE DSOC eene 5 15 Configuring Interfaces ete d te 5 15 Configuring ConnectlOns reet eet teet nee tcr eee ee rodeo 5 16 DS3 CELL INTERFACE MODULE DS3 seen 5 18 Cont suring Interfaces 5e RE wc ios satt eoe de oen ge nonce ov npe e E EUR 5 18 Configuring 5 19 CELL INTERFACE MODULE 5 20 Configuring Interfaces dioeceses etit ride elses 5 20 Config ring 2 8 c none tee ene etre teet Presto Fee PERI EEN 5 21 E3C CELL INTERFACE MODULE E3C sese enn 5 22 Configuring Interfaces eU E E CL e dr ER ce e eed n 5 22 Configuring 5 23 STRUCTURED T1 LEGACY 5 0 nee 5 24 Configuring STL Inteffaces ust eR e RE E V Hebe eerie 5 24 CXUG 10 6 99 XI Configuring STL 5 25 DUAL SYNCHRONOUS LEGACY INTERFACE MODULE DSL 5 28 Conti suring Interfaces oeste tae wisps as ease se 5 28 Configuring Connections i osuere 5 29 HIGH SPEED SYNCHRONOUS LEGACY INTERFACE MODULE HSL 5 30 Configuring Interfaces eeesceccsssneeceessececeessaeeccesseeecessaeecssssaeec
89. port and switch those cells to the proper output port based on the VPI and VCI values of the cell This switching is dictated by a CXUG A 2 10 6 99 switching table that maps input ports to output ports based on the values of the VPI and VCI fields ATM Reference Model The ATM transport network common to all services is structured into an ATM layer and a physical layer Figure A 2 is a reference model that illustrates the organization of ATM functionality and the interrelationships between the layers of functionality In the ATM reference model the ATM layer and the ATM adaptation layers are roughly analogous parts of the data link layer of the Open System Interconnection OSI reference model and the ATM physical layer is analogous to the physical layer of the OSI reference model The control plane is responsible for generating and managing signaling requests The user plane is responsible for managing the transfer of data Above the ATM adaptation layer are higher layer protocols representing traditional transports and applications Management Plane 25 m y Control Plane User Plane Higher Layers Higher Layers J T 0 BE p 5030o070v52 z ATM Adaptation Layer ATM Layer Physical Layer Figure A 2 ATM Reference Model Physical Layer CXUG 10 6 99 The ATM physical layer controls the transmission and receipt of bits on the physical medium It also keeps track of ATM cell boundaries and
90. queued up and each alarm message will only be displayed for about 1 2 second The last message in the queue will be displayed for the full 5 seconds assuming no new alarms occur When the last alarm message has been displayed and has timed out the prompt line will revert to its user help display An alarm message has priority over other prompt line messages Therefore if an alarm message is being displayed and the user moves the cursor the alarm message will remain for the full 5 4 29 seconds before displaying the help prompt for the new cursor position See Chapter 6 for a list of alarm codes Module Statistics The Cell Exchange system collects and displays performance statistics for each of its installed modules To view the statistics for a given interface module select Module Status from the View menu The window shown in Figure 4 33 will appear Slot Number Module Type Module Status Dual Sync Cell Active OC3 Cell Idle Dual Sync Leg Active LSAL Active Dual T1 Cell Inactive DS3 Invalid SEL Down CPU Active Hub Router Active OC3 Cell Active High Speed Leg Active Undefined N A Undefined N A STL Inactive Undefined N A Power A Active Power B Inactive Press F2 to show the intf status for the highlighted selection 9 32 View Module Status ALARM ESC ESC Previous Figure 4 33 Module Status Window This window provides a top level view of the hardware installed in
91. rique n mat pas de bruits radio lectriques d passant les limites applicables aux appareils num riques de la classe A prescrites dans le R glement sur le brouillage radio lectrique dict par le minist re des Communications du Canada CXUG CAN 1 10 6 99 Europe General pan European requirements With the harmonization of Telecommunications in Europe the connection of Terminal Equipment to the Public Telecommunications Networks is regulated by Directives issued by the European Commission Public Telecommunication Network Services provided to Terminal Equipment users may be supplied as a National Service with interface standards specific to the country in which it is provided or as a Pan European Service with a common interface standard throughout all European countries In this section it is stated which product interfaces are compatible with the National and which with the Pan European standards In principle products with the CE markings are intended for use in any European country But in practice products with multiple interfaces require a clearer definition of their compatibility with the public network CE Marked Equipment CXUG 10 6 99 Certain Timeplex equipment is marked with one of the following CE The equipment when correctly installed in accordance with the user manual instructions meets the requirements of the European Electromagnetic and Low Voltage Directives CE168X The equipment when correctly ins
92. the Dual Synchronous Legacy Interface Module is shown in Figure 3 39 9 Figure 3 39 Dual Synchronous Legacy Interface Module DSL The Dual Synchronous Legacy Interface Module performs the following primary functions e Takes synchronous non cell bearing traffic Legacy traffic and converts the data stream to ATM CBR cells adding the appropriate cell overhead e Takes the cells and places them onto the ATM cell bus e Monitors the physical synchronous interface for alarms e Collects statistics on module performance CXUG 3 51 10 6 99 Cell Bus Microprocessor Power Section The Cell Bus Microprocessor Power section of the Dual Synchronous Legacy Interface Module consists of the following e ATM Cell Bus Switching Logic IC ATM Cell Bus Switch along with a RAM IC provides connectivity to the backplane board e 96 Pin DIN connector used to connect onto the ATM Cell Bus e Intel 80C31 microprocessor e Capacitor filtering provided for control and noise suppression Unique Functionality Section e Module equipped with two complete independent synchronous channels e Connectors are High Density DB 26 female type e Configured as a DCE device using DB 26 Female high density connectors A functional block diagram of the Dual Synchronous Legacy Interface Module is shown in Figure 3 40 a INTERFACE 3 DRIVERS amp RECEIVERS SWITCH DRIVERS amp RECEIVERS FUNCTIONS CPU 80
93. the chassis Information is available for each slot including module type and module status More information can be obtained for a particular module by highlighting the module and pressing lt F2 gt This action will bring up a logical interface screen like that shown in Figure 4 34 Intf Name Intf Type Slot Physical Intf Inact Intf Status Walkersville DualT1 Cell 5 A Up SCROLL UP LINE SCROLL DOWN LINE SCROLL UPPAGE SCROLL DOWN PAGE Press F2 to go to the specific interface screen 09 52 View Intf Status ALARM ESC ESC Previous Figure 4 34 Logical Interface Status Window CXUG 4 30 10 6 99 The logical interface status window displays status information for each logical interface defined for a specific module In addition to configuration information name type slot physical interface active the status of the interface is shown This represents a snapshot of the current state of the interface up or down Additional information for each logical interface can be obtained by highlighting the interface and pressing lt F2 gt The screen shown in Figure 4 35 will appear Intf Name Walkersville Slot 5 Intf A Intf Type Dual T1 Cell Card Status T1C gt ATM Cells Interface Status Up HEC Error Cells Loss of Cell Sync CLR Misrouted Cells Loopback No T1C ATM Cells 96 Err Sec Thres None Discarded Cells 96 Errored Secs 87 Discard Cell Secs Last Statistics Reset Hour 13
94. the company Please contact Timeplex Inc for further information EUR 1 Declaration of Conformity EUR 2 NOTICE PUBLIC NETWORK ATTACHMENT APPROVAL HAS BEEN GRANTED ON THE BASIS THAT THE EQUIPMENT IS IDENTICAL TO THAT CERTIFIED DURING TYPE APPROVAL TESTING USERS MUST ENSURE CONFIGURATION AND INSTALLATION IS PERFORMED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE USER MANUAL INSTRUCTIONS AND USING THE SPECIFIED APPROVED CABLES In association with the CE marking of the product Timeplex Inc declares under its sole responsibility that the product known as the Synchrony ST 1000 and the Synchrony ST 20 are in conformity with the following Directives and standards An official copy of the Declaration of Conformity is available upon request European Low Voltage Directive Telecommunications Terminal Equipment Directive Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive CE Marking Directive EN 60950 1992 EN 55022 1987 EN 50082 1 1000 4 2 1000 4 3 1000 4 4 NET 2 CTR 2 CTR 12 CTR 13 NTR4 CTR 24 LVD 73 23 EEC TTE 91 263 EEC EMC 89 336 EEC CEM 93 68 EEC Safety of information technology equipment amp electrical business equipment Limits of radio disturbance characteristics of IT equipment Class A Immunity characteristics Residential Commercial amp Light Industry Electrostatic Discharge Radiated Electromagnetic Field Electrical Fast Transients burst requirements V 11 Point to Point Digital Leased Line
95. to Figure 4 38 Additional information for each logical interface can be obtained by highlighting the interface and pressing lt F2 gt which will bring up the screen shown in Figure 4 41 This screen contains information that is tailored to the interface Name Germantown Slot 2 Intf A Type OC3 Cell Loss of Signal CLR OC3 gt ATM Cells Loss of Frame CLR HEC Error Cells Hardware Failure CLR Misrouted Cells Loss of Cell Sync CLR OC3 lt ATM Cells Loss of Cell Delineation CLR Discarded Cells Loss of Pointer CLR Discard Cell Secs Signal Label Mismatch CLR Line AIS CLR Path AIS CLR Line CLR Path CLR Path Trace Mismatch CLR Last Statistics Reset Hour 11 00 Card Status Up Port Status Up Loopback No REFRESH HISTORY 12 25 View Intf OC3 ALARM UON DUKE ESC ESC Previous Figure 4 41 Specific Interface Window OC3 Cell Entries for this window include Loss of Signal Indicates presence or absence of a valid optical signal at the interface Loss of Frame Presence or absence of a SONET frame Hardware Failure Self explanatory Loss of Cell Sync Indication of whether the interface is in synchronization with cells Loss of Cell Delineation Indication of whether the interface is in synchronization with cells on the bus side Loss of Pointer Presence or absence of a valid STS 3c pointer Signal Label Mismatch
96. types of VCCs e Control connections carry administrative messages such as requests for initial configuration and for addresses of other LECs e Data connections handle all other communications In particular they link clients to each other for data direct unicast communications and they link clients to the BUS for broadcast and multicast messages While legacy LANs make heavy use of multipoint to multipoint broadcast ATM supports only point to point unicast and point to multipoint broadcast or multicast connections The LES and BUS work together to transfer unicast and broadcast traffic e The LES handles address resolution and control information Its primary job is to register and resolve MAC addresses to ATM addresses e The BUS is designed for carrying broadcast data such as TCP IP address resolution broadcasts or Novell Service Advertising Protocol SAP messages It also handles all multicast traffic Finally it broadcasts the initial unicast frames sent by the LEC while the MX17358 1 4 30 00 LES works in tandem to provide the appropriate ATM address for establishing a data direct VCC Joining an ATM Network When a LEC first powers up it must obtain configuration information from the LECS in order to join an emulated LAN The LANE specification offers several options for locating the LECS e The LEC can use a well known address as defined by the ATM Forum The Well Known Address for finding the LECS is ICD
97. via the Connection Management menus see Configuring Interface Connections Configuring connections to and from synchronous legacy interfaces is very similar to configuring other connections Figure 5 51 shows the configuration map for BIM interface Name BIM 9 Slot 9 Intf A Type BIM VPI VCI i Interface Name VPI VCI Chan Connection Name Priority Catonsville CatonOne High SCROLL UP LINE SCROLL DOWN LINE SCROLL UP PAGE SCROLL DOWN PAGE Press ENTER to update the config database and return to the Main Menu 12 43 CFG Mgmt Map ALARM eeeeoeeoeeeeeee ESC ESC Previous Figure 5 51 Connection Management Mapping Window BIM Configuring connections to and from BIM interfaces is very similar to configuring other connections see Configuring Interface Connections 1 Select the Connect Mgmt command from the Configure menu 2 To configure the connections move the cursor to highlight one of the interfaces 3 Press F2 or ENTER to bring up the connection management map for that interface 4 Usethe Up Down arrow key to move to the Inact field 5 Press F3 to add a new connection or F4 to delete an existing connection Follow the steps described in Configuring Interface Connections to add new connections 6 When done press F1 or move to the EXECUTE button and press ENTER to update the configuration database and return to the main menu or UPDATE and
98. which provides EIA 422 electrical interface this is a DCE interface connecting to DTE HSSI Balanced Serial Synchronous Data Rates 128 Kbps 52 Mbps in 8 Kbps increments NOTE Maximum data rate is dependent on cable length For estimated data rates versus cable lengths see the description in EIA 422 Timing Ref Clock External Internal Diagnostics Alarm Surveillance Facility Loopback Terminal Loopback HEC Applicable Standards ITU T 1 432 af phy 0043 000 Indicators Type Label Color Meaning LED OPNL Green Illuminates when operational code begins running after the boot process is complete Blinks during operational code download LED SYNC Red Off normal indicates synchronization with source On indicates synchronization lost LED BUFF Red Off normal On indicates clock synthesis buffer completely full or completely empty Pinouts CXUG 10 6 99 Pinouts for the high speed HSSI connector are shown in Figure 3 47 and the accompanying table 3 61 Figure 3 47 HSSL Pin Location i To HSSL Module 3 62 CXUG 10 6 99 Hub Router Legacy Interface Module HRIM Overview The Hub Router Legacy Interface Module HRIM is a legacy module that allows IP Ethernet traffic to be integrated into an ATM network The HRIM is configured for an IP address on the LAN Ethernet side and an IP address on the ATM WAN side The HRIM Module has four or
99. 00 REFRESH HISTORY 14 52 View Intf Dual T1 ALARM yon donor ESC ESC Previous Figure 4 35 Specific Interface Window The specific interface screen contains information that is tailored to the interface The sample above represents a T1 Cell interface module Entries for this screen are described in each module section CXUG 4 31 10 6 99 CPU Module CPU To view the statistics for the CPU Module select Module Status from the View menu The window that appears provides a top level view of the hardware installed in the chassis More information can be obtained for the CPU module by highlighting the module and pressing lt F2 gt This action will bring up the specific interface screen shown in Figure 4 36 Slot 8 Type CPU Card Status Active Rx Control Cells 0 Bus Frame CRC Errors 0 UDP Buffer CRC Errors 0 Lost Control Cells 0 Tx Control Cells 0 Last Statistics Reset Hour 11 00 REFRESH 14 52 View Intf CPU PASSES Se ESC ESC Previous Figure 4 36 Logical Interface Status Window CPU Entries for this window include Card Status Active normal indicates that the card is up and in a redundant configuration that it is the active CPU Rx Control Cells Indicates the number of control cells received from interface cards Bus Frame CRC Errors Indicates the number of CRC errors received from the bus UDP Buff
100. 1 Select the Connect Mgmt command from the Configure menu 5 44 CXUG 10 6 99 2 To configure the connections move the cursor to highlight one of the interfaces 3 Press F2 or ENTER to bring up the connection management map for that interface 4 Usethe Up Down arrow key to move to the Inact field 5 Press F3 to add a new connection or F4 to delete an existing connection Follow the steps described in Configuring Interface Connections to add new connections 6 When done press F1 or move to the EXECUTE button and press ENTER to update the configuration database and return to the main menu or UPDATE and ENTER to update the configuration and remain in this window CXUG 5 45 10 6 99 Unstructured E1 Legacy Interface Module UEL Configuring Interfaces To configure a new Unstructured Interface Module UEL interface follow the steps described in Configuring Physical Interfaces to enter the name the interface type the slot the physical interface and the active status indication Press lt F2 gt to enter the interface configuration menu Figure 5 43 shows the interface configuration menu with all fields set to the default values Intf Name Baltimore Slot 7 Intf A Intf Type Unstructure E1 Adaptive Clock No Transmit Clock Source Internal Line Build Out E1 Short Haul 12dB Gain Coding HDB3 EXECUTE Press ENTER To update the config database and retu
101. 1 Long Haul 15 0dB Pulse 24dB Gain T1 Long Haul 22 5dB Pulse 24dB Gain e Coding B8ZS AMI When done move to the EXECUTE button and press ENTER to update the configuration database and return to the main menu CXUG 5 43 10 6 99 Configuring Connections Connections are configured via the Connection Management menus Figures 5 41 and 5 42 show the configuration maps for UTL interfaces Name Middletown Slot 4 Intf A Type Unstructured T1 VPI VCI Dir Interface Name VPI VCI Chan Connection Name Priority lt gt dsc 1 2 12 Germantown High SCROLL UP LINE SCROLL DOWN LINE SCROLL UP PAGE SCROLL DOWN PAGE Press ENTER to update the config database and return to the Main Menu 11 22 CFG Con Mgmt Map ALARM ree ESC ESC Previous Figure 5 41 Connection Management Mapping Window UTL to Cell Bearing Name Middletown Intf A Type Unstructured T1 VPI VCI i Interface Name VPI VCI Chan Connection Name Priority utl 5 3 15 Walker XC3 High SCROLL UP LINE SCROLL DOWN LINE SCROLL UP PAGE SCROLL DOWN PAGE Press ENTER to update the config database andreturnto he Main Menu 11 22 CFG Con Mgmt Map ALARM reis ESC ESC Previous Figure 5 42 Connection Management Mapping Window UTL to UTL Configuring connections to and from UTL interfaces is very similar to configuring other connections see Configuring Interface Connections
102. 13 of 29 E1 Transmit Clock Configuration For each configured SEL interface one of four possible E1 transmit clock sources must be selected in the interface configuration menu On Board the default e Recovered e Internal e Reference On board means the E1 transmit clock is supplied by the SEL s on board clock source Recovered means the E1 transmit clock is derived from the received E1 signal Internal means the E1 transmit clock is supplied by the main CPU board Reference means the E1 transmit clock is supplied by the currently configured reference clock source see Chapter 1 System Timing Note that an SEL interface can be selected as the reference clock source for the system It is important to note that SEL interfaces not configured to use recovered E1 transmit clock must share the same E1 transmit clock configuration For example selecting Reference for one interface automatically changes the clock configuration of all of the interfaces that are not configured for recovered clock When done move to the EXECUTE button and press ENTER to update the configuration database and return to the main menu Configuring Channel Groups The SEL interface configuration menu provides a channel assignment data entry field for each of the 30 E1 payload channels E1 timeslots 1 and 17 channels 0 and 16 are reserved for framing and signaling respectively and cannot be assigned to channel groups These two channels are
103. 13005 X 613006 RS 449 DTE 613003 613007 V 35 613008 613009 85 530 DTE Figure C 2 SCM Module Cabling CXUG C 1 10 6 99 C 2 DSL HSL MODULES LINK 2 OR entr eLINK4 ILC MODULE LINK 100 DLI O MODULE OR RS 449 DTE RS 449 DTE V 35 DTE RS 530 DTE Figure C 3 DSL and HSL Module Cabling CXUG 10 6 99 T1C MODULE 610127 X CSU SMART JACK STRAIGHT 610126 X CSU SMART JACK CROSSOVER CSU SMART JACK STRAIGHT Figure C 4 T1C Module Cabling STL MODULE LINK 2 BFM BIM 1 610127 X LINK 100 DLI 1 entr eLINK CSU ST D PANEL 4 PRI 61362 61359 _ ST D PANEL 4 DSX 1 Figure C 5 STL Module Cabling CXUG C 3 10 6 99 DS 3 MODULE 120405 X DS3 45 Mbps FACILITY Figure C 6 DS3 Module Cabling DSC MODULE 613012 X V 11 X 21 DCE 613008 X 613009 X RS 530 DCE 613003 X V 11 X 35 DCE Figure C 7 DSC Module Cabling 7 CXUG 10 6 99 MODULE 155 Mbps FOXN0004 SINGLE MODE SERVICE SONET 155 Mbps 0005 MULTIMODE SERVICE SONET Figure C 8 OC3 Module Cabling E1C MODULE E1 ATM CELL 610127 X BEARING EQUIPMENT STRAIGHT E1 ATM CELL 610126 X BEARING EQUIPMENT CROSSOVER 120405 X 610127 X pu ia UNBALANCED AW00722 3 OR AW00722 1 AW00722 2 Figure C 9 E1C Module Cabling CXUG C 5 10 6 99 C 6 E3C MODULE HRIM MODULE 120405 X E3 ATM CELL BEARING EQUIP
104. 19 LSAL to9 pin DTE Male nnt terret nn tre i ped B 19 Figure B 20 LSAL to 9 pin DTE Female rrt ttt tete vet teen B 19 Figure B 21 HSSE HSSLEtoDTE nd diede ete le ee et be te oco B 20 Figure B 22 HSSLHSSEI en eere eee ee i ee Eee B 21 Figure C 1 Nonredundant CPU Module Cabling eene nee C 1 Figure C 2 S CM Module Cabling iiic EE DE AANA tete C 1 Figure C 3 DSL HSL Module C 2 Figure C A TIC Module Cabling s eret tree a et et eet et et ret e Feed oed C 3 Fieure C55 S TE Module Cabling e ee edu d d e de dg p e ee C 3 Figure C 6 053 Module Cabling eese enne eene eene enhn e C 4 CXUG xviii 10 6 99 Figure C A DSC Mod le Cab Ng a A AAAA C 4 Figure C 3 0C535 Module Cabling 5 2 5 2 i oe eee oos furo esta os ios ipo Choir ooo C 5 Figure C 9 EIC Module Cabling mmm ae in an Arn Se eaters C 5 Figure C 10 E3C Module Cabling inei aeoea i 6 Figure 11 HRIM Module C 6 Figure C 12 LSAL Module Cabling C 7 Figure 13 UTEL Module Cablimng 5 5 5 5 2 5 5 2
105. 1991 T1 231 T1E1 2 93 020 T1S1 5 92 029R3 ITU T G 784 ITU TS 1 432 ITU TS 1 610 Bellcore TR NWT 00112 TR NWT 000253 lt 7 Watts Optical Transceiver Specifications Optical Transmitter Specifications Short reach multimode LED wax unis m Extinction Ratio temin 9 dB Optical Receiver Specifications Short reach multimode LED escrow CXUG 10 6 99 3 21 Optical Transmitter Specifications Intermediate single mode MLM laser mn Deme m Optical Receiver Specifications Intermediate single mode MLM laser ums Average Received Power P 44 dim Optical Path Power Penalty Po 1 dB Laser Radiation Hazards The OC3 interface module with the single mode MLM laser emits a laser beam onto a fiber optic connection This is a Class 1 laser product complying with IEC 825 1 and FDA 21 CFR 1040 10 1040 11 Observe the warning and precaution listed below WARNING THE FIBER OPTIC CONNECTORS MAY EMIT LASER LIGHT THAT CAN INJURE YOUR EYES NEVER LOOK INTO AN OPTICAL FIBER CONNECTOR OR CABLE PRECAUTION Working with fiber optic cables can be hazardous to personnel and if mishandled can cause injury to personnel or permanent damage to the cables Jitter Specifications Jitter Frequency Maximum Tolerated Ji
106. 3 25 configuring 5 13 Indicators 3 28 Optical Transceiver Options 3 26 Overview 3 24 Pinouts 3 28 Specifications 3 26 statistics 4 39 Unique Module Functionality 3 25 On board Timing channel timing 1 11 Operation initial logon 4 3 initial startup 4 1 local management station 4 1 logon access levels 4 3 main menu 4 7 menu operation 4 5 menu selection 4 6 module statistics 4 30 network management 4 16 STL Module 3 46 windows hyper terminal software 4 2 Optical Transceiver Options OC3 Module 3 21 OC3C Module 3 26 Overview ATM cell 1 2 bus timing 1 10 Cell bus 1 2 channel port timing 1 10 CX 1500 chassis 1 4 CX 1540 chassis 1 5 CX 1580 Chassis 1 6 data bus timing 1 10 equipment description 1 4 external timing 1 12 interface modules 1 2 performance characteristics 1 17 Power Supply Module 1 9 Station Clock Module 1 9 system cooling 1 16 system timing 1 10 Passwords 4 3 changing 4 4 IN 5 Performance Characteristics electrical 1 17 environmental 1 17 overview 1 17 physical 1 17 Physical Interfaces configuring 5 2 Pinouts 4 Wire EML Module 3 87 CPU Module 3 7 DS3 Module 3 35 DSC Module 3 32 E1C Module 3 39 E3C Module 3 42 HRIM Module 3 64 HSL Module 3 58 HSSL Module 3 61 LSAL Module 3 67 OC3 Module 3 23 OC3C Module 3 28 SCM Module 3 15 STL Module 3 50 Module 3 18 UD3L Module 3 76 UE3L Module 3 80 UTEL M
107. 3 Cell Interface Module Functional Block Diagram Specifications Port Capacity One Media Coaxial Cable Connector BNC Female Framing CAS CRC4 or CAS Port Speed 34 368 Mbps CXUG 3 41 10 6 99 Timing Recovered Onboard Diagnostics Signal Loopbacks Self Test Alarm Surveillance LOS LOF LOC AIS Sync Fail Hardware Fail FERM PLCP Path RAI DS3 Path RFI Alarm Statistics Physical Layer Line Layer DS3 Path Layer PLCP Path Layer and ATM Layer Applicable Standards ITU G 703 G 804 af vtoa 0078 000 Channel Emulation Service CES v2 0 1 97 ATM Forum E3 UNI v3 1 af_phy 0016 0000 Power lt 7 Watts Indicators we ume coir wearing LED OPNL Green when operational code begins running after the boot process is complete Blinks during operational code download LED Rx Syn Green Indicates that the module has achieved frame synchronization with the received E3 when lit loss of frame synchronization when extinguished LED Ce Syn Green Indicates that the module has achieved synchronization with the ATM cell HEC in the received E3 payload when lit loss of cell synchronization when extinguished Pinouts Pinouts for the BNC connectors are as shown in Figure 3 30 Figure 3 30 BNC Pin Location 3 42 CXUG 10 6 99 Structured T1 Legacy Module STL Overview The Structured T1 Legacy STL Interface Module allows voice and data contained in T1 channel
108. 500 CX 1540 CX 1580 OC3 module or an OC3 interface on a Fore switch ATMARP Server The sample procedure below pertains to an OC3 interface on a CX 1500 CX 1540 CX 1580 For information on configuring SNMP connections for other equipment types see the user documentation for the ATMARP Server hardware you have chosen To configure the SNMP connection to the ATMARP Server 1 From the CX 1500 CX 1540 CX 1580 craft display select the SNMP command from the Configuration menu 2 Tab to Logical Intf and toggle the field until the OC3 module appears use the space bar for toggling 3 Move to the Service Type field and toggle to IP 4 Move to the Telnet Disconnect Timeout and enter a timer expiration in seconds 60 to 999 5 Move to the IP button and press lt ENTER gt 6 When the next window appears tab to the VPI field and enter a VPI e g 0 7 Tab to the VCI field and enter a VCI e g 33 NOTE Ifthe CPU is directly connected to the HRIM the VPI VCI values cannot be modified 8 Tab to Execute and press lt ENTER gt The OC3 is now configured to route SNMP data on VPI VCI 0 33 Configuring LANE Connections To configure LANE connections perform the following 1 From the CX 1500 CX 1540 CX 1580 craft display select the SNMP command from the Configuration menu 2 Tab to Logical Intf and toggle the field to select the SNMP interface normally this is an Move to the Service Type field and toggle to LANE
109. 55 Mbps A front panel view of the OC3C Cell Interface Module is shown in Figure 3 16 Figure 3 16 OC3C Cell Interface Module OC3C The module performs the following primary functions e Takes OC3C ATM cell data and uncouples the cells from the physical OC3C interface Takes the cells and places them onto the ATM Cell bus Monitors the physical interface for alarms e Collects statistics on module performance 3 24 CXUG 10 6 99 Cell Bus Microprocessor Power Section The Cell Bus Microprocessor Power section of the OC3C module consists of the following ATM Cell Bus Switching Logic IC ATM Cell Bus Switch along with a RAM IC provides connectivity to the backplane board 96 Pin DIN connector used to connect onto the ATM Cell Bus Motorola 68340 microprocessor Capacitor filtering provided for control and noise suppression ATM Physical Interface chip Optical interface device to interface with external devices Unique Module Functionality Section The OC3C Cell Module is a compact subassembly that provides the hardware necessary to terminate a OC3C facility interface recover clock access the ATM cells within the SONET SDH payload and provide these cells to the switching fabric In the transmit direction the process is reversed ATM cells are taken off the switching fabric and mapped into the SONET SDH payload which is then properly formatted and clocked out on the OC3C facility A functional block diagram of the OC3C Cell
110. 7 LSAL to 25 Pin DTE Male CXUG 10 6 99 CXUG 10 6 99 GND RXD TXD CTS RTS GND RXD TXD CTS RTS Ru 45 LSAL RJ45 25DTE M 25 PIN MALE 613014 X FEMALE Figure B 18 LSAL to 25 Pin DTE Female GND RXD TXD CTS RTS GND RXD TXD CTS RTS LSAL DCE RJ 45 LSAL RJ45 25DTE M 9 PIN MALE 613015 X MALE GND RXD TXD CTS RTS Figure B 19 LSAL to 9 pin DTE Male LSAL DCE GND RXD TXD CTS RTS RJ 45 LSAL RJ45 9DTE F 9 PIN MALE 613016 X FEMALE Figure B 20 LSAL to 9 pin DTE Female B 19 CONNECTOR A CONNECTOR B TO HSSL DTE TO DCE 355 e e xd lt 32 DCE READY d pa og RECEIVED DATA FROM DCE is lt i D lt 3 NOT USED i o TMNG bCE SOURCE NT 31 ij i 1 et D DTE READY a TMNG DCESOURCE t E bcc 10 LOOPBACK A Me gt lt D lt x TRANSMITTED DATA TO DCE is a B 12 LOOPBACK B F ba 19 NOT USED 4 lt 15 NOTUSED gt ce P 18 NOTUSED x 6 17 NOTUSED He Se XT 18 NOTUSED PX PRORGSINDCEMODE 2 DX re NOT USED 22 gt lt nS a 5 NOT USED A e lt K NOT USED AE D lt 24 TEST
111. 72 16 102 52 IP Enet Mask 255 255 255 0 IP ATM 172 16 101 52 IP Gateway 172 16 102 100 Dallas NYC Channel Configuration 172 16 103 0 ID Remote ATM IP Remote Enet IP Remote Enet IP Mask BW VPINC 0 93 DAL 172 16 101 53 172 16 103 0 255 255 255 128 5 WDC 172 16 101 54 172 16 103 128 255 255 255 128 5 of Jor Jof VPI VCI 0 91 ATM Network 172 16 101 0 Washington 172 16 104 0 VPI VCI 0 92 NYC WDC 172 16 102 0 Configuration IP Enet 172 16 103 129 x vo d IP Enet Mask 255 255 255 128 Gateway Eee IP ATM 172 16 101 54 172 16 102 100 IP Gateway 172 16 101 52 NYC DAL ID Remote ATM IP 172 16 101 52 172 16 101 53 WDC Channel Configuration Remote Enet IP Remote Enet IP Mask BW 172 16 102 0 255 255 255 0 5 172 16 103 0 255 255 255 128 5 Figure 5 37 Sample Network Topography Using Variable Length Subnet Mask CXUG 10 6 99 Low Speed Asynchronous Legacy Interface Module LSAL Configuring Interfaces CXUG 10 6 99 To configure a new Low Speed Asynchronous Legacy Interface Module LSAL interface follow the steps described in Configuring Physical Interfaces to enter the name the interface type the slot the physical interface and the active status indication Press lt F2 gt to enter the interface configuration menu Figure 5 38 shows the interface configuration menu with all fields set to the default values Intf Name Darnestown Slot 4 Intf A Intf Typ
112. 99 Dual Synchronous Legacy Interface Module DSL To view the statistics for the Dual Synchronous Legacy Interface Module DSL select Module Status from the View menu More information can be obtained for a particular module by highlighting the module and pressing lt F2 gt This will bring up the logical interface screen for this module similar to Figure 4 38 Additional information for each logical interface can be obtained by highlighting the interface and pressing lt F2 gt which will bring up the screen shown in Figure 4 49 This screen contains information that is tailored to the interface Intf Name Gaithersburg Slot 3 Intf A Intf Type Dual Sync Leg Card Status Up DSL gt ATM Cells 0 Interface Status Up DSL lt ATM Cells 0 Loopback No Discarded Cells 0 Discard Cell Secs 0 Last Statistics Reset Hour 11 00 REFRESH HISTORY 13 40 View Intf DSL ALARM ESC ESC Previous Figure 4 49 Specific Interface Window Dual Sync Leg The entries for this window are the same as previously described Selecting the lt HISTORY gt button provides statistics for this module similar to those shown in Figure 4 40 CXUG 4 46 10 6 99 High Speed Synchronous Legacy Interface Module HSL To view the statistics for the High Speed Synchronous Legacy Interface Module HSL select Module Status from the View menu More information can be obtained for a particular mod
113. ADP CABLE CSU Smart Jack 15 PIN 15 PIN MALE MALE Figure B 11 T1C Via BADP Cable to CSU Smart Jack Crossover 61385 TO DS3 DS 3 SERVICE BNC BNC MALE MALE Figure B 12 DS3 Module to DS3 45 Mbps Service 120405 X TO FIBER SPLICE PANEL WITH ST 0C 3 CONNECTOR COUPLINGS SINGLE MODE FIBER SC FIBER ST FIBER CONNECTOR CONNECTOR Figure B 13 OC3 Module to 155 Mbps SONET Single Mode Fiber 0004 B 16 CXUG 10 6 99 CXUG 10 6 99 TO FIBER SPLICE PANEL WITH SC OC 3 CONNECTOR COUPLINGS MULTIMODE FIBER SC FIBER SC FIBER CONNECTOR CONNECTOR Figure B 14 OC3 Module to 155 Mbps SONET Multimode Fiber 0005 FG SDA 2 SDB RDA RDB RTA RTB RSA RSB RRA RRB TTA TTB SG 26 PIN 15 PIN MALE MALE Figure B 15 DSC Module to V 11 X 21 613012 X RJ45 UXMTB UXMTA URCVB URCVA N C N C N C N C TO PORT RJ45 TO HUB UXMTB UXMTA URCVB URCVA N C N C N C N C ONTA EN 10BASE T CABLE COMATPX1013 Figure B 16 IEEE 802 3 Ethernet Il Cable Wiring GND RXD TXD CTS RTS GND RXD TXD CTS RTS RJ 45 LSAL RJ45 25DTE M 25 PIN MALE 613013 X MALE Figure B 1
114. AGNETIC EMISSIONS STANDARDS AND IS SUITABLE FOR USE IN COMMERCIAL AND LIGHT INDUSTRIAL ENVIRONMENTS WHEN INSTALLED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE USER INSTRUCTIONS THIS EQUIPMENT IS NOT APPROVED FOR USE IN PARTICULARLY DAMP ENVIRONMENTS WHERE WATER OR MOISTURE IS PREVALENT THIS EQUIPMENT MUST BE CONNECTED TOA PROTECTIVE EARTH IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE INSTRUCTIONS IN THE INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL IMPROPER EARTHING MAY RESULT IN AN ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD A WARNING This is a Class A product In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures EUR 4 CXUG 10 6 99 EUROCABLES CXUG 10 6 99 With the advent of Pan European Public Network Interface Standards Timeplex Equipment is approved for connection to European Public Networks using standard cables applicable to the European Marketplace These cables form part of the Attachment Approval and should be ordered using their associated Part Numbers To maintain full compliance with the Interface specifications attention is drawn to the maximum and minimum lengths and baud rates specified on some interfaces which are known to be fully compliant Reference should be made to ITU T formerly CCITT documents which recommend the expected relationship between length and baud rate for reliable operation The CX modules present their network interfaces either on module card connector or at the end c
115. ATM CELL INTERFACE BUS TYPE SWITCH FUNCTIONS CPU 68340 FILTERS E 2 2 Q a Figure 3 61 Unstructured E3 Legacy Interface Module Functional Block Diagram 3 78 CXUG 10 6 99 Jumper Settings The jumper settings listed are factory set defaults No user configuration is required Specifications Port Capacity Electrical Port Speed Media Connector Line Coding Line Format Data Format Timing Status amp Statistics Diagnostics Jumper Pins J2 Open J4 Open One ANSI T1 404 Bellcore TR NWT 000499 ACCUNET T45 G 703 34 368 Mbps Unbalanced 75 Ohm Co axial cable BNC Female HDB3 or AMI Unbalanced bi polar ATM Cells Reference Recovered Standard status and statistics provided Facility Loopback Terminal Loopback Bi directional Applicable Standards ANSI T1 109 ANSI T1 107 Power lt 7 watts Indicators Type Label Color Meaning LED OPNL Green Illuminates when operational code begins running after the boot process is complete Blinks during operational code download Off No power to module failed CPU failed LED S Red When the S SYNC LED is ON it indicates that synchronization with the source has been lost OFF is the Normal indication LED B Red When the B Buffer LED is ON it indicates that the clock synthesis buffer is completely full or completely empty OFF is the Normal indication LED Re
116. Active CPU the second one will become the Standby The Standby CPU will adjust its configuration database to match that of the Active CPU If the Standby CPU resets it will boot up and again become the Standby CPU adjusting its configuration database to match that of the Active CPU If the Active CPU resets the Standby CPU will immediately become Active When the CPU that reset boots up it will become the Standby CPU adjusting its configuration database to match that of the Active CPU An active CPU that fails will result in the same actions as a CPU that resets The following is a brief explanation of the roles of the Active CPU and the Stand by CPU Active CPU Operation The active CPU controls all shelf activity including Downloading the interface modules Sending keep alive messages to ensure that the interface modules are operating correctly Monitoring bus activity such as keep alive responses from interface modules to determine which modules are present and operating properly Directing interface modules to establish connections Processing configuration changes entered by the user Recording interface module related alarms such as module up down and interface up down events Processing statistics from interface modules Sending database updates to the standby CPU when necessary Standby CPU Operation The standby CPU assumes a more passive role and is responsible for Monitoring bus activity such as keep alive respons
117. B 1A CPU craft interface to VT100 terminal 650074 X CPU VT100 25F 9 Pin DB F 25 Pin DB F B 1B CPU craft interface to VT100 terminal 650075 X CPU VT100 25M 9 Pin DB F 25 Pin DB M B 1C CPU craft interface to VT100 terminal 610133 X ST NCP MDM 9 Pin DB F 25 Pin DB M B 2 CPU craft interface to VT100 terminal via modem 613008 X DSC 530M 26 Pin HDB M 25 Pin DB B 3 DSC Module DTE to RS 530 ATM M facility DSL HSL Modules DCE and SCM Module to V 11 RS 530 613009 X DSC 530F 26 Pin HDB M 25 Pin DB B 3 DSC Module DTE to RS 530 ATM F facility DSL HSL Modules DCE and SCM Module to V 11 RS 530 613004 X DSL HSL ILC 26 Pin HDB M 25 Pin DB B 4 DSL HSL Modules to LINK 2 or M entr eLINK ILC Module 613005 X DSL HSL SCM 449M 26 Pin HDB M 37 Pin DB B 5 DSL HSL Modules to LINK 100 DLI O M Module and RS 449 SCM Module to RS 449 613006 X DSL HSL SCM 449F 26 Pin HDB M 37 Pin DB B 5 DSL HSL SCM Modules to RS 449 F 613003 X DSL HSL SCM V35M 26 Pin HDB M 34 Pin DB B 6 DSC DSL HSL SCM Modules to V 35 M Winchester 613007 X DSL HSL SCM V35F 26 Pin HDB M 34 Pin DB B 6 DSC DSL HSL SCM Modules to V 35 F Winchester 61362 BADP 8 Pin Mod 15 Pin DB F B 9 STL Module to ST Dpanel 4 DSX 1 via BIM PBX cable 61359 T1C Module to CSU Smart Jack straight via DSX 1 CSU cable 61385 61359 BIM PBX F 15 Pin DB M 15 Pin DB M B 10 STL Module via BADP cable to ST Dpan
118. C Line Build Out Equal 75 Norm Trunk Conditioning Signaling Idle 0 Busy 1 Err Sec Threshold 100 Idle Channel Conditioning Voice Idle Tx Clock Out On Board ATM CES w cas Channel 0 1 2 Conn N A 8 9 16 17 N A 24 25 Aggregate data rate for channel grouping Press ENTER To update the config database and return to the Main Menu EXECUTE 09 52 CFG Intf SEL ESC ESC Previous Figure 5 56 Interface Configuration Window SEL The arrow keys are used to move between the different fields Beginning at the Framing field the down arrow key can be used to move the cursor through each field in the following order the space bar is used to move through the possible selections which are given below in parentheses starting with the default Framing CAS CRC4 CAS Line Build Out Equal 75 Norm 120 Norm 75 P R 120 P R 75 HRL1 75 HRL2 120 HRL Err Sec Threshold 100 10 25 50 75 Tx Clock Out On Board Recovered Ref Clock Internal Trunk Conditioning Data Code Idle UAC MUX OOS Trunk Conditioning Signaling Idle 0 Busy 1 Busy 1 Idle 0 Idle Channel Conditioning Voice Idle Data Idle ATM CES w cas basic When done move to the EXECUTE button and press ENTER to update the configuration database and return to the main menu MX17358 1 4 30 00
119. C Module 5 21 E3C Module 5 23 HRIM Module 5 38 HSL Module 5 31 HSSL Module 5 33 OC3 OC3C Module 5 14 STL Module 5 25 Module 5 12 Module 5 51 UD3L Module 5 50 UTEL Module E1 5 47 UTEL Module T1 5 44 Configuring Interface Connections 5 7 Configuring Interfaces 4 Wire EML Module 5 55 BIM Module 5 53 DS3 Module 5 18 DSC Module 5 15 DSL Module 5 28 E1C Module 5 20 E3C Module 5 22 HRIM Module 5 34 HSL Module 5 30 HSSL Module 5 32 LSAL Module 5 41 Multicast 5 57 OC3 OC3C Module 5 13 SCM Module 5 10 STL Module 5 24 Module 5 11 UE3L Module 5 51 UD3L Module 5 49 UTEL Module E1 5 46 UTEL Module T1 5 43 Configuring Physical Interfaces 5 2 IN 2 Configuring STL to Cell Bearing Interface Connections STL Module 5 26 Configuring STL to STL Connections STL Module 5 26 Configuring T1 Transmit Clock STL Module 5 25 Connection Management 5 7 CPU Module 1 5 1 7 3 5 3 6 7 3 active operation 1 8 cell bus 3 6 indicators 3 7 overview 3 5 pinouts 3 7 removing 7 3 standby operation 1 8 statistics 4 32 troubleshooting 6 7 unique functionality 3 6 CPU Redundancy 1 7 active CPU operation 1 8 standby CPU operation 1 8 CX 1500 Chassis 1 4 CX 1500 removing Power Supply Module 7 2 CX 1500 Power Supply Module removing 7 2 CX 1540 Chassis 1 5 CX 1580 Chassis 1 6 Data Bus Timing overview 1 10 DC Power Supply Module 3 12 Diagnostic Menu 4 13 DS 3 C
120. C3 SM SC SM M ST SM M B 14 OC3 Module to 155 Mbps single mode service SONET 0005 SC MM M SC MM M B 15 OC3 Module to 155 Mbps multimode service SONET B 4 CXUG 10 6 99 CPU TERMINAL 1 1 N C RD 2 3 SD SD 3 2 RD NC 4 6 SIGGND 5 5 SIG GND NC 6 4 N C RTS 7 8 CTS CTS 8 7 RTS 9 9 N C 9 PIN 9 PIN FEMALE FEMALE A 9 PIN FEMALE TO 9 PIN FEMALE 650252 X CPU TERMINAL 1 RD 2 SD SD 3 RD NC 4 DSR SIG GND 5 SIG GND NC 6 DTR RTS 7 CTS CTS 8 RTS NC 9 FRAME GND 9 PIN 25 PIN FEMALE FEMALE B 9 PIN FEMALE TO 25 PIN FEMALE 650074 X CPU TERMINAL 1 RD 2 sD SD 3 RD 4 DSR SIG GND 5 SIG GND NC 6 DTR RTS 7 CTS CTS 8 RTS 9 FRAME GND 9 PIN 25 PIN FEMALE MALE C 9 PIN FEMALE TO 25 PIN MALE 650075 X Figure B 1 CPU Craft Interface to VT100 Terminal Non redundant CXUG B 5 10 6 99 CPU MODEM
121. C31 FILTERS DIN CONNECTOR Figure 3 40 Dual Synchronous Legacy Interface Module DSL Functional Block Diagram 3 52 CXUG 10 6 99 Jumper Settings The jumper settings listed are factory set defaults No user configuration is required Jumper Pins J5 1 2 J3 2 3 All other pins are open not connected Specifications Port Capacity Media Electrical Connector Line Format Data Format Data Rates Timing Diagnostics Alarm Surveillance Two Shielded Multi twisted pair cable low capacitance EIA 530 which provides EIA 422 electrical interface this is a DCE interface connecting to DTE HDB 26 Female Balanced Serial Synchronous 16 Kbps 2 048 Mbps in 8 Kbps increments Internal Ref Clock Facility Loopback Terminal Loopback HEC Applicable Standards ITU T 1 432 af phy 0043 000 Indicators Type Label Color Meaning LED OPNL Green Illuminates when operational code begins running after the boot process is complete Blinks during operational code download Pinouts Pinouts for the high speed DB 26 connectors are as shown in Figure 3 41 and the accompanying table CXUG 10 6 99 3 53 Figure 3 41 HDB 26F DCE Pin Location A To DSL Module Se To Terminal 3 54 CXUG 10 6 99 High Speed Synchronous Legacy Interface Module HSL Overview The High Speed Synchronous Legacy Interface Module HSL allows the C
122. CATION The following table lists Timeplex equipment that has received pan European public network certification and is marked CE168X Pan European Public Network Certification PUBLIC NETWORK INTERFACE TIMEPLEX CERTIFIED PUBLIC NETWORK INTERFACE STANDARD MODULES CABLE CTR2 Cable Part No X 21 V 11 613012 X Digital Leased Lines CTR2 Cable Part No V 35 V 11 610121 X Digital Leased Lines CTR 12 SEL 4 SEL 8 Cable Part No G 703 2 048Mb s 1200 UTEL 610127 X unstructured E1C CTR 13 Cable Part No G 703 2 048Mb s 1200 610127 X structured CTR 24 Cable Part No G 703 34Mb s 750 120405 X unstructured structured UK National Attachment Approvals The following table lists Timeplex equipment that has been granted UK national attachment approvals PUBLIC NETWORK INTERFACE TIMEPLEX CERTIFIED PUBLIC NETWORK INTERFACE STANDARD MODULES CABLE NTR 4 UTEL Cable Part No G 703 2 048Mb s 120405 X with either AW00722 2 750 unstructured or AW00722 3 balun s CXUG EUR 8 10 6 99 United States Federal Communication Commission Part 68 Registration Information WARNING This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesirable operation In accordance with FCC Part 15 Subpart B requirements changes or mo
123. CTS Port Settings Data Stop Parity and control lead mapping Status amp Statistics Standard status and statistics provided Diagnostics Facility and Terminal Loopback Alarm Surveillance None Applicable Standards ATM AALS type VBR Power lt 7 Watts Indicators me um cwm wmm LED OPNL Green On Steady Indicates that at least one port is configured and operational On Blinking Downloading program Off No power to module no port configured or CPU failed 3 66 CXUG 10 6 99 Pinouts Pinouts for the RJ 45 connectors are shown in Figure 3 52 and the accompanying table 0 2 8 9 21 Y 2 m E o Figure 3 52 LSAL RJ 45 Pinouts CXUG 3 67 10 6 99 Unstructured T1 E1 Legacy Interface Module UTEL Overview The Unstructured T1 E1 Legacy UTEL Interface Module is the gateway for synchronous non ATM or El traffic into the ATM network The UTEL Module provides either a 1 544 Mbps or E1 2 048 Mbps interface channel per module The module may be configured as either a T1 or El by a strap selection jumper setting on the module The UTEL Module converts legacy traffic into ATM cells The Module does not require any particular framing format the entire 1 544 2 048 Mbit s data rate is carried as cell payload Data entering the module is unstructured meaning that NO fram
124. Cells Cell Bearing Interface Module Figure 1 1 Cell Exchange System Architecture The Cell Exchange system is a modular and scaleable ATM cell multiplexer that operates by using an ATM Cell Bus architecture The system is physically constructed and integrated into a card frame sub chassis The Cell Exchange system comes standard with a shelf power supply module and CPU module Other modules can be integrated into the systems The user has a variety of modules to choose from Once a Cell Exchange system is populated with the modules chosen by the user for a particular application all communications between modules is through the ATM Cell Bus located on the backplane The Cell Exchange uses a passive backplane design that includes the ATM cell bus and dual power and ground tracks Modules and Services The Cell Exchange system extends ATM networks to sites and applications that do not support native ATM interfaces non ATM protocols are referred to as legacy systems in this manual This is accomplished through the use of various Interface Modules A typical example is illustrated in Figure 1 2 1 2 CXUG 10 6 99 Cell Bearing Protocols Interface Cell Bus Cell Modules 662 Mbps Networks Cell or Bearing Applications Bearing ATM FH Power Cell Supply 1 Non Cell Bearing Power Networks Cell Supply 2 s Bearin Lary E y Applications 3 Non Cell Bearing Interface Modules Non Cel Legacy Non Cel CPE Bearing or Non Ce
125. Currently Loaded in the System M1566 3 1 CPUROM Enter an name to identify this version of the application code 8 56 CFG Software Ver OCOOCOOOCOOCOOOOOE ESC ESC Previous Connected 0 07 00 100 86008 SCROLL CAPS NUM Capture Print echo Figure 2 17 Loading New Image Software Download Process Considerations This section lists frequently asked questions regarding the software download process and provides answers to these questions Incompatible Database Prior to executing a code swap command the CX will verify whether the current database is capable of being converted If it is the database will be converted If it is not the database will be flushed Can the NVRAM Backup Be Forced No The user must perform the backup prior to upgrading software CXUG 2 20 10 6 99 What Happens if the DB Conversion is Interrupted The DB convert takes less than one second to execute If the conversion is interrupted the user is left with a corrupted DB The DB will then have to be restored from backup or flushed FTP Security Any IP address can perform an FTP Security is provided by using the admin user name and appropriate level 3 password prior to allowing the FTP session to continue NVRAM Format What if an upgrade failed and the system software is swapped back The scenario is old software with new database Is the NVRAM structure such that the passw
126. Down arrow key to move to the Inact field 5 Press F3 to add a new connection or F4 to delete an existing connection Follow the steps described in Configuring Interface Connections to add new connections NOTE Itis recommended that the priority of HRIM connections be set to Low ABR Setting to a higher priority will cause data throughput to degrade 6 When done press F1 or move to the EXECUTE button and press ENTER to update the configuration database and return to the main menu or UPDATE and ENTER to update the configuration and remain in this window Verifying Network Operation CXUG 10 6 99 Once the network connections are established both the Ethernet and ATM IP addresses should respond to PING It is recommended that a PING be sent to each network element of the IP network to verify connectivity and some level of throughput NOTE Throughput will be a function of ATM line rates and the Bandwidth number assigned to each HRIM channel entered above If the PING originates from a Windows PC configure the Ethernet network to have an IP address on the assigned LAN segment In this example a valid IP address for a PC in NYC might be 192 100 102 60 Also ensure that the PC s gateway address is the IP address of the HRIM Ethernet side e g 192 100 102 52 Once the PC is configured enter PING commands for each network element starting with the closest IP interface C Windows ping 192 100 102 52 NYC H
127. Dual E1 Cell Interface Module E1C E3 Cell Interface Module E3C Accepts OC3C ATM cell data Places the cells on the ATM cell bus Monitors physical interface Collects module performance statistics Software selectable between SONET and SDH Improved clocking for network operations Replacement for original OC3 module Accepts synchronous cell traffic and monitors for corrupted traffic Sends resynchronization signal if corrupted traffic discovered Places the cells on the ATM cell bus Monitors physical interface Collects module performance statistics Accepts 053 cell data Places the cells on the ATM cell bus Monitors the physical interface Collects module performance statistics Accepts E1 cell data Places the cells on the ATM cell bus Monitors physical interface Collects module performance statistics Accepts E3 cell data Places the cells on the ATM cell bus Monitors physical interface Collects module performance statistics CXUG 10 6 99 Table 3 1 Module Summary Cont d Non Cell Bearing Interface Modules component 0 7 Structured T1 Legacy Interface Module STL Synchronous Legacy Interface Module DSL High Speed Synchronous Legacy Interface Module HSL High Speed Serial Legacy Interface Module HSSI Interface HSSL Hub Router Legacy Interface Module HRIM Low Speed Asynchronous Legacy Interface Module LSAL CXUG 10 6 99 Accepts voice or data from T1 channel groups and pa
128. ESF SF e Coding B8ZS AMI Line Build Out Equal 0 7 5 15 0 22 5 133 266 266 399 399 533 533 655 NOTE Selecting a dB value 7 5 15 0 22 5 configures the interface for CSU selecting a distance value configures the interface for DSX 1 The 0 value may represent either dB or distance When representing distance it means 0 133 feet Err Sec Threshold 100 10 25 50 75 e Scramble Cells Enable Disable e Tx Clock Out Recovered Ref Clock Internal On Board CXUG 5 11 10 6 99 When done move to the EXECUTE button and press ENTER to update the configuration database and return to the main menu Configuring Connections connections are configured via the Connection Management menus Figure 5 12 shows the connection management window Name Walkesville Slot 5 Inf A Type Dual T1 Cell Interface Name VPI VCI Chan Connection Name Priority Walkersville Walker One High Germantown German two Med SCROLL UP LINE SCROLL DOWN LINE SCROLL UPPAGE SCROLL DOWN PAGE Press ENTER to update the contig database and return to the Main Menu 09 52 CFG ConMgm Map ALARM ESC ESC Previous Figure 5 12 Connection Management Window Configuring connections to and from T1 interfaces is very similar to configuring other connections see Configuring Interface Connections 1 Select the Connect Mgmt command from the Configure menu 2 To configure the con
129. ET S TL TTL 3 42 STRUCTURED LEGACY MODULE STL sessi 3 43 e eve iei tela esee eee ee ei eie eee o een 3 43 STE Opetatioh e EE LE TEA IE ety 3 46 Specifications se oet e e Re Ue e E Ee PR ERREUR 3 49 j GaTe TEIKO AEREE oet aeneo a ERE EIE RA aee RET ovsdiauscvstsaeeoveterede 3 49 PIBOULS ge DE ie EOD E 3 50 DUAL SYNCHRONOUS LEGACY INTERFACE MODULE DSL 3 51 OVERVIEW AAAA 3 51 Jumper Settings cnn nen DOPOBOPROIB a 3 53 Specifications s bet foede Pepe oat et Sed get Sete tates 3 53 Tidi CATOLS EE E E seat Send ese redes rei Forte ort 3 53 Acte Nate Ree eT 3 53 HIGH SPEED SYNCHRONOUS LEGACY INTERFACE MODULE HSL 3 55 OAE cag cae OT a PO E see epe bee Eve e E eee PEN CE TEE eT 3 55 yi Te 3 57 Specifications ao eed tete e RR OD EE De EE DE PER ERE DEA 3 57 IndiCatOES EUR tee Ut EE te PRO POE ARE A 3 57 D lebe ID 3 58 HIGH SPEED SERIAL INTERFACE LEGACY MODULE HSSL 3 59 OVerVie Wie RN
130. F2 to go to the IP over ATM configuration screen 11 56 CFG SNMP Conf ig 1 GMOOCOCOCOOOOOCOOOOOC ESC ESC Previous Connected 0 11 03 100 600841 SCROLL CAPS NUM Capture Print echo Figure 4 31 SNMP Configuration Window 2 Use the ARROW keys to move to the LANE IP Interface field 3 With the lt SPACE gt bar toggle through the interfaces to select the remote CPU interface in this case via a DS3 cell VPI VCI connection across the ATM cloud 4 Move to the Service Type field and toggle to IP 5 Move to the Telnet Disconnect Timeout and enter a timer expiration in seconds 60 to 999 6 Move to the IP button and press lt ENTER gt This will bring up the screen shown in Figure 4 32 CXUG 4 27 10 6 99 mE IF over Configuration UFI 1 34 HAIN Channs lz 134 175 15 3 eS 295255 i EjC ESC Prev iain Figure 4 32 IP over ATM Configuration Window 7 Moveto the VPI and VCI fields and configure them for the incoming ATM access to the CPU 8 Move to the HRIM Channel and toggle to the channel previously configured Figure 4 31 9 The CPU IP Address should reflect the remote CPU and the Gateway IP Address should show the local HRIM address 10 Move to the EXECUTE button and press ENTER to update the database and return to the main menu FTP Support The user can establi
131. Figure 3 10 Dual T1 Cell Interface Module T1C Cell Bus Microprocessor Power Section 3 16 The Cell Bus Microprocessor Power section of the T1C module consists of the following e ATM Cell Bus Switching Logic IC ATM Cell Bus Switch along with a RAM IC provides connectivity to the backplane board e 96 Pin DIN connector used to connect onto ATM Cell Bus e Intel 80C31 microprocessor e Capacitor filtering provided for control and noise suppression RJ 45 connectors to interface with external devices CXUG 10 6 99 Unique Module Functionality Section The Dual Cell Bearing T1 Module terminates two independent T1 facility interfaces through drivers and receivers The submodule labeled Type Functions AAL1 recovers clock accesses the ATM cells within the T1 payload and sends these cells to the switching fabric In the transmit direction the process is reversed ATM cells are taken off the switching fabric and mapped into the T1 framed payload which is then formatted per ATM Forum specifications and clocked out on the T1 facility A functional block diagram is shown in Figure 3 11 m INTERFACE DRIVERS amp RECEIVERS ATM CELL BUSS r INTERFACE TYPE SWITCH DRIVERS amp RECEIVERS FUNCTIONS CPU 80C31 FILTERS 2 2 Q a Figure 3 11 Dual T1 Cell Interface Module Functional Block Diagram Jumper Settings The jumper settings listed are factory set defaults No user configuration is require
132. Figure 3 54 Unstructured T1 E1 Legacy Interface Module Functional Block Diagram CXUG 3 69 10 6 99 Jumper Settings 3 70 The jumper settings listed are factory set defaults No user configuration is required The following settings are user configurable for the noted card types E1 75 Ohms E1 120 Ohms T1 Jumper Pins J3 1 2 Jumper Pins J5 1 2 J8 1 2 J11 1 2 J15 1 2 J17 1 2 For shield to be grounded Jumper Pins J6 1 2 J9 1 2 J12 1 2 J15 None Jumper Pins J7 1 2 J10 1 2 J13 1 2 J15 None CXUG 10 6 99 Specifications Port Capacity One Electrical El 120 ohms E1 75 ohms Port Speed T1 1 544 Mbps 1 2 048 Mbps Media Shielded Multi twisted pair low capacitance or Co axial cable Connector RJ 45 Female DCE BNC TX RX Line Coding T1 AMI or B8ZS E1 HDB3 or AMI Line Format Unframed Data Format Serial Timing Internal External Ref Clock On Board Status amp Statistics Standard status and statistics provided Diagnostics Facility Loopback Terminal Loopback Bi directional Virtual Connections One VPI VCI Applicable Standards ITU G 703 ETSI DTRBR BT 02036 AAL1 CBR Unstructured Mode Power lt 7 watts Indicators Type Label Color Meaning LED OPNL Green Illuminates when operational code begins running after the boot process is
133. GHT THAT CAN INJURE YOUR EYES NEVER LOOK INTO AN OPTICAL FIBER CONNECTOR OR CABLE PRECAUTION Working with fiber optic cables can be hazardous to personnel and if mishandled can cause injury to personnel or permanent damage to the cables Jitter Specifications Jitter Frequency Maximum Tolerated Jitter Amplitude UI p p 500 Hz 1 3 MHz 1 5 65 kHz 1 3 MHz 0 15 Meets Bellcore s requirement from TR NWT 000253 Indicators Type Label Color Meaning LED OPNL Green Illuminates when operational code begins running after the boot process is complete Blinks during operational code download LED Rx Syn Green Indicates that the module has achieved frame synchronization with the received OC3C when lit loss of frame synchronization when extinguished LED Ce Syn Green Indicates that the module has achieved synchronization with the ATM cell HEC in the received OC3C payload when lit loss of cell synchronization when extinguished Pinouts Pinouts for the SC connector are as shown in Figure 3 18 o o Figure 3 18 SC Duplex Connector 3 28 CXUG 10 6 99 Dual Synchronous Cell Interface Module DSC Overview The Dual Synchronous Cell Interface Module is part of a broad group of standard Interface Modules that have been developed to be used with the ATM Cell Exchange systems A front panel view of the Dual Synchronous Cell Interface Module is shown in Figure 3 19 Figure 3 19 Dual Synchronous Cel
134. H HISTORY 10 01 View Intf UD3L ERE ESC ESC Previous Figure 4 56 Specific Interface Window UD3L The entries for this window are the same as previously described Selecting the lt HISTORY gt button provides statistics for this module similar to those shown in Figure 4 40 CXUG 4 54 10 6 99 Unstructured E3 Legacy Interface Module UE3L To view the statistics for the Unstructured E3 Legacy Interface Module UE3L select Module Status from the View menu More information can be obtained for a particular module by highlighting the module and pressing lt F2 gt This will bring up the logical interface screen for this module similar to Figure 4 38 Additional information for each logical interface can be obtained by highlighting the interface and pressing lt F2 gt which will bring up the screen shown in Figure 4 57 Name Dunkirk Slot 9 Int Type Unstructure E3 Card Status Up Interface Status Up Loopback No BPV Errored Seconds 0 Last Statistics Reset Hour 23 00 UESL ATM Cells lt Cells Discarded Cells Discard Cell Secs Out of Sync Events Out of Seq Cells Invalid Cells Corrected Cells Buffer Events REFRESH HISTORY 0 10 01 View Intf ESC ESC Figure 4 57 Specific Interface Window UE3L These entries are the same as the UD3L Previous
135. ID Remote ATM IP Remote Enet IP Remote Enet IP Mask BW NYC 172 16 101 52 172 16 102 0 255 255 255 0 10 WDC 172 16 101 54 172 16 104 0 255 255 255 0 10 Ier NYC Configuration IP Enet 172 16 102 52 IP Enet Mask 255 255 255 0 IP ATM 172 16 101 52 IP Gateway 172 16 101 53 Dallas NC NYC Channel Configuration 172 16 103 0 VPI VC 0 93 Gateway ID Remote ATM IP Remote Enet IP Remote Enet IP Mask BW t 172 16 103 100 DAL 172 16 101 53 172 16 103 0 255 255 255 0 10 WDC 172 16 101 54 172 16 104 0 255 255 255 0 10 omo or joi lere VPI VCI 0 91 ATM Network 172 16 101 0 Washington 172 16 104 0 VPI VCI 0 92 NYC WDC 172 16 102 0 Configuration IP Enet 172 16 104 54 lan pe IP Enet Mask 255 255 255 0 172 16 102 20 IP ATM 172 16 101 54 IP Gateway 172 16 101 53 WDC Channel Configuration ID Remote ATM IP Remote Enet IP Remote Enet IP Mask BW NYC 172 16 101 52 172 16 102 0 255 255 255 0 10 DAL 172 16 101 53 172 16 103 0 255 255 255 0 10 Figure 5 32 Sample Network Topography Configuring Interfaces To configure a new Hub Router Interface Module HRIM interface follow the steps described in C
136. IN connector used to connect onto the ATM Cell Bus e Motorola 68340 microprocessor e Battery backed RAM e Capacitor filtering provided for control and noise suppression DB 9M connector to interface with an external VT100 type device for the craft interface Unique Module Functionality Section 3 6 A DB 9 male connector installed on the front of the module is used for configuration and diagnostics on the Cell Exchange system The drivers and receivers used for this interface are asynchronous and meet RS 232C interface standards Four LEDs mounted on the front panel provide indications of the functioning of the module CXUG 10 6 99 Specifications Port Capacity One Media Null modem Connector DB 9 Male Connection Capacity 10 240 channels VPI VCI Translation available VPI 0 39 VCI 0 255 VPI only Translation VPI 40 255 Power lt 7 watts Indicators coor LED OPNL Green Illuminates when operational code begins running after the boot process is complete Blinks during loading of a new operational code image LED FAIL CPU card processor has entered a HALT condition Normally a brief condition the software watchdog should reset the card within one second clearing the FAIL condition LED ACTV Green On Module is active Off Module is standby ACCS Indicates that CPU module is being accessed from a user interface Pinouts Pinouts for the DB 9M DTE connector o
137. Interface 3 24 Station Clock Interface 3 14 Structured T1 Legacy 3 43 Unstructured DS3 T3 Legacy 3 73 Unstructured E3 Legacy 3 77 Unstructured T1 E1 Legacy 3 68 Overview 4 Wire EML Module 3 84 BIM Module 3 81 CPU Module 3 5 DS3 Module 3 33 DSC Module 3 29 E1C Module 3 36 CXUG 10 6 99 E3C Module 3 40 HRIM Module 3 63 HSL Module 3 55 HSSL Module 3 59 LSAL Module 3 65 OC3 Module 3 19 OC3C Module 3 24 SCM Module 3 14 STL Module 3 43 T1C Module 3 16 UD3L Module 3 73 UE3L Module 3 77 UTEL Module 3 68 removing 7 2 replacing 7 2 Modules and Services 1 2 Module Statistics 4 30 4 Wire EML Module 4 57 BIM Module 4 56 CPU Module 4 32 DS3 Module 4 41 DSC Module 4 40 DSL Module 4 46 E1C Module 4 42 E3C Module 4 43 HRIM Module 4 49 HSL Module 4 47 HSSL Module 4 48 LSAL Module 4 50 OC3 Module 4 37 OC3C Module 4 39 SCM Module 4 33 STL Module 4 44 T1C Module 4 34 UD3L Module 4 54 UE3L Module 4 55 UTEL Module E1 4 52 UTEL Module T1 4 53 Module Summary 3 1 Multicast Feature configuring 5 57 Network Loopback 6 8 Network Management 4 16 OC 3 Cell Interface Module 3 19 OC3 Module cell bus 3 20 configuring 5 13 indicators 3 23 laser radiation hazards 3 22 optical transceiver options 3 21 overview 3 19 CXUG 10 6 99 pinouts 3 23 specifications 3 21 statistics 4 37 unique functionality 3 20 OC 3C Cell Interface Module 3 24 OC3C Module Cell Bus
138. Kbps Text string 16 20 000 kbps in 8kbps intervals e Scramble Cells Enable Disable e TT Clock Source ST RT Ref Clock Internal Queue Mode Split Single For Secured Networks e Transmit Zero Blocks Disable Enable e Resync Signal Idle State Low High Resync Delay Seconds Text string Resync Period Seconds Text string Resync Duration Seconds Text string CXUG 5 15 10 6 99 When done move to the EXECUTE button and press ENTER to update the configuration database and return to the main menu Configuring Connections Connections are configured via the Connection Management menus Figure 5 16 shows the configuration management mapping window for the DSC Name Frederick Intf A Type Dual Sync Cell VPI VCI Dir Interface Name VPI VCI Chan Connection Name Priority lt gt Emmitsburg Emmit One Low lt gt Walkersvillen Walkers Two High SCROLL UP LINE SCROLL DOWN LINE SCROLL UP PAGE SCROLL DOWN PAGE Press ENTER to update the config database and return the Main Menu 11 22 CFG Con Mgmt Map ALARM eee ESC ESC Previous Figure 5 16 Configuration Management Mapping Window Dual Sync Cell Configuring connections to and from DSC interfaces is very similar to configuring other connections see Configuring Interface Connections 1 Select the Connect Mgmt command from the Configure menu 2 configure the connections
139. LLE NETZKABEL TRENNEN UM ELEKTRISCHEN SCHLAG ZU VERHINDERN CET APPAREIL COMPORT PLUS D UN CORDON D ALIMENTATION AFIN DE PREVENIR LES CHOCS ELECTRIQUES DEBRANCER TOUS LES CORDONS D ALIMENTATION AVANT LA MAINTENANCE About This Manual This manual supports Release 4 0 of the Synchrony Cell Exchange system The Synchrony Cell Exchange User s Guide is part of the Synchrony library The primary purpose of the Synchrony Cell Exchange User s Guide is to assist in installation initial configuration and operation of a Cell Exchange system This manual is intended to supplement not replace formal training Timeplex Inc recommends that users obtain formal training prior to using this product Contact the Registrar at 1 954 846 6434 for information NOTES Throughout this manual the term system and the expression Cell Exchange system are used to apply to the CX family of Cell Exchange Models collectively The term module is used throughout this manual to represent component cards that have specific application and have been designed for use in the CX family of systems Organization of This Manual This manual describes the Synchrony Cell Exchange system This covers the physical design basic and expanded configurations and the available modules to expand the system to meet the user s parameters The information is organized as follows e Chapter 1 Overview provides a brief summary of ATM service the f
140. M LAN each LES supporting a different emulated LAN The Broadcast and Unknown Server BUS receives all broadcast and multicast packets and transmits these messages to every member of the emulated LAN A LEC is associated with only a single BUS for each emulated LAN Each BUS is identified by a unique ATM address which the LES associates with a broadcast MAC address The LAN Emulation Configuration Server LECS maintains configuration information about the A TM network and supplies the address of the LES to a LEC when it is initialized With this information LECs can perform their own configuration and join networks automatically The LECS also enables network administrators to control which physical LANs are combined to form VLANs The LECS assigns individual LANE clients to emulated LANs through the LES One LECS serves all emulated LANs within an administrative domain The LECS is responsible for dynamically assigning different LECs to different emulated LANs It provides the clients with the address of the most appropriate LES and maintains a database of the resultant associations It can assign a LEC to an emulated LAN based on either physical location as specified by the LEC s ATM address or by logical association A single LECS can manage the configuration information for a very large ATM network since its responsibilities are limited to initial configuration LECs communicate with the LAN Emulation service functions through two different
141. MENT Figure C 10 E3C Module Cabling COMATPX 1013 IP ETHERNET 10 BASE T ROUTER OR WORKSTATION STRAIGHT 120405 X BNC TO BNC DEVICE Figure C 11 HRIM Module Cabling CXUG 10 6 99 LSAL MODULE 25 PIN DTE WORKSTATION 613014 X FEMALE 25 PIN DTE NON WORKSTATION DEVICE 613015 X MALE 9 PIN DTE NON WORKSTATION DEVICE 9 PIN DTE WORKSTATION Figure C 12 LSAL Module Cabling UTEL MODULE NON FRAMED E1 OR T1 EQUIPMENT STRAIGHT 610127 X NON FRAMED 610126 X E1 OR 1 EQUIPMENT CROSSOVER 120405 X NON FRAMED E1 EQUIPMENT UNBALANCED Figure C 13 UTEL Module Cabling CXUG C 7 10 6 99 HSSL MODULE 612751 X DTE HSSI DEVICE STRAIGHT 612529 X DCE HSSI DEVICE CROSSOVER Figure C 14 HSSL Module Cabling UD3L MODULE 120405 X T3 DEVICE Figure C 15 UD3L Module Cabling UE3L MODULE 120405 X E3 DEVICE Figure C 16 UE3L Module Cabling C 8 CXUG 10 6 99 The tables in this appendix list the replacement parts that are available Please note that part Appendix D Field Replaceable Units numbers sometimes change Each part number should be verified with customer support or a sales representative before ordering Table D 1 CX 1500 CX 1540 CX 1580 Field Replaceable Units Part Number Unit Description CX 1500 15 Slot Base System 160402 1 CX 1500 Basic Unit 15 Slot Chassis with Backplan
142. Module SEL functions identically to the Structured T1 Legacy Module except that it operates at 2 048 Mbps and the framing format operates with 32 channels rather than 24 The structured E1 Legacy Module terminates four 4 or eight 8 E1 interfaces accesses the DSOs within each E1 converts individual voice DSOs or individual contiguous data DSOs to individually addressable VPI VCIs and converts them to AAL1 CBR formatted ATM cells to be inserted into the ATM network The SEL Module allows voice and data contained in E1 channel groups one or more 64KHz channels to be passed to and from ATM cell bearing equipment The SEL Module supports either four or eight E1 interfaces Both Channel Associated Signaling CAS and CAS CRC4 framing formats are supported El interface configuration is discussed in the following section Figure 3 68 shows the front panel of the SEL Module MX17358 1 4 of 29 4 30 00 SEL OPNL OAOcOEOG OFOH 8 Port Figure 3 68 Structured E1 Legacy Interface Module SEL Channel groups are configured as either voice or data For voice connections the SEL enables CAS ABCD signaling bits for each channel to be passed through the ATM network The user defines the various voice and data channel groupings via the SEL interface configuration menu described in Chapter 5 Each channel group consists of one or more channels The channels can be either contiguous or non contiguous SEL connections are establi
143. Networks Prentice Hall 1995 Goralski Walter J Introduction to ATM Networking McGraw Hill Inc 1995 A 5 Cable Diagrams Appendix B This appendix contains wiring diagrams for CX 1500 CX 1540 CX 1580 cables Tables B 1 and B 2 define which cables are applicable to each module Table B 3 provides an index of the available cables listed by part number Table B 1 Cable Applicability Matrix Cell Module Type Part Number Description CPU SCM OC3C DSC DS3 E1C 650252 X DB 9 F to DB 9 F X 650074 X DB 9 F to DB 25 F X 650075 X DB 9 F to DB 25 M X 610133 X DB 9 F to DB 25 M X 613008 X HDB 26 M to DB 25 M RS 530 613009 X HDB 26 M to DB 25 F RS 530 X 613012 X HDB 26 M to DB 15 M X 613005 X HDB 26 M to DB 37 M X 613006 X HDB 26 M to DB 37 F X 613003 X HDB 26 M to DB 34 M X 613007 X HDB 26 M to DB 34 F X X 610127 X RJ 45 to RJ 45 Straight X 610126 X RJ 45 to RJ 45 Crossover X X 61362 RJ 45 to DB 15 F X 61385 DB 15 M to DB 15 M X 120405 X BNC M to BNC M X X X FOXNO0004 SC M to ST M 0005 SC to SC CXUG 10 6 99 B 1 Table B 2 Cable Applicability Matrix Legacy Module Type Part Description STL DSL HSL HRIM LSAL
144. OLL CAPS NUM Capture echo Figure 2 5 Software Version Window To remove a second copy of an image in Flash use the arrow key to highlight the last image listed The uppermost image is the current image being executed by the CPU Press the F4 key Use the arrow key to highlight the UPDATE button and press lt ENTER gt NOTE This step is very important If it is not performed the second image remains in Flash Since only two images can reside in Flash any attempt to load a new image will fail Using the arrow key highlight the New Version Name field Enter a descriptive name to indicate the version of the software loaded and or operating in the Flash location In the example pictured the version loaded is cpurom hex The hex extension indicates that this is a hexadecimal file used by the craft interface 2 11 Hamei bes Werslone in the Eystan maaa 3 1 9 Praz ENTER t begin the dowload of the new version af applicetion Figure 2 6 New Version Name 6 Press lt ENTER gt The LOAD button should be highlighted Press lt ENTER gt again This will return to the main screen 7 Carefully watch the lower task bar for two messages The first message is Erasing Flash Memory shown in Figure 2 7 The second message is Host is ready to download SW Dia 23 sole 8 System Timing System
145. R ON THE REAR PANEL BEFORE CONNECTING THE CABLE TO THE POWER SOURCE FAILURE TO COMPLY WITH THIS PROCEDURE MAY RESULT IN ELECTRICAL SHOCK PRECAUTIONS Observe electrostatic discharge ESD precautions when handling any Cell Exchange system module If ESD precautions are not taken sensitive components may be permanently damaged Individual external power must be turned off to the chassis prior to removal installation of the individual power supply Severe damage to components may occur if power is not turned off To make a power connection plug one end of a power cord into the system receptacle on the backplane and the other end into the power source receptacle Figure 2 1 shows the AC module receptacle mounted on the rear of the CX 1500 chassis Figure 2 2 shows the DC module and Figure 2 3 shows the CX 1540 CXUG 2 2 10 6 99 Timeplex Inc POWER SUPPLY LISTED 416 Complies with Part 68 FCC Rules FCC Registration No 2HXUSA 33137 DD N EQUIPMENT Made inU S A 69528 POWER SUPPLY B CLASS1 LASER PRODUCT UPPLY CORDS BEFORE SERVICING TO AVOID WARNING THIS UNIT HAS MORE THAN ONE POWER SUPPLY CORD DISCONNECT ALL POWER SI ELECTRICAL SHOCK Figure 2 1 CX 1500 AC Power Connector Module Rear Chassis Timeplex Inc MOTEL OCTO SERIAL VOLTS a0to 60 Made in 69528 LISTED OF eS eoon QO Dom e
146. RIM Ethernet ping 192 100 101 52 NYC HRIM ATM ping 192 100 101 53 Dallas HRIM ATM ping 192 100 103 53 Dallas HRIM Ethernet ping 192 100 101 54 WDC HRIM ATM ping 192 100 104 54 WDC HRIM Ethernet ping 192 100 103 100 Dallas Gateway Ping ICMP blocksizes directed to an HRIM card s own IP address that exceed the fixed MTU setting of 1500 including framing bytes will likely TIMEOUT Use of pings of blocksize 1472 is recommended A sample network using a variable length subnet mask is shown in Figure 5 37 NOTE HRIM modules with release dates prior to 2 99 indicated by a sticker on the module will not support the use of a variable length subnet mask This variable Remote Enet IP Mask should be left at the default 5 39 DAL Configuration IP Enet 172 16 103 53 IP Enet Mask 255 255 255 128 IP ATM 172 16 101 53 IP Gateway 172 16 101 52 DAL Channel Configuration 5 40 ID Remote ATM IP Remote Enet P Remote Enet IP Mask BW NYC 172 16 101 52 172 16 102 0 255 255 255 0 5 WDC 172 16 101 54 172 16 104 0 255 255 255 0 5 NYC Configuration IP Enet 1
147. RJ 45 M to 25 pin DTE F LSAL Module to 25 pin DTE for most non PC DTEs 613015 X LSAL RJ45 9DTE M RJ 45 M to 9 pin DTE M LSAL Module to 9 pin DTE for most non PC DTEs 613016 X LSAL RJ45 9DTE F RJ 45 M to 9 pin DTE F LSAL Module to 9 pin DTE for PCs or workstations COMATPX 1013 10 BASE T RJ 45 M RJ 45 M HRIM Module to hub 10Base T Ethernet straight 0004 OC3 SM SC SM M ST SM M B 13 OC3 Module to 155 Mbps single mode service SONET FOXNO0005 OC3 MM SC MM M SC MM M B 14 OC3 Module to 155 Mbps multimode service SONET Appendix C Cable Applications 1 Page C 5 change the title of Figure C 9 to read EIC SEL Module Cabling MX17358 1 4 30 00 29 of 29 CXUG 10 6 99 WARNING VORSICHT ATTENTION WARNING VORSICHT ATTENTION NO OPERATOR SERVICEABLE PARTS ARE INSIDE THIS EQUIPMENT SERVICE MUST BE PERFORMED BY QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL NICHT VOM BENUTZER REPARIERBARE TEILE IM GEHAUSE BITTE WENDEN SIE SICH AN QUALIFIZIERTES WARTUNGSPERSONAL CET APPAREIL NE CONTIENT AUCUN ELEMENT QUE L UTILISATEUR PUISSE REPARER CONFIER LA MAINTENANCE A UN PERSONNEL TECHNIQUE QUALIFIE THIS EQUIPMENT MAY HAVE MORE THAN ONE POWER SUPPLY CORD DISCONNECT ALL POWER SUPPLY CORDS BEFORE SERVICING TO AVOID ELECTRICAL SHOCK DIESES GERAT HAT MEHERE NETZANSCHLUBE ZUR WARTUNG A
148. Reset Passwords Software Ver SNMP Main Menu Q to Logout m 4 Connected 0 25 58 100 se008 amp N 1 SCROLL CAPS NUM Capture Print echo Figure 2 7 Flash Memory Message 8 From the menu bar of HyperTerminal click on Transfer and Send Text File 9 When the window shown in Figure 2 8 appears select file name CPUROM HEX and click on Open The file transfer will take over 120 minutes to finish CXUG 2 12 10 6 99 Look in a HyperT erminal c Filename HEX Files of type Text file Cancel Figure 2 8 Send Text File Window NOTE Load in progress indications include the OPNL light on the CPU module flashes at a constant rate for the duration of the load and the time stamp freezes lower left corner of the main menu 10 When the load is complete you will be returned to the Login screen Log back in with the appropriate password From the Configure menu select Software Ver Use the arrow key to highlight the second image listed in flash Figure 2 9 which is the software just loaded Verify the filename and press the F2 key This will begin a Code Swap to the new image arma Version m lerzinns Currently Leaded in the Mise 3 1 ntur an name t5 i auntily thin umrrinn af the application code en amp cPtrteftuare I
149. STL interfaces is very similar to configuring other connections For STL connections however the user selects one of the channel groups instead of entering a VPI VCI pair 1 Select the Connect Mgmt command from the Configure menu 2 To configure the connections move the cursor to highlight one of the interfaces 3 Press F2 or ENTER to bring up the connection management map for that interface 4 Usethe Up Down arrow key to move to the Inact field 5 Press F3 to add a new connection or F4 to delete an existing connection Follow the steps described in Configuring Interface Connections to add new connections 5 25 6 When done press F1 or move to the EXECUTE button and press ENTER to update the configuration database and return to the main menu or UPDATE and ENTER to update the configuration and remain in this window STL to Cell Bearing Interface Connections An STL to Cell Bearing connection configuration is illustrated in Figure 5 24 below Here a bi directional connection is about to be enabled between a STL interface channel group V14 and a cell bearing interface such as an OC3 VPI 2 and VCI 12 The channel group selection V14 3 means that the channel group ID is V14 and is comprised of 3 channels To select the desired channel group the user positions the cursor in the channel group selection column under the Chan column and presses the space bar to move through the configured channe
150. Sec Threshold field and select the appropriate percentage This is a tumbler field When an error rate in excess of the threshold occurs it is considered a Major Alarm e Using the TAB or ARROW key move to the Scramble Cells field and select the ATM cell scrambler This is a two position toggle field Enable or Disable f Using the TAB or ARROW key move to the Tx Clock Out field This is a tumbler field press the SPACE bar to move through the selections g Toenter all the selected parameters on the screen move to the EXECUTE block and press ENTER gt This will enter the parameters in the database and return to the Main Menu 10 To delete an interface Figure 5 5 move the cursor to the appropriate line and press F4 Deleting an interface will delete the interface parameter settings VPI VCI connection settings associated with the deleted interfaces will also be deleted 11 When all entries are complete move to the UPDATE button and press ENTER to update the active configuration information or use the lt EXECUTE gt button to update and return to the Main Menu Changes take effect immediately upon execution CXUG 5 5 10 6 99 Transmit Clock Configuration For most modules one of the possible transmit clock sources must be selected in the interface configuration menu e Recovered Internal e Ref Clock e On Board Recovered means the transmit clock is derived from the received
151. Selecting this menu item brings up the window shown in Figure 4 13 Pkts Stats Packets Out Pkts In Bad Versions In Bad Community Names In Bad Community Uses In ASN Parse Errs In Too Bigs In No Such Names In Bad Values In Read Onlys In Gen Errs In Total Req Vars In Total Set Vars In Get Requests In Get Nexts In Set Requests In Get Responses In Traps Out Too Bigs Out No Such Names Out Bad Values Out Gen Errs Out Get Requests Out Get Nexts Out Set Requests Out Get Responses Out Traps ooooooo0o0o 0900 0000 REFRESH Refresh this screen 07 52 View SNMP Stats rei ESC ESC Previous Figure 4 13 SNMP Stats Window from View Menu To clear the statistics use the arrow key s to highlight the CLEAR button and press the lt ENTER gt key This action resets all the SNMP statistics to zero To refresh the screen use the arrow key s to highlight the REFRESH button and press the ENTER key this will display the current accumulated values Diagnostics Menu The Diagnostics menu allows the operator to access Cell Exchange diagnostic routines and database functions Loopback This menu is described in Chapter 6 under the section entitled User initiated Tests Init Database This menu provides the user with a means to clear the contents of the current database Selecting this menu item brings up t
152. Status from the View menu The window that appears provides a top level view of the hardware installed in the chassis Information is available for each slot including module type and module status More information can be obtained for a particular module by highlighting the module and pressing lt F2 gt This will bring up the logical interface screen for this module similar to Figure 4 38 Additional information for each logical interface can be obtained by highlighting the interface and pressing lt F2 gt which will bring up the screen shown in Figure 4 43 This screen contains information that is tailored to the interface Intf Name Frederick Slot 1 Intf A Intf Type Dual Sync Cell Card Status DSC gt ATM Cells Interface Status HEC Error Cells Loss of Cell Sync Misrouted Cells Loopback DSC lt ATM Cells Err Sec Thres Discarded Cells Errored Secs Discard Cell Secs Cells 0 0 0 0 0 0 Last Statistics Reset Hour 10 00 REFRESH HISTORY 12 25 View Intf DSC ALARM SEEN EEE GRE ESC ESC Previous Figure 4 43 Specific Interface Window Dual Sync Cell The entries in this window are the same as the TIC Selecting the lt HISTORY gt button provides statistics for this module similar to those shown in Figure 4 40 CXUG 4 40 10 6 99 DS3 Cell Interface Module DS3 CXUG 10 6 99 To view the statistics for the DS3 Cell Interface Module select
153. Structured T 1 Legacy Module 3 43 operation 3 46 System Administrator 4 3 System Cooling overview 1 16 System Reset Window 4 9 CXUG 10 6 99 System Timing 1 10 1 11 1 12 1 13 1 14 5 6 overview 1 10 setting 5 6 Telnet Support 4 20 Local Session 4 21 Remote Session 4 24 T1 Signaling STL Module 3 48 T1C Module cell bus 3 16 configuring 5 11 indicators 3 18 jumper settings 3 17 overview 3 16 pinouts 3 18 specifications 3 17 statistics 4 34 unique functionality 3 17 Telnet Local Session 4 21 Remote Session 4 25 Telnet Support 4 20 Troubleshooting 6 1 alarm messages 6 2 alarms 6 1 CPU Module 6 7 module indications 6 6 other modules 6 7 Power Supply Module 6 6 traps 6 1 user initiated tests 6 7 Trunk Conditioning Logic STL Module 3 47 UD3L Module cell bus 3 74 configuring 5 49 indicators 3 76 jumper settings 3 75 overview 3 73 pinouts 3 76 specifications 3 75 statistics 4 54 unique functionality 3 74 CXUG 10 6 99 UE3L Module cell bus 3 78 configuring 5 51 indicators 3 79 jumper settings 3 79 overview 3 77 pinouts 3 80 specifications 3 79 statistics 4 55 unique functionality 3 78 npacking 2 1 nstructured DS3 T3 Legacy Interface Module 3 73 nstructured E3 Legacy Interface Module 3 77 nstructured T1 E1 Legacy Interface Module 3 68 ser Initiated Tests troubleshooting 6 7 UTEL Module cell bus 3 69 configuring 5 43 5 46 indicators 3 71 jum
154. Trace EXECUTE Press ENTER To update the config database and return to the Main Menu ESC ESC Previous 09 52 Int Figure 5 13 Interface Configuration Window Cell To configure this interface position the cursor on the Tx Clock Out field by using the up and down arrow keys Then configure the interface for the desired clock using the space bar to move through the selections The arrow keys are used to move between the different fields Beginning with the TX Clock Out field the down arrow key can be used to move the cursor through each field in the following order Parameters common to both OC3 and OC3C cards e Tx Clock Out Recovered Ref Clock OC3C only Internal OC3C only On Board e Scramble Cells Enable Disable OC3C Parameters Sonet SDH OC3C STM1 NOTE The following parameters are currently not available to the user e Resync Signal Idle State LOW HIGH The Resync parameters control the operation of a resynchronization signal to a crypto device e Resync Delay Seconds edit field e Resync Period Seconds edit field 5 13 e Resync Duration Seconds edit field OC3 Parameters e Tx Path Trace Text string of up to 15 characters placed in the transmit path and used for checking connectivity When done move to the EXECUTE button and press ENTER to update the configuration database and return to the main menu Config
155. View menu and Alarm Log command Upon execution the alarm indicator being displayed is removed from the status line and the list of alarm messages is displayed in the alarm window The current alarm is displayed in reverse video Alarms and their meaning are described in Table 6 1 6 1 Table 6 1 Alarm Messages The CPU is now active slot Last reboot file Unknown line 0 0 00 00 00 00 00 00 Incorrect card configuration slot lt slot gt Card is alive in slot lt slot gt Card has died in slot lt slot gt Interface is up in slot lt slot gt Interface is down in slot lt slot gt Indicates which slot has the active CPU Provides time stamp for las t reboot of system A module was detected in a slot different than the way the system is configured A module has been detected and successfully booted up or has subsequently failed A configured interface port has detected a valid signal or lost a valid signal Incorrect password The user has attempted to log in using an invalid password Attempt to remove current operating User has attempted to remove the currently executing version software of software Software load successful Software load failed Attempt to configure connection for multicast interface Power supply is up lt A B gt Power supply is down lt A B gt LAN Emulation Client is active LAN Emulation Client is down Screen validation failed lt additional failure reason gt Ch
156. Window STL to 8 2 222 1 5 27 Figure 5 26 Interface Configuration Window 51 5 28 Figure 5 27 Connection Management Mapping Window 51 5 29 Figure 5 28 Interface Configuration Window High Speed 5 30 Figure 5 29 Connection Management Mapping Window High Speed 5 31 Figure 5 30 Interface Configuration Window 86 5 32 Figure 5 31 Connection Management Mapping Window 561 02 000 5 33 Figure 5 32 Sample Network 5 34 Figure 5 33 Interface Configuration Window HRIM esee eee enne 5 35 Figure 5 34 Channel Configuration Window eem een enne 5 36 Figure 5 35 Connection Management Mapping Window Cell based Source Interface 5 38 Figure 5 36 Connection Management Mapping Window HRIM Source Interface 5 38 Figure 5 37 Sample Network Topography Using Variable 5 40 Figure 5 38 Interface Configuration Window 8 nene eene 5 41 Figure 5 39 Connection Management Mapping Window 5 5 42 Figure 5 40 Interface Configuration Window 5 43 Figure
157. able connecting to the card Specified below are the cables used to interconnect the CX modules to the Public Network Interfaces Timeplex has taken into account the following aspects of cable design to ensure compliance with European legislation applicable to equipment used in Commercial and Light Industrial environments Impedance meter e Transition rise times e EMC Earthing practices e Emissions characteristics Interface connections e Screen coverage type Immunity to interference e Connector screening Capacitance meter e Balance about earth e Connector type e Safety earthing aspects PRECAUTION Before installing the equipment in other environments or using alternative cabling the advise of a competent Engineer should be taken EUR 5 E1C Module 8 conductor with modular RJ45 connectors Timeplex 610127 2 meters 5 meters 2 048Mb s Uses 120 to 75 balun multi port part number Up to 16 AW00722 2 balun installed in AW00722 1 panel E3C Module UTEL Module 8 conductor with modular RJ45 connectors Timeplex 610127 2 meters 5 meters 2 048Mb s Uses 120 to 75 balun multi port part number Up to 16 AW00722 2 balun installed in AW00722 1 panel Cable Type Coaxial with two BNC connectors Cable Part Number Timeplex 120405 X Cable Length See ITU T Rec G 703 Maximum Baud Rate 2 048Mb s CXUG EUR 6 10 6 99 DSC V 11 X 21 CXUG 10 6 99 EUR 7 PAN EUROPEAN PUBLIC NETWORK CERTIFI
158. able protocols such as NetBIOS and SNA LANE offers several advantages e Users can take advantage of the higher speeds supported by ATM and access ATM devices without replacing their investment in current LAN hardware software and applications e Ethernet Token Ring and ATM endstations continue to communicate as if they were on the same LAN using standard procedures because the ATM backbone is transparent to the user MX17358 1 4 30 00 e The LANE protocol defines how endstations communicate with each other across an ATM network and how ATM attached servers communicate with devices on Ethernet and Token Ring LANs LANE works as a bridging protocol at layer 2 of the Open Systems Interconnection OSI model It does not emulate all of the actual media access control MAC protocols The LANE protocol focuses on emulating a single LAN segment by providing the connectionless broadcast service required by network layer protocols performing the necessary conversion of data between LAN packets and ATM cells and resolving MAC to ATM addressing LANE provides a translation layer between the higher level connectionless protocols and the lower level connection oriented ATM protocols The ATM adaptation layer AAL sits above the ATM layer The AAL formats data into the 48 byte ATM cell payload a process known as segmentation Once the ATM cells reach their destination they are reconstructed into higher level data and transmitted to the resp
159. ace Discarded Cells Number of cells discarded due to FIFO overflow Discard Cell Secs Number of seconds in which cells were discarded CXUG 4 35 10 6 99 4 36 To view module activity for the past 8 hours select the HISTORY button and press lt ENTER gt This will bring up the screen shown in Figure 4 40 Intf Name Walkersville Slot 5 Intf A Intf Type Dual T1 Cell Period T1C gt ATM T1C lt ATM 01 00 02 00 910 910 02 00 03 00 908 908 03 00 04 00 912 912 04 00 05 00 912 912 05 00 06 00 910 910 06 00 07 00 912 912 07 00 08 00 908 908 08 00 09 00 910 910 Note Above statistics show total number of cells in each hour interval including cells lost due to uncorrectable header errors and non matching VPI VCI misrouted but excluding cells lost due to congestion 14 52 View History Dual T1 ESC ESC Previous Figure 4 40 Interface Statistics Window Dual T1 Cell The column on the left shows the period in which the measurement was taken The other two columns show the number of cells passed in each direction through the interface CXUG 10 6 99 OC3 Cell Interface Module OC3 CXUG 10 6 99 To view the statistics for the OC3 Cell Interface Module select Module Status from the View menu More information can be obtained for a particular module by highlighting the module and pressing lt F2 gt This will bring up the logical interface screen for this module similar
160. ack timing source in case the selected timing source fails In this case the fall back clock would then take its place until it is restored Adaptive Timing CXUG 10 6 99 Adaptive Timing is used on the DSL HSL HSSL UT3L UE3L and UTEL Modules Adaptive Timing derives timing from the clock that was inserted at the far end of the circuit In Adaptive Timing the received cell data is buffered and continuously tracked The tracking information is then processed by the on board CPU and used to control a VCXO The output of the VCXO is then used to shape the timing that is produced to clock the clear data out of the module to the terminal equipment NOTE When using any of the above clock sources as timing for a CBR type emulation circuit it is imperative that BOTH ends of the circuit are timed from the same source and that they are synchronous with one another If this is not done transmit and receive timing will slip as the two clocks drift past one another External Timing External Timing may be inserted into the Cell Exchange system by using the Station Clock Module SCM External Timing is a source of timing derived from a customer who has a highly reliable and stable timing source such as LORAN or GPS being used as a Master Station Clock The Master Station Clock timing signal can then be injected into a Cell Exchange system and be used as the master timing source for all modules From the craft interface the user can sel
161. amily of Cell Exchange models common and interface modules timing or clocking cooling and performance characteristics Chapter 2 Installation provides procedures for installing the Cell Exchange systems e Chapter 3 Modules describes each of the interface modules that can be used in the Cell Exchange e Chapter 4 Operation describes basic procedures for operating the Cell Exchange system Chapter 5 Configuration provides procedures for configuring individual Cell Exchange modules e Chapter 6 Troubleshooting provides an overview of diagnostic procedures used to locate the cause of malfunctions in Cell Exchange applications CXUG 3 15 00 Chapter 7 Replacement Procedures provides step by step procedures for removing and replacing field replaceable units Appendixes e Appendix A Asynchronous Transfer Mode Overview describes basic asynchronous transfer mode ATM concepts e Appendix B Cable Diagrams provides an index of Cell Exchange cables and cable wiring diagrams e Appendix C Cable Applications includes diagrams showing the types and applications of cables used in a Cell Exchange system Appendix D Field Replaceable Units provides an index of Cell Exchange field replaceable items Index Service For service in the U S and Canada contact Customer Support at 1 800 366 0126 For service outside the U S and Canada contact Customer Support at 44 0 1256 763911 Information required
162. amples of Pulse Code Modulation in each ATM cell Law Reflects user selection from the configuration window Local Hook Status Reflects status of the local circuit Remote Signaling Indicates the signaling from the far end 00 01 10 11 CD Signaling Indicates far end ABCD signaling state TxC Number of cells transmitted RxC Number of cells received All other entries are the same as previously described Selecting the CELL STATS button provides statistics for this module similar to those shown in Figure 4 48 4 57 Chapter 5 Configuration The configuration parameters for the Cell Exchange systems are stored on each module in battery backed memory This means that the configuration will remain unchanged even if power is removed from the unit When power is restored all configuration parameters previously set still reside in memory and the system will return to that configuration Initial configuration is normally accomplished in four steps 1 Set location name 2 Configure physical interfaces 3 Select system timing source 4 Configure connections These steps are further explained in the following paragraphs Setting Location Name To set the location name select the appropriate command from the Configure menu Figure 5 1 Configure Diagnostics Connect Mgmt Multicast Interface Data Time Admin Ports System Timing System Reset Passwords Software Ver SNMP Press ENTER F2 t
163. ase conversion will be performed If an error is detected during the Database Restore operation the database will be completely cleared Errors can arise from any of the following conditions 4 15 e Checksum error each database file contains a checksum over the data e Invalid database file format detected e Database version not supported Switch CPU This menu item allows the user to force a changeover of CPUs when redundant CPU Modules are installed Switch Disable This menu item disables automatic CPU switchover capability when redundant CPU Modules are installed NOTE new configuration data is loaded onto the active CPU this will automatically reset to the Enable mode Switch Enable This menu item enables automatic CPU switchover capability when redundant CPU Modules are installed Start Stats Selecting this menu item will start or resume the collection of statistics Stop Stats This menu item stops the collection of statistics Module reset This menu item allows the user to reset a selected module that was defined in the CX 1500 1540 via the configure interface menu item The Interface Name field is a tumbler field Select the module to be reset by pressing the SPACE bar until the desired module name appears To cancel this command press the lt ESC gt key Selecting this menu item brings up the window shown in Figure 4 17 The Interface Name field is a tumbler field Pressing the SPACE bar will mov
164. ault gateway Ethernet FAC of interface mack of interface EBC EPC Pree lea writ Fine Figure 4 28 HRIM Configuration Window 3 Using the ARROW keys move to the CHANNEL CONFIG button and press lt ENTER gt This will bring up the window shown in Figure 4 29 CXUG 4 25 10 6 99 4 26 T CX1500 HyperTerminal File Edit View Call Transfer Help Bm x Dis 213 alal i Name M hrim 5 Slot 5 Intf A Type Hub Router Ch Remote ATM IP Rem Enet IP Net Rem Enet IP Mask BW 113 196 15 2 6 6 0 8 6 6 6 8 5 cx2 134 196 15 3 9 8 8 8 6 6 6 8 5 SCROLL UP LINE SCROLL DOWN LINE EXECUTE UPDATE SCROLL UP PAGE DOWN PAGE Press ENTER To update the config database and return to the Main Menu 09 52 CFG Intf HRIM Chan FOB RBBB ESC ESC Previous Connected 0 09 16 vT100 9600 8 N 1 SCROLL CAPS NUM Capture Print echo Figure 4 29 HRIM Channel Configuration Window Use the ARROW keys to move the cursor into the channel configuration field Press F3 to add a new record Enter the identification and address information for the remote CPU When finished move to the EXECUTE button to update the database and return to the main menu or UPDATE to update the database and remain in this window Press lt ENTER gt to execute the selected command Select Connection Mgmt from the Configure men
165. become a destination member of the same or any other multicast group Software to support the Multicast feature consists of e User interface support to enter modify or delete configuration of up to sixteen multicast groups up to sixteen multicast group members for each of the multicast groups and connections between all combinations of a multicast source port and members of a multicast group User interface will include operator s local access with a terminal via CX craft interface or remote access via Telnet e Database support to store configuration information about multicast groups multicast group members and connections in non volatile memory Configuring Interfaces CXUG 10 6 99 To configure the Multicast feature select the Multicast command from the Configure menu This will bring the screen shown in Figure 5 54 Multicast group configurations Multicast1 Multicast3 Multicast3 EXECUTE Enter multicast group name up to 14 characters no spaces mum ESC ESC Previous 12 48 CFG Multicast Figure 5 54 Multicast Configuration Window This first screen is used to enter modify or delete configuration of multicast group names for up to sixteen multicast groups For each multicast group name configured the user may select up to sixteen interfaces to join the multicast group membership Interfaces may be joined to or removed from existing multicast groups dynamically witho
166. c flow This envelope specifies values for peak bandwidth average sustained bandwidth and burst size It is the responsibility of the ATM device to adhere to the contract by means of traffic shaping Traffic shaping is the use of queues to constrain data bursts limit peak data rate and smooth jitter so that the traffic will fit within the promised envelope ATM switches have the option of using traffic policing to enforce the contract The switch can measure the actual traffic flow and compare it against the agreed upon traffic envelope If it finds that traffic is outside of the agreed upon parameters the switch can set the Cell Loss Priority CLP bit of the offending cells Setting the CLP bit makes the cell eligible for discard which means that the switch or any other switch handling the cell is allowed to drop the cell during periods of congestion Congestion control is a primary concern of ATM designers For example dropping just one cell that is part of a FDDI frame can result in the retransmission of 93 cells Retransmission can lead to an exponential increase in congestion As ATM switches drop individual cells from different packets more packets are retransmitted causing even more cells to be dropped ATM References CXUG 10 6 99 There are a number of commercial books available that will provide a good primer or additional information regarding ATM networks Two are cited here Black Uyless ATM Foundation for Broadband
167. c00001 LAN 134 196 14 0 PC IP Addr 134 196 14 2 PC IP Mask 255 255 255 0 PC IP G W 136 196 14 1 Figure 4 21 Locally Connected TELNET Session 1 Select the Interface command from the Configure menu This will bring up the screen shown in Figure 4 22 CXUG 4 21 10 6 99 T MX1500 HyperTerminal x File Edit View Call Transfer Help Dia 213 81 Intf Name Intf Type Physical Intf Inact ud31 1 Unstructur DS3 ue31 2 Unstructure E3 tima 3 Ti Inverse Mux 4 E1 Inverse Mux hrim 5 Hub Router LSAL Unstructure 1 HSSL Dual E1 Cell E3C Cell Structured 1 SCROLL UP LINE SCROLL DOUN LINE EXECUTE SCROLL UP PAGE SCROLL DOWN PAGE Press ENTER To update the config database and return to the Main Mey 98 38 CFG Interface ESC ESC Previous Connected 0 08 09 vT100 9600 8 N 1 SCROLL CAPS NUM Capture Print echo Figure 4 22 Interface Configuration Window 2 Using the ARROW keys select the HRIM module Press F2 to go to the configuration screen Figure 4 23 Te CX1500 HyperTerminal x File Edit View Call Transfer Help Die 15 sole 8 Name hrim 5 Slot 5 Intf A Type Hub Router IP address of router interface 134 196 14 1 IP mask of router interface 255 255 255 0 broadcast address 134 196 14 255 IP address of default gateway 8 0 8 8 Ethernet MAC address 00901000000 IP address of interface 134 196 15 1 IP mask of interface 255 255 255 0
168. cations single queue mode will accommodate larger bursts at the expense of disabling the traffic prioritization for that particular interface NOTE This queuing single queue or split queue only occurs in the outbound direction ATM backplane to EIA 530 5 17 DS3 Cell Interface Module DS3 Configuring Interfaces To configure a new interface follow the steps described in Configuring Physical Interfaces Enter the name the interface type DS3 the slot the physical interface A and the status indicator Press lt F2 gt to enter the configuration menu Figure 5 17 shows the DS3 configuration menu with all fields set to the default values Intf Name Urbana Slot 5 Intf A Intf Type DS3 PLCP Enable Line Build Out 0 To 225 Feet Scramble Cells Enable Tx Clock Out Recovered Tx Format C bit parity forced EXECUTE Press ENTER To update the config database and return to the Main Menu 09 52 CFG Intf DS3 ESC ESC Previous Figure 5 17 Interface Configuration Window DS3 To configure this interface position the cursor on the PLCP field by using the up and down arrow keys The arrow keys are used to move between the different fields Beginning with the PLCP Physical Layer Convergence Protocol field use the down arrow key to move the cursor through each field The space bar is used to move through the possible selections given below in parentheses starting with the default
169. ccurs toward connecte here equipment l x STL STL cert SAR P 13 8 N E 4or8 TI p 5 Sabie ae Mii ta CORE 4 Interfaces 8 a ET wi ao TI ne foe ATM gt A channel DOMO groups Network A EN 24 X 2 VPI VCI 5 74 4 4 4 TI STL Trunk Conditioning example 3 Figure 3 37 Another Example of Trunk Conditioning T1 Signaling As mentioned previously the STL utilizes an AAL1 Segmentation And Reassembly SAR processor to pass the T1 data to and from the ATM network For channel groups configured as voice the STL directs the SAR to pass T1 signaling bits to and from the ATM network as well In the inbound direction from a T1 interface into the ATM network the SAR extracts signaling bits for each T1 channel and combines them with the user data into a single cell for transmission through the ATM network In the outbound direction from the ATM network to a T1 interface the SAR extracts the signaling bits from these cells and inserts them into the correct T1 channels see af vtoa 0078 000 Channel Emulation Services for a description of signaling bits This scheme allows signaling to be passed even if the T1 framing formats of the source and destination T1 interfaces differ ESF provides four signaling bits A B C and D bits while SF provides only two A and B bits If a voice connection is configure
170. clock access the ATM cells within the payload and provide these cells to the Cell Exchange switching fabric In the transmit direction the process is reversed ATM cells are taken off the switching fabric and mapped into the payload which is then properly formatted and clocked out on the OC3 facility A functional block diagram of the OC3 Cell Interface Module is shown in Figure 3 14 Optical ATM ATM CELL Interface Physical BUS Interface SWITCH DIN CONNECTOR CAPACITOR FILTERS CPU 68340 Figure 3 14 OC3 Cell Interface Module Functional Block Diagram Two types of OC3 modules are available to allow the user to select various drive distances The only differences are the fiber optic components one being LED and the other MLM Laser Short Intermediate 0 15 km MLM Laser Single Mode SC Duplex CXUG 10 6 99 Reach Specifications Port Capacity Media Connector Line Encoding Framing Transmit Clock Diagnostics Alarm Surveillance Alarms Statistics Maintenance Actions Applicable Standards Power One Short Reach Multimode Fiber Intermediate Reach Single mode Fiber SC Duplex Non Return to Zero NRZ STS 3c STM 1 Recovered Receive OC3 rate On Board 155 52 MHz Facility Loopback Terminal Loopback Section Line and Path LOS LOF LOP FEBE AIS FERF BIP HCS SONET maintenance signaling generation RDI and AIS ATM Forum STS c UNI v3 1 ANSI T1 105
171. complete Blinks during operational code download Off No power to module UTEL failed CPU failed LED S Red When the S SYNC LED is ON it indicates that synchronization with the source has been lost OFF is the Normal indication LED B Red When the B Buffer LED is ON it indicates that the clock synthesis buffer is completely full or completely empty OFF is the Normal indication LED T1 Green When the T1 LED is ON it indicates that the T1 Mode of operation has been selected LED E1 Green When the E1 LED is ON it indicates that the E1 120 ohm or E1 75 ohm mode of operation has been selected CXUG 3 71 10 6 99 Pinouts 3 72 Pinouts for the BNC connectors are as shown in Figure 3 55 Tx Figure 3 55 BNC Pin Location The RJ 45 connector on the UTEL Module has the following pinouts Pins 1 and 2 are Transmit out to the terminal equipment PBX in most cases Pins 4 and 5 are Receive in from the terminal equipment PBX in most cases Pinouts for the RJ 45 connector are shown in Figure 3 56 E 1 Tx to terminal equipment amp Rx from terminal equipment 8 9Sv Cl Figure 3 56 RJ 45 Pinouts CXUG 10 6 99 Unstructured DS3 T3 Legacy Interface Module UD3L Overview CXUG 10 6 99 The Unstructured DS3 T3 Legacy UD3L Interface Module is the gateway for synchronous non ATM DS3 T3 traffic into the ATM network
172. connect onto the ATM Cell Bus e Motorola 68340 microprocessor e Capacitor filtering provided for control and noise suppression Unique Functionality Section The UD3L Interface Module includes the following unique functions e Module equipped with one complete independent synchronous channel e Connectors are two BNC Tx Rx e High speed AAL1 segmentation and reassembly function A functional block diagram of the UD3L Interface Module is shown in Figure 3 58 DS3 LINE ATM CELL INTERFACE BUS WITCH TYPE Sue FUNCTIONS CPU 68340 FILTERS z Q o a Figure 3 58 Unstructured DS3 T3 Legacy Interface Module Functional Block Diagram 3 74 CXUG 10 6 99 Jumper Settings The jumper settings listed are factory set defaults No user configuration is required Specifications CXUG 10 6 99 Port Capacity Electrical Port Speed Media Connector Line Coding Line Format Data Format Timing Status amp Statistics Diagnostics Applicable Standards Power Jumper Pins J1 2 3 J3 1 2 J10 1 2 One ANSI T1 404 Bellcore TR NWT 000499 ACCUNET T45 G 703 DS3 T3 44 736 Mbps Unbalanced 75 Ohm Co axial cable BNC Female AMI or B3ZS Unbalanced bi polar Serial Internal Reference Recovered On Board Standard status and statistics provided Facility Loopback Terminal Loopback Bi directional ANSI T1 109 ANSI T1 107 lt 7 watts
173. contains information that is tailored to the interface CXUG 10 6 99 Intf Name Walkersville Slot 5 Intf A Intf Type Dual T1 Cell Card Status T1C gt ATM Cells Interface Status HEC Error Cells Loss of Cell Sync Misrouted Cells Loopback T1C lt ATM Cells Err Sec Thres Discarded Cells Errored Secs Discard Cell Secs Last Statistics Reset Hour REFRESH HISTORY 14 52 View Intf Dual T1 ALARM NOU aoo ESC ESC Previous Figure 4 39 Specific Interface Window Dual T1 Cell Entries for this window include Card Status Up normal indicates that the card has been recognized by the CPU and a software download has been successfully executed Interface Status Indication of whether a valid T1 signal is being received at the interface Loss of Cell Sync Indication of whether the interface is in synchronization with cells CLR ALM Loopback User selectable from the configuration screen Err Sec Thres User selectable from the configuration screen indicates the Bit Error Rate alarm threshold Errored Secs Indicates the percentage of seconds that the BER exceeds the alarm threshold T1C gt ATM Number of cells passed from the interface to the network HEC Error Cells Number of cells with header errors Misrouted Cells Number of cells that do not match any VPI VCI configuration T1C ATM Number of cells from the network to the interf
174. cription 610126 X ST MOD XFR 8 Pin Mod 8 Pin Mod B 9 T1C Module to CSU Smart Jack crossover E1C Module to E1 equipment crossover UTEL Module to non framed E1 or T1 equipment crossover 610127 X ST MOD MOD 8 Pin Mod 8 Pin Mod B 8 STL Module to LINK 2 BFM BIM 1 LINK 100 DLI 1 Module entr eLINK CSU Module or ST Dpanel 4 PRI T1M E1M T1C Module to CSU Smart Jack straight E1C Modules to E1 equipment straight UTEL Module to non framed E1 or T1 equipment straight 612529 X CXHSSI XVR HSSI M crossover M B 23 HSSL Module crossover HSSI 50 pin connector 612751 X CXHSSI DCE HSSI M to DCE M B 22 HSSL Module to DCE HSSI 50 pin connector 613012 X DSC X 21 26 Pin HDB M 15 Pin DB M DSC Module to V 11 X 21 DCE 613013 X LSAL RJ45 25DTE M RJ 45 M to 25 pin DTE M B 18 LSAL Module to 25 pin DTE for PCs or workstations 613014 X LSAL RJ45 25DTE F RJ 45 M to 25 pin DTE F B 19 LSAL Module to 25 pin DTE for most non PC DTEs 613015 X LSAL RJ45 9DTE M RJ 45 M to 9 pin DTE M B 20 LSAL Module to 9 pin DTE for most non PC DTEs 613016 X LSAL RJ45 9DTE F RJ 45 M to 9 pin DTE F LSAL Module to 9 pin DTE for PCs or workstations COMATPX 1013 10 BASET RJ 45 M RJ 45 M HRIM Module to hub 10Base T Ethernet straight 0004 O
175. cted 0 00 51 100 8600 8 N 1 SCROLL CAPS NUM Captue Printecho Figure 2 12 New Version Name 6 Press ENTER The LOAD button should be highlighted Press ENTER again This will return to the main screen 7 Carefully watch the lower task bar for two messages The first message is Erasing Flash Memory shown in Figure 2 13 The second message Figure 2 14 is very important When it appears press ENTER CXUG 10 6 99 2 17 2 18 Dis als sole cel Multicast Diagnostics Admin Ports System Timing System Reset Passwords Software Ver SNMP Flash Memor Main Menu Q to Logout Connected 0 25 58 vT100 9600841 SCROLL CAPS NUM Capture Print echo Figure 2 13 Flash Memory Message Multicast Interface Date Time Location Name Admin Ports System Timing it Enter and either Start Kmodem Send or FTP put Main Menu GXXOCKOOCCOOCCOCC Q to Logout Connected 0 37 04 9600 8 N 1 SCROLL Print echo Figure 2 14 Start Xmodem Send Message 8 Set up for the Xmodem transfer From the Transfer menu select Send File 9 When the window shown in Figure 2 15 appears select Xmodem and enter the path filename where the image bin file is located Click on the Send button CXUG 10 6 99 Send File ee 24x C CX_Software cpu400 bin CPUROM BIN Figure 2 15 Xmodem Selection Window NOTE After decompressing th
176. d Jumper Pins J2 2 3 Specifications Port Capacity Two Interface DSX 1 or CSU Software configurable in the interface configuration window Media Shielded Twisted pair Connector RJ 45 Female DCE Line Encoding B8ZS AMI Data Format ATM Cells Timing Recovered External Internal On Board CXUG 3 17 10 6 99 Diagnostics Facility and Terminal Loopback Alarm LOF LOC AIS Alarm Statistics LCV FER CRC 6 OOF HCS Rx CELLS Tx CELLS Applicable Standards ATM Forum DS1 UNI v3 1 af phy 0016 0000 ANSI Bellcore DSX 1 T1 102 T1 408 TR TS Y 000009 ITU T G 703 G 804 AT amp T 62411 Indicators Type Label Color Meaning LED OPNL Green Illuminates when operational code begins running after the boot process is complete Blinks during operational code download LED Rx Syn Green Receive Synchronization LED Ce Syn Green Cell Synchronization Pinouts Pinouts for the RJ 45 connectors are as shown in Figure 3 12 and the accompanying table 9 1 Rx to T1C Tx to Network 8 9Sv Cl Figure 3 12 Pin Location 1 To T1C Rx R 4 To Network Tx R 2 To T1C Rx T 5 To Network Tx T 3 18 CXUG 10 6 99 OC3 Cell Interface Module OC3 Overview The OC3 Cell Interface Module is part of a broad group of standard Interface Modules that have been developed for the Cell Exchange system The OC3 Cell Module allows the Cell Exchange
177. d in the left most part of the chassis A single power supply module may be installed in either slot The front panel of the DC power supply module is shown in Figure 3 6 TimePlex Synchrony Cell Exchange DC POWER SUPPLY Figure 3 6 DC Power Supply Module CX 1500D One or two power supply modules may be installed One Power Supply Module will handle the full power load required for the number of interface modules placed in the chassis although a second module may be installed for enhanced reliability The Power Supply Modules feature a solid state switcher design If two modules are installed the modules are coupled to supply redundant power to the bus The Power Supply Modules are designed to allow removal and replacement into a working unit without affecting active operational traffic hot swap See Chapter 7 for installation removal precautions The rear panel of the chassis provides separate connections for 48 VDC power sources one connection per module DC power distribution within the CX 1500D is similar to AC power distribution Standard DC power 38 to 60 VDC is received at the backplane of the chassis and transferred via the power connector interface to the DC DC Converter There is a separate power input to each power supply slot A or B The DC DC Converter converts the 48 VDC input to 5 VDC for transistor transistor logic TTL use then sends it to a voltage regulator and the backplane bus The voltage r
178. d ventilation Operating Environment 0 50 C Same as standard Up to 85 relative humidity non condensing at 50 C CXUG 147 10 6 99 Table 1 4 Physical Electrical and Environmental Characteristics CX 1580 Category Standard Characteristics System Capacity Case with backplane Up to 7 interface modules CPU Module Redundant CPU module 7 empty slots Enclosure Size 12 high 3 5 wide and 13 deep Chassis Weight 10 12 pounds depending upon Same as standard configuration Clearance Requirements 1 75 above and below case required Same as standard for ventilation Operating Environment 0 50 C Same as standard Up to 85 relative humidity non condensing at 50 C 1 18 CXUG 10 6 99 Compatibility Requirements This section covers interoperability with other systems both ATM and non ATM LINK Family The CX family will inter operate with products from the LINK family via the CX legacy cards using to provide constant bit rate CBR cell streams for LINK traffic Synchrony ST The CX family will inter operate with products from the Synchrony ST family via the CX legacy cards using AAL to provide constant bit rate CBR cell streams for Synchrony ST traffic The Synchrony can also interface with the CX via an OC3c UNI multi mode link provided on the ATM ICP module in the ST IAN 150 The family will inter operate with the IAN 150 via the CX legacy cards using AAL1 to
179. d Indicates loss of signal to the module LED V Red Indicates Code Violation UE3L CXUG 10 6 99 3 79 Pinouts Pinouts for the BNC connectors are as shown in Figure 3 62 Tx Figure 3 62 BNC Pin Location 3 80 CXUG 10 6 99 Basic Interface Module BIM Overview CXUG 10 6 99 NOT GENERALLY AVAILABLE The Basic Interface Module BIM provides an ATM gateway for additional legacy interface functionality The BIM provides a general platform for accommodating two DCE DTE type interfaces into the CX system The BIM module is only available for selected applications The BIM is comprised of a motherboard and a daughterboard customer furnished The BIM motherboard provides AAL processing and interfacing onto the ATM cell bus backplane The daughterboard provides the external interfaces i e DTE DCE connector electrical signal definition etc A front panel view of the Basic Interface Module is shown in Figure 3 63 Figure 3 63 Basic Interface Module BIM The Basic Interface Module performs the following primary functions Processes CBR data source and generates AAL1 cells Provides support for a daughterboard providing two physical interfaces Cell rate error signal Monitors the physical interface for alarms daughtercard available indication that is interpreted as an interface up down for both interface ports Collects statistics on module performance 3 81 Cell Bus Microproces
180. d between a channel group of a T1 ESF interface and a channel group of a T1 SF interface signaling is affected as follows e ESF inbound signaling bits A and B are mapped to SF outbound bits A and B respectively e ESF inbound signaling bits C and D are lost since SF defines only two signaling bits e SF inbound signaling bit A values are mapped to two outbound ESF signaling bits A and C e SF inbound signaling bit B values are mapped to two outbound ESF signaling bits B and D 3 48 CXUG 10 6 99 T1 Alarms The STL sends a yellow alarm toward the connected equipment whenever a red alarm loss of signal is present for a period of 3 seconds The STL removes the yellow alarm when a signal is present for at least 9 seconds Specifications Port Capacity Electrical Media Connector Line Encoding Framing Timing Diagnostics Alarm Surveillance Indicators Four or Eight DSX 1 or CSU T1 Twisted Pair Cable RJ 45 Female DCE AMI B8ZS SF D4 ESF On Board Ref Clock Recovered Internal Remote and Framer Loopback LOF LOS BPV AIS Alarm Statistics Physical Layer Line Layer T1 Path Layer and ATM Layer Applicable Standards ATM Forum DS1 UNI v3 1 af vtoa 0078 000 Channel Emulation Service CES v2 0 1 97 ANSI Bellcore DSX 1 T1 102 T1 107 T1 408 T1 403 1989 TR TS Y 000009 ITU T G 703 G 804 AT amp T 62411 Power lt 7 Watts Type Label Color Meaning LED OPNL Green Illuminates whe
181. d to route IP HRIM to CPUs ATM IP fo TT T N Ethernet IP 1 0 0 1 RIP gt Local LAN Segment 2 0 0 1 CPU ATM IP 1 0 0 2 HRIM LAN IP Figure 5 60 Classical IP Workstation Connectivity Root Node The HRIM broadcasts RIP towards the local LAN segment and dynamically discovers the routes for LAN devices on the local LAN segment In order to pass IP across the network static routes must be configured into the HRIM for each remote LAN route A static route must also be defined between the HRIM and the CPU in order to pass SNMP from the workstation to the CPU module Static routes must be configured from HRIM to HRIM and from HRIM to CPU within a CX node The HRIM supports 32 static routes Therefore only 32 CX nodes can be managed using Classical IP NOTE The IP address of the ATM side of the local HRIM must be on the same IP subnet as all participating CPUs and remote HRIMs MX17358 1 24 of 29 4 30 00 In the configuration shown in Figure 5 61 e The SNMP platform connects via 10 base t Ethernet to the HRIM module of the CX root node The ATM OC 3 NIC card is not required for this connection e The originating PC NMS system must have an IP address that is on the same IP subnet as the HRIM e The originating PC NMS system must have a static route from the HRIM to the node s being managed e The HRIM supports a maximum of 32 static routes including the HRIM to HRIM and HRIM to CPU This means only 32 CX
182. dant CPU craft interface to VT100 terminal 610133 X ST NCP MDM CPU craft interface to VT100 terminal via modem 610131 X ST NCP RMDM Redundant CPU craft interface to VT100 terminal via modem 613008 X DSC 530M DSC Module DTE to RS 530 ATM facility DSL HSL Modules DCE and SCM Module to V 11 RS 530 613009 X DSC 530F DSC Module DTE to RS 530 ATM facility DSL HSL Modules DCE and SCM Module to V 11 RS 530 613004 X DSL HSL ILC DSL HSL Modules to LINK 2 or entr eLINK ILC Module 613005 X DSL HSL SCM DSL HSL Modules to LINK 100 DLI 0 Module and RS 449 SCM Module RS 449 613006 X DSL HSL SCM DSL HSL SCM Modules to RS 449 449F 613003 X DSL HSL SCM DSC DSL HSL SCM Modules to V 35 Winchester V35M 613007 X DSL HSL SCM DSC DSL HSL SCM Modules to V 35 Winchester V35F 610127 X ST MOD MOD STL Module to LINK 2 BFM BIM 1 LINK 100 DLI 1 Module entr eLINK CSU Module or ST Dpanel 4 PRI T1M E1M T1C Module to CSU Smart Jack straight E1C SEL Modules to E1 equipment straight HRIM Module to 10Base T Ethernet straight LSAL Module to asynchronous equipment straight UTEL Module to non framed E1 or T1 equipment straight 610126 X ST MOD XFR T1C Module to CSU Smart Jack crossover E1C SEL Modules to E1 equipment crossover LSAL Module to asynchronous equipment crossover UTEL Module to non framed E1 or T1 equipment crossover 61362 BADP STL Module to ST Dpanel 4 DSX 1 via BIM PBX cable 61359 T1C Module to CSU Smart Jack straight
183. data is placed in AAL1 CBR type format given a VPI VCI address and transmitted over the ATM network This module is non channelized and is intended to be used in a point to point configuration A front panel view of the UE3L Module is shown in Figure 3 60 Figure 3 60 Unstructured E3 Legacy Interface Module UE3L The UE3L Legacy Interface Module performs the following primary functions e Takes non cell bearing traffic Legacy traffic and converts the data stream to ATM CBR cells adding the appropriate cell overhead e Takes the cells and places them onto the ATM cell bus e Monitors the physical interface for alarms e Collects statistics on module performance 3 77 Cell Bus Microprocessor Power Section The Cell Bus Microprocessor Power section of the UE3L Interface Module consists of the following e ATM Cell Bus Switching Logic IC ATM Cell Bus Switch along with a RAM IC provides connectivity to the backplane board e 96 Pin DIN connector used to connect onto the ATM Cell Bus e Motorola 68340 microprocessor e Capacitor filtering provided for control and noise suppression Unique Functionality Section The UE3L Interface Module includes the following unique functions e Module equipped with one complete independent synchronous channel e Connectors are two BNC Tx Rx e High speed AAL1 segmentation and reassembly function A functional block diagram of the UE3L Interface Module is shown in Figure 3 61 E3 LINE
184. difications made to this equipment not expressly approved by Timeplex Inc could void user s authority to operate this equipment General Information Regarding the Use of Customer Provided Telephone Equipment FCC regulations and telephone company procedures prohibit connection of customer provided equipment to telephone company provided coin service central office implemented systems Connection to party lines service is subject to State tariffs The goal of the telephone company is to provide you with the best service it can To do this it may occasionally be necessary for them to make changes in their equipment operation or procedures If these changes might affect your service or the operation of your equipment the telephone company will give you notice in writing to allow you to make any changes necessary to maintain uninterrupted service If you have any questions about your telephone line such as how many pieces of equipment you can connect to it the telephone company will provide this information upon request In certain circumstances it may be necessary for the telephone company to request information from you concerning the equipment that you have connected to your telephone line Upon request of the telephone company you must provide the FCC registration number of the equipment that is connected to your line The FCC registration number is listed on the equipment label If this equipment causes harm to the telephone n
185. e Enter the desired clock rate in the Clock Rate field This will be a number between 1 and 6250 representing a multiple of 8 KHz 1 2 Using the Up Down arrows move to the EXECUTE button and press ENTER to update the configuration database and return to the main menu 5 10 CXUG 10 6 99 Dual T1 Cell Interface Module T1C Configuring Interfaces To configure a new T1 interface follow the steps described in Configuring Physical Interfaces to enter the name the interface type Dual T1 Cell the slot the physical interface and the active status Press lt F2 gt to enter the interface configuration menu Figure 5 11 shows the configuration menu with all fields set to the default values Intf Name Walkersville Slot 5 Intf A Type Dual T1 Cell Framing ESF Coding B8ZS Line Build Out Equal 0 96 Err Sec Threshold 100 Scramble Cells Enable Tx Clock Out Recovered EXECUTE Press ENTER To update the config database and return to the Main Menu 09 52 CFG T1 ESC ESC Previous Figure 5 11 Interface Configuration Window Dual T1 Cell The arrow keys are used to move between the different fields Beginning from the Framing field the down arrow key can be used to move the cursor through each field in the following order the space bar is used to move through the possible selections which are given below in parentheses starting with the default e Framing
186. e 160400 1 CX 1500 Chassis 15 Slot 160218 1 CX 1500 Backplane 15 Slot AC Power Supply Unit included with the base CX 1500 CX 1540 system 160401 1 AC Power Supply Unit Redundant Unit for CX 1500 160224 1 DC Power Supply Unit CX 1540 4 Slot Base System 170401 1 CX 1540 Basic Unit 4 Slot Chassis with Backplane 170400 1 CX 1540 Chassis 4 Slot 170200 1 CX 1540 Backplane 4 Slot CX 1580 8 Slot Base System 171401 1 CX 1580 Basic Unit 8 Slot Chassis with Backplane SM171402 1 CX 1580 Chassis 8 Slot 171201 1 CX 1580 Backplane 8 Slot 00705 2 230 VAC 19 CE Marked Fan Fan Tray 00722 1 19 Rack Panel for Multi Port E1 Balun AWO00722 2 120 to 75 Ohm Multi Port E1 Balun AW00722 3 120 to 75 Ohm Single Port E1 Balun CXUG 10 6 99 D 1 Table D 2 Modules Part Number Module Description 160228 1 CXBIM Basic Interface Module 160201 1 CXCPU CPU Module included with basic CX 1500 system 160204 1 CXDS3 DS 3 Cell Interface Module 160208 1 CXDSC Dual Synchronous Cell Interface Module 160210 1 CXDSL Synchronous Legacy Interface Module Dual Port 160206 2 CXE1C E1 Cell Interface Module 160205 1 CXE3C E3 Cell Interface Module 171200 1 CXEML 4 Wire Analog Interface Module 160217 1 CXHRIM 4 Hub Router Interface Module 4 Port 160217 2 CXHRIM 8 Hub Router Interface Module 8 Port 160209 1 CXHSL High Speed Synchronous Legacy Interfac
187. e HSSL VPI VCI i Interface Name VPI VCI Chan Connection Name Priority Germantown 2 12 German PBX200 High F1 Execute F3 Add Connection F4 Delete Connection 07 36 CFG Con Mgmt Map ALARM seaeeneeexeexeeeee ESC ESC Previous Figure 5 31 Connection Management Mapping Window HSSL Configuring connections to and from HSSL interfaces is very similar to configuring other connections see Configuring Interface Connections 1 Select the Connect Mgmt command from the Configure menu 2 To configure the connections move the cursor to highlight one of the interfaces 3 Press F2 or ENTER to bring up the connection management map for that interface 4 Usethe Up Down arrow key to move to the Inact field 5 Press F3 to add a new connection or F4 to delete an existing connection Follow the steps described in Configuring Interface Connections to add new connections 6 When done press F1 or move to the EXECUTE button and press ENTER to update the configuration database and return to the main menu or UPDATE and ENTER to update the configuration and remain in this window CXUG 5 33 10 6 99 Hub Router Interface Module HRIM A sample network topology using the HRIM is shown in Figure 5 32 DAL Configuration IP Enet 172 16 103 53 IP Enet Mask 255 255 255 0 IP ATM 172 16 101 53 IP Gateway 172 16 103 100 DAL Channel Configuration
188. e LSAL Baud rate 9600 Data bits 8 Parity None Stop bits 1 CTS Control Yes User Mode No ARQ Mode Yes EXECUTE Press ENTER To update the config database and return to Main Menu 09 52 CFG Intf LSAL ESC ESC Previous Figure 5 38 Interface Configuration Window LSAL The arrow keys are used to move between the different fields Beginning at the Baud rate field the down arrow key can be used to move the cursor through each field in the following order The space bar is used to move through the possible selections which are given below in parentheses starting with the default Baud Rate 9600 14400 19200 38400 75 110 300 1200 2400 4800 Data bits 8 5 6 7 Parity None Odd Even Stop bits 1 2 CTS Control Yes No User Mode No maximum throughput Yes minimize latency ARQ Mode Yes reliable LSAL to LSAL transfer enabled No cells dropped by ATM network are not retransmitted 5 41 When done move to the EXECUTE button and press ENTER to update the configuration database and return to the main menu NOTE Each of the eight interfaces is configured separately as necessary Configuring Connections Connections are configured via the Connection Management menus Figure 5 39 shows the configuration map for the LSAL interface Name Darnestown Slot 4 Int A Type LSAL VPI VCI i Interface Name VPI VCI Chan Connection Name Priority 7
189. e 4 35 Specific Interface Window 4 31 Figure 4 36 Logical Interface Status 4 32 Figure 4 37 Logical Interface Status 5 4 33 Figure 4 38 Logical Interface Status Window Dual eee 4 34 Figure 4 39 Specific Interface Window Dual Cell 2 eene 4 35 Figure 4 40 Interface Statistics Window Dual Cell oo eese eee 4 36 Figure 4 41 Specific Interface Window OC3 Cell eese nene 4 37 Figure 4 42 Specific Interface Window OC3c Cell eese nennen nennen 4 39 Figure 4 43 Specific Interface Window Dual Sync 4 40 Figure 4 44 Specific Interface WindOW DS3 4 41 Figure 4 45 Specific Interface WindOW EI1C esee eene enne enne 4 42 Figure 4 46 Specific Interface WindOW E3C eren nnne eene nnne enn 4 43 Figure 4 47 Specific Interface Window Structured T1 eene nennen 4 44 Figure 4 48 Interface Statistics Window Structured 4 45 Figure 4 49 Specific Interface Window Dual Sync Leg 4 46 Figure 4 50 Specific Interface Window High Speed Sync 4 47 Figure 4 51 Specific Interface Window High Speed
190. e 4 40 CXUG 4 49 10 6 99 Low Speed Asynchronous Legacy Interface Module LSAL 4 50 To view the statistics for the Low Speed Asynchronous Legacy Interface Module LSAL select Module Status from the View menu More information can be obtained for a particular module by highlighting the module and pressing lt F2 gt This will bring up the logical interface screen for this module similar to Figure 4 38 Additional information for each logical interface can be obtained by highlighting the interface and pressing lt F2 gt which will bring up the screen shown in Figure 4 53 This screen contains information that is tailored to the interface Name Darnestown Slot 4 Intf A Type LSAL Card Status Idle LSAL gt ATM Cells 181 Interface Status Up Loopback No LSAL lt ATM Cells 0 Discarded Cells 0 Last Statistics Discard Cell Secs 0 Reset Hour 15 Async Interface ARQ AALS5 Interface Tx Chars Tx Frames 181 0 Rx Chars 0 Rx Frames 181 0 Errors SDU Discards 18 Overruns 0 Retry Events 0 RTS Off Link Resets 0 CTS Off Link State Setup REFRESH HISTORY 10 40 View Intf LSAL ALARM d cennie ESC ESC Previous Figure 4 53 Specific Interface Window LSAL Tx Chars Number of asynchronous characters transmitted Rx Chars Number of asynchronous characters received Errors Number of errors detected Overruns Number of buffer overruns RTS Status of con
191. e CPU and HRIM are co located modification of these values will not be recognized The system will revert to the default values Move to the HRIM Channel and toggle to the channel previously configured Figure 4 22 Assign the CPU IP Address Subnet Mask and Gateway IP Address If using an SNMP management station assign appropriate Trap IP Address es Move to the EXECUTE button and press ENTER to update the database and return to the main menu CXUG 10 6 99 Remote Session The procedures to establish a remote TELNET session a locally connected PC and HRIM and CPU on same chassis as shown in Figure 4 27 are described below z dc Local CX Node ATM IP Addr 134 196 15 1 ATM IP Mask 255 255 255 0 Ethernet IP Addr 134 196 14 1 Ethernet IP Mask 255 255 255 0 HRIM IP Broadcast Addr 134 196 14 255 Default G W 0 0 0 0 Ethernet MAC Addr 009010c00001 LAN 134 196 14 0 Remote CX Node PC IP Addr 134 196 14 2 Remote IP Addr 134 196 15 3 PC IP Mask 255 255 255 0 PC IP G W 134 196 14 1 Figure 4 27 Remotely Connected TELNET Session 1 Select the Interface command from the Configure menu This will bring up the screen shown previously in Figure 4 21 2 Using the ARROW keys select the HRIM module Press F2 to go to the configuration screen Figure 4 28 Lx 15401 of rentar interface IP mask uf rentar interface 408 IF address of def
192. e Module 160223 1 CXHSSL High Speed Serial Interface Legacy Module 160216 1 CXLSAL Low Speed Asynchronous Legacy Interface Module 160200 1 CXOC3 OC3 Interface Module Multimode STS 160200 2 CXOC3 OC3 Interface Module Single Mode STS 160200 3 CXOC3 OC3 Interface Module Multimode STM 160200 4 CXOC3 OC3 Interface Module Single Mode STM 160225 1 CXOC3C MM OC3C Interface Module Multimode 160225 2 SM 15KM Interface Module Single Mode 15 Km 160225 3 SM 40KM Interface Module Single Mode 40 Km 160203 1 CXSCM Station Clock Module 160212 3 CXSEL 4 Structured E1 Legacy Interface Module 4 Port 160212 4 CXSEL 8 Structured E1 Legacy Interface Module 8 Port 160212 1 CXSTL 4 Structured T1 Legacy Interface Module 4 Port 160212 2 CXSTL 8 Structured T1 Legacy Interface Module 8 Port 160206 1 CXT1C T1 Cell Interface Module 160227 1 CXUD3L Unstructured DS3 Legacy Interface Module 160227 2 CXUES3L Unstructured E3 Legacy Interface Module 160220 1 CXUTEL Unstructured T1 E1 Legacy Interface Module D 2 CXUG 10 6 99 Table D 3 Cables Part No Cable Model Description 650252 X CPU VT100 9F CPU craft interface to VT100 terminal 650074 X CPU VT100 25F CPU craft interface to VT100 terminal 650075 X CPU VT100 25M CPU craft interface to VT100 terminal 613001 X RCPU 232F Redundant CPU craft interface to VT100 terminal 613002 X RCPU 232M Redun
193. e key This provides the operator with a consistent user friendly interface and helps to limit out of range parameters If numeric or ASCII text is required the prompt line will show the valid range or number of ASCII characters allowed Regardless of the type of parameter the entry process is ended by pressing the ENTER key As each parameter is entered validation checks are performed If the entry is invalid an error indication will be displayed on the status line When the operator acknowledges the error by pressing the ENTER key he she will be prompted to enter a valid response before advancing to the next field After a valid parameter has been entered it will remain on the screen if possible until all parameters have been entered CXUG 10 6 99 Keystroke Correction To correct keystroke errors during command parameter entry use the backspace key to erase the error then reenter the correct information Abort Command Key The command parameter entry process can be ended at any time by pressing the lt ESC gt key twice lt ESC gt lt ESC gt This action will cancel command execution and return to the Menu screen Command Response Commands executed by the Cell Exchange generally fall into two categories commands that perform some process and commands that return status information Commands that perform a process will usually return a completion code This code is mapped into a completion status string that will be
194. e modules are differentiated by the addition of the character on the faceplate of the DSL A front panel view of the Dual Synchronous Legacy Interface Module is shown in Figure 3 39 DSL shown 3 Page 3 53 under Jumper Settings insert the word DSL between The and jumper in the first line Add the following after the table and table note DSL There are no configurable jumper settings 4 Page 3 53 under Specifications Data Rates change the entry to read DSL 8 Kbps 2 048 Mbps in 8 Kbps increments DSL 1200 bps 2400 bps 4800 bps 9600 bps and 16 Kbps 2 048 Mbps in 8 Kbps increments MX17358 1 4 30 00 3 of 29 5 Page 3 53 insert the following note after Data Rates NOTE The lower port speeds will result in significantly increased cellification delays At 1200 bps each cell is filled in 313 ms Assuming a 3 cell delay end to end there is a one way delay of one second as measured from the input RS 530 port to the output of the remote RS 530 port If additional cell delay is introduced due to ATM switching equipment etc then additional delays will be incurred The delays for the higher port rates are proportionately lower 6 Page 3 83 under Specifications Port Speed change to read 8 Kbps 4 096 Mbps in 0 8 Kbps increments 7 After page 3 87 insert the following new information Structured E1 Legacy Module SEL Overview The Structured E1 Legacy
195. e of traffic voice or data and contains the same number of channels Figure 3 33 4or8 TI STL Interfaces SAR Sut N TI 40 24 N VPI VCI All 24 1 channels mapped to one VPI VCI pair Figure 3 33 Channel Mapping The STL utilizes an AAL1 Segmentation And Reassembly SAR processor to pass data to and from the ATM network In Figure 3 34 below two connections that have been established between a T1 interface and the ATM network In this example T1 channels 1 3 and 8 are mapped to one VPI VCI pair and channels 2 5 7 are mapped to another VPI VCI pair 3 44 CXUG 10 6 99 a SL ec STL 1 N VPI VCI f 1 channe ATM 1 groups Network 3 V 24 2 VPI VCI 5 STL e gt Two STL to VPI VCI connections Figure 3 34 STL to VPI VCI Connections For STL to STL connections the actual channel numbers of each group may differ at each end as long as each group contains the same number of channels The ordering of channels passed from the source channel group to the destination channel group is always preserved In other words the first channel of the destination receives the data from the first channel of the source the second channel of the destination receives the data from the second channel of the source and so on Cell Bus Microprocessor Power Section The Cell Bus Microprocessor Power section of t
196. e software in accordance with the readme txt accompanying the software the file will be named CPUROM BIN Do not rename this file or the load will fail 10 When the window shown in Figure 2 16 appears monitor the progress of the image loading process The load will take approximately 41 minutes Xmoden file send for CX1500 pom uu Figure 2 16 Software Load Indicator Window 11 Load in progress indications include the OPNL light on the CPU module flashes at a constant rate for the duration of the load and the time stamp lower left corner of the main menu disappears during the load PRECAUTION not press any key on the keyboard while the load is in progress Pressing a key will terminate the image transfer If there is a screen saver active use a mouse movement to redisplay the screen CXUG 10 6 99 2 19 NOTE Ifthe file transfer stops before completion select Disconnect from the Call menu then Connect from the same menu This will restart the file transfer 12 When the load is complete you will be returned to the Login screen Log back in with the appropriate password From the Configure menu select Software Ver Use the arrow key to highlight the second image listed in flash Figure 2 17 which is the software just loaded Verify the filename and press the F2 key This will begin a Code Swap to the new image T CX1500 HyperTerminal Ot xi oel sls ala New Version Name mM Versions
197. e the active configuration and remain in the submenu Selecting EXECUTE and pressing ENTER will update the configuration information and return to the main menu CXUG 5 3 10 6 99 5 4 To configure a specific interface perform the following 1 NOTE NOTE Using the up lt ARROW gt key move the cursor to the Name field press F3 to add an interface and enter the name of the interface The interface name can be up to 14 characters in length and is used as the interface reference name throughout the management system Tab to the Intf Type field and select the type of interface module installed This is a tumbler field pressing the SPACE bar will move through the choices available Tab to the Slot field and select the physical slot in which the module is installed This is a tumbler field pressing the SPACE bar will move through the slot numbers sequentially Tab to the Physical Intf field and using the SPACE bar toggle to the interface port for this connection Tab to the Inact field and using the SPACE bar toggle to select active or inactive status for this interface Active status is blank inactive status is marked with an asterisk Press lt F1 gt to enter the interface information After a short delay the OPNL LED on the front of the affected module should illuminate indicating that the module has successfully received configuration information from the CPU and has booted up
198. e through the installed modules Interface Name Select an interface DIAG Module Reset FR ESC ESC Previous Figure 4 17 Module Reset Window from Diagnostics Menu Network Management The Cell Exchange software provides the capability to review the configuration information and addressing for the Cell Exchange system on which it is installed The management system software will also determine the specific model of Cell Exchange by identifying the position of the CPU CXUG 4 16 10 6 99 module i e if the CPU module located in a slot numbered above 4 it is a CX 1500 or CX 1580 if the slot is 4 or less it is a CX 1540 Selecting Configure SNMP will bring up the window shown in Figure 4 18 Community strings Read public Write private Trap public LANE IP Interface Service Type LANE Telnet Disconnect Timeout 300 LANE IP EXECUTE Enter read community string 07 52 CFG SNMP Config ALARM ESC ESC Previous Figure 4 18 SNMP Window The entries on this screen include Read Community String Access level for reading the network Must match craft display Default is public Write Community String Access level for writing to the network Must Match craft display Default is private Trap Community String Access level for receiving traps from the network Must match craft display Default is public
199. ecific Interface Window E3C Entries in this window include Loss of Signal Indicates presence or absence of a valid E3 signal at the interface Loss of Frame Presence or absence of an E3 frame Hardware Failure Self explanatory Loss of Cell Sync Indication of whether the interface is in synchronization with cells Loss of Cell Delineation Indication of whether the interface is in synchronization with cells on the bus side E3 AIS Presence or absence of an Alarm Indication Signal at the interface Presence or absence of a Remote Alarm Indication from the far end equipment Payload Type Mismatch Presence or absence of the expected payload type Trail Trace Mismatch Indicates whether the Path Trace text matches the actual path trace reported The remaining entries are as previously defined Selecting the HISTORY button provides statistics for this module similar to those shown in Figure 4 40 4 43 Structured T1 Legacy Module STL 4 44 To view the statistics for the Structured T1 Legacy Module STL select Module Status from the View menu More information can be obtained for a particular module by highlighting the module and pressing F2 This will bring up the logical interface screen for this module similar to Figure 4 38 Information for each logical interface can be obtained by highlighting the interface and pressing F2 which will bring up the screen shown in Figure 4 47
200. eck destination interface destination field is bogus Source VCI exceeds max connection vci was 265535 Destination VCI exceeds max connection vci was 265535 Source VPI exceeds max connection vpi was 255 Destination VPI exceeds max connection vpi was gt 255 Software download succeeded or failed User has attempted to configure connection mappings for a Station Clock Module SCM or a multicast interface not implemented yet No connection mappings are allowed for SCM Modules Power Supply Module has been detected as available or failed The LAN Emulation Client has successfully connected to a LAN Emulation Server or has subsequently been disconnected from the server User has entered invalid configuration information Where appropriate the cursor is placed on the invalid item and the failure reason is given Some of the additional failure reasons are Connection Mapping Validation VPI only must be consistent one half of a connection was specified as VPI only but the other half was not Too many connections for interface legacy interfaces are only allowed one connection in each direction Invalid STL source channel group A connection to an STL interface did not specify a valid channel group id for that interface Invalid STL destination channel group A connection to an STL interface did not specify a valid channel group id for that interface CXUG 10 6 99 Table 6 1 Alarm Messages Cont d G
201. ect the SCM module as the source by entering the Timing Configuration screen and choosing the appropriate command Lower speed circuits may use this timing reference for a primary clocking source Figure 1 6 shows a block diagram of the timing system 1 12 CXUG 10 6 99 CXUG 10 6 99 System Timing Clock Fail Adaptive Adjustment Ref I In Ref O Out S Selector Int Internal Tri state Figure 1 6 System Timing Diagram Page 1 of 3 On Board Clock P L L Adaptive Adjustment P L L Adaptive Adjustment Ref I In Ref O Out S Selector Int Internal Tri state Figure 1 6 System Timing Diagram Page 2 of 3 CXUG 10 6 99 n CI RT T Jo ae RD SD lie lie F a xd DCE DTE Ref 1 In Ref O Out S Selector Int Internal Tri state Figure 1 6 System Timing Diagram Page 3 of 3 NOTE The HRIM and LSAL modules are asynchronous and do not require a timing reference CXUG 1 15 10 6 99 System Cooling System cooling is accommodated through normal ventilation No special cooling is required under most environmental conditions when the unit is lightly populated eight or less modules Under severe operating conditions such as extremely high ambient temperatures or high concentrations of dust circulation aids such as stacking fan units may be required A stacking fan arrangement is shown in Figure 1 7 PRECAUTION If more than half of the
202. ective local devices a process called reassembly Because ATM can carry multiple traffic types several adaptation protocols each operating simultaneously can exist at the adaptation layer AAL Type 5 is used for LAN Emulation LANE sits above AALS in the protocol hierarchy It masks the connection setup and handshaking fluctuations required by the ATM network from the higher protocol layers and is independent of upper layer protocols services and applications It maps the MAC address based data networking protocols into ATM virtual connections so that the higher layer protocols think they are operating on a connectionless LAN Two primary applications utilize the LANE protocol e Centralizing servers and using ATM adapters to attach them directly to an ATM network e Integrating existing LANs over an ATM transport backbone ATM switches that perform cell relay and use standard ATM signaling protocols to set up virtual connections are not aware of the LANE protocol LANE services can be co located in an ATM switch but the switch fabric does not directly perform any of the emulation functions The ATM switch maintains the virtual connections and performs the cell relay necessary for communication over the ATM network LANE follows a client server model with multiple clients connecting to LAN Emulation components A LAN Emulation Client LEC provides data forwarding and address resolution services The LEC provides standard Ethernet or Token Ri
203. ed DS3 T3 interface Name Dunkirk Intf A Type Inact VPI VCI i Interface Name VPI VCI Chan Connection Name Priority 2 Catonsville 3 25 CatonOne SCROLL UP LINE SCROLL DOWN LINE SCROLL UP PAGE SCROLL DOWN PAGE Press ENTER to update the config database and returnto the Main Menu 12 43 CFG Con Mgmt Map ALARM eecooeeeeeeeeoe ESC ESC Previous Figure 5 47 Connection Management Mapping Window UD3L Configuring connections to and from UD3L interfaces is very similar to configuring other connections see Configuring Interface Connections 1 Select the Connect Mgmt command from the Configure menu 2 To configure the connections move the cursor to highlight one of the interfaces 3 Press F2 or ENTER to bring up the connection management map for that interface 4 Usethe Up Down arrow key to move to the Inact field 5 Press F3 to add a new connection or F4 to delete an existing connection Follow the steps described in Configuring Interface Connections to add new connections 6 When done press F1 or move to the EXECUTE button and press ENTER to update the configuration database and return to the main menu or UPDATE and ENTER to update the configuration and remain in this window 5 50 CXUG 10 6 99 Unstructured E3 Legacy Interface Module Configuration UE3L Configuring Interfaces UESL To configure a new interface
204. eee eee eet ee D 2 Table D 32Cable3 5 2 2 1 82 22 81 9 E fot ouf oO eite D 3 CXUG 10 6 99 xix Chapter 1 Overview Asynchronous Transfer Mode ATM networking is a technology that provides high bandwidth and low delay using packet like switching and multiplexing techniques Usable capacity is segmented into 53 byte fixed size cells consisting of header and information fields allocated to services on demand Data is sent asynchronouly with respect to the network and other data channels In the U S ATM technology was first used mostly in local area networks LANs but is increasingly being deployed for applications in wide area networks WANs and for applications involving both private and public network operations within the enterprise ATM is a technology enabling infrastructure that provides a global networking platform from which to connect all forms of communications applications See Appendix A for a more detailed discussion of ATM technology The Cell Exchange family of ATM products provides flexible modular scaleable and cost effective multi access solutions to WAN connectivity for emerging ATM networks Multi access means that these products allow users to transition into the new ATM technology at their own pace while preserving their investment in the existing application infrastructure These Cell Exchange products provide the user with an ATM Cell platform that s
205. eessaeeeeesseeeeesnaes 5 30 Configuring 5 31 HIGH SPEED SERIAL INTERFACE LEGACY MODULE CONFIGURATION HSSL 5 32 Configuring Interfaces cosets cesses tee teet e ee Sets easter ese ties essen 5 32 Configuring COnnectOnsss 2 11 22 e S He Ee eee obe ete o et Pe b Pene fen teks 5 33 HUB ROUTER INTERFACE MODULE 2 02022000 0000 5 34 Configuring 5 34 Channel AAAs ARAN ARAB ARGNARGHARGUAR AN ARAN GRAN GR ANA 5 36 Configuring Connections vs 226s seen cbs oe ce sven deco Sunn dc ee ddan Seen Suda oni Seduce e ioo e 5 38 Verifying Network 5 39 LOW SPEED ASYNCHRONOUS LEGACY INTERFACE MODULE LSAL 5 41 Configuring nterfaces tuendi eee a 5 41 Configuring COfmnectlons s c e eee reae ee AA AAA AAR aaa 5 42 UNSTRUCTURED T1 LEGACY INTERFACE MODULE UTL eer 5 43 Configuring Interfaces v itii dme 5 43 Configuring Connectlons ee teres ciere oe asa 5 44 UNSTRUCTURED E1 LEGACY INTERFACE MODULE UBL enn 5 46 Configuring Interfaces 5 46 Configur
206. eg VPI VCI i Interface Name VPI VCI Chan Connection Name Priority Urbana 7 Urbana One High F1 Execute F3 Add Connection F4 Delete Connection 07 36 CFG Con Mgmt Map ALARM Qeeeeeeeeeeeeeee ESC ESC Previous Figure 5 29 Connection Management Mapping Window High Speed Leg Configuring connections to and from HSL interfaces is very similar to configuring other connections see Configuring Interface Connections 1 Select the Connect Mgmt command from the Configure menu 2 configure the connections move the cursor to highlight one of the interfaces 3 Press F2 or ENTER to bring up the connection management map for that interface 4 Usethe Up Down arrow key to move to the Inact field 5 Press F3 to add a new connection or F4 to delete an existing connection Follow the steps described in Configuring Interface Connections to add new connections 6 When done press F1 or move to the EXECUTE button and press ENTER to update the configuration database and return to the main menu or UPDATE and ENTER to update the configuration and remain in this window CXUG 5 31 10 6 99 High Speed Serial Interface Legacy Module Configuration HSSL Configuring Interfaces 5 32 To configure a new interface follow the steps described in Configuring Physical Interfaces to enter the name the interface type the slot the physical interface and the active
207. egulator reduces the 5 VDC input to a 1 2 VDC output for Gunning Transistor Logic GTL use There are three signal components to the DC power output 5 VDC TTL 41 2 VDC CXUG 10 6 99 GTL and ground Filters are provided to reduce electromagnetic interference EMI A functional block diagram of the DC power supply module is shown in Figure 3 7 DC DC CONVERTER 5 2 o Figure 3 7 DC Power Supply Module Functional Block Diagram Specifications Input Voltage 38 to 60 VDC Input Current 5 0 amps per DC feed max Output Voltage 5 VDC 1 2 VDC Indicators we wem cm POWER Indicates that 5V is being read at the bus LED FAIL when the 5 volts generated by the power supply is below 4 75 volts or above 5 25 volts Indicates that the power supply module has failed or no DC is present FUSE Red Indicates that the fuse has blown CXUG 3 13 10 6 99 Station Clock Module SCM Overview The Station Clock Module SCM allows the user to input and propagate an external clock source into the Cell Exchange to be used as the internal reference clock for the unit The SCM requires a balanced electrical input signal The clock rate may be selected at a rate from 8 kHz to 20 MHz in 8 kHz steps The front panel of the SCM is shown in Figure 3 8 Figure 3 8 Station Clock Module SCM The Station Clock Module performs the following primary
208. el 4 DSX 1 61385 DSX 1 CSU 15 Pin DB M 15 Pin DB M B 11 T1C Module via BADP cable to CSU Smart Jack 120405 X TX3 DS3 Male Male BNC B 12 DS3 Module to DS3 45Mbps facility ANSI T1 107 E3C Module to E3 equipment 34 Mbps E1C UTEL Modules to G 703 unbalanced via Balun HRIM Module to 10Base 2 Ethernet UD3L UE3L 28 of 29 MX17358 1 4 30 00 Table B 3 Cable Index Cont d Part No Cable Model Connector Figure Description 610126 X ST MOD XFR 8 Pin Mod 8 Pin Mod B 8 T1C Module to CSU Smart Jack crossover E1C SEL Module to E1 equipment crossover UTEL Module to non framed E1 or T1 equipment crossover 610127 X ST MOD MOD 8 Pin Mod 8 Pin Mod STL Module to LINK 2 BFM BIM 1 LINK 100 DLI 1 Module entr eLINK CSU Module or ST Dpanel 4 PRI T1M E1M T1C Module to CSU Smart Jack straight E1C SEL Modules to E1 equipment straight UTEL Module to non framed E1 or T1 equipment straight 612529 X CXHSSI XVR HSSI M crossover M HSSL Module crossover HSSI 50 pin connector 612751 X CXHSSI DCE HSSI M to DCE M HSSL Module to DCE HSSI 50 pin connector 613012 X DSC X 21 26 Pin HDB M 15 Pin DB M DSC Module to V 11 X 21 DCE 613013 X LSAL RJ45 25DTE M RJ 45 M to 25 pin DTE M LSAL Module to 25 pin DTE for PCs or workstations 613014 X LSAL RJ45 25DTE F
209. ell Exchange to interface with non ATM cell bearing equipment at speeds up to 20 Mbps The synchronous channels operate in steps of 8 Kbps A front panel view of the High Speed Synchronous Legacy Interface Module is shown in Figure 3 42 Figure 3 42 High Speed Synchronous Legacy Interface Module HSL The High Speed Synchronous Legacy Interface Module performs the following primary functions e Takes synchronous non cell bearing traffic Legacy traffic and converts the data stream to ATM CBR cells adding the appropriate cell overhead e Takes the cells and places them onto the ATM cell bus e Monitors the physical synchronous interface for alarms e Collects statistics on module performance CXUG 3 55 10 6 99 Cell Bus Microprocessor Power Section The Cell Bus Microprocessor Power section of the High Speed Synchronous Legacy Interface Module consists of the following e ATM Cell Bus Switching Logic IC ATM Cell Bus Switch along with a RAM IC provides connectivity to the backplane board e 96 Pin DIN connector used to connect onto the ATM Cell Bus e Intel 80C31 microprocessor e Capacitor filtering provided for control and noise suppression Unique Functionality Section Unique functionality of the High Speed Legacy Interface Module includes e Module equipped with one complete independent synchronous channel e Connector is a High Density DB 26 female type e Configured as a DCE device using a DB 26 Female high density connec
210. ell Interface Module 3 33 DS3 Module cell bus 3 34 configuring 5 18 indicators 3 35 overview 3 33 pinouts 3 35 specifications 3 35 statistics 4 41 unique functionality 3 34 DSC Module configuring 5 15 indicators 3 32 jumper settings 3 31 overview 3 20 pinouts 3 32 specifications 3 31 statistics 4 40 CXUG 10 6 99 unique functionality 3 30 DSL Module configuring 5 28 indicators 3 53 jumper settings 3 53 overview 3 51 pinouts 3 53 specifications 3 53 statistics 4 46 unique functionality 3 52 Dual E 1 Cell Interface Module 3 36 Dual Synchronous Cell Interface Module 3 29 Dual Synchronous Legacy Interface Module 3 51 Dual T 1 Cell Interface Module 3 16 Dynamic Timing channel timing 1 11 EIC Module cell bus 3 37 configuring 5 20 indicators 3 38 jumper settings 3 38 overview 3 36 pinouts 3 39 specifications 3 38 statistics 4 42 unique functionality 3 37 E3C Cell Interface Module 3 40 E3C Module cell bus 3 41 configuring 5 22 indicators 3 42 overview 3 40 pinouts 3 42 specifications 3 41 statistics 4 43 unique functionality 3 41 Electronic Radiation Hazards and Precautions OC3 Module 3 22 OC3C 3 28 Electrostatic Discharge 2 2 7 1 7 2 7 3 Equipment Description overview 1 4 Equipment Installation 2 1 External Timing overview 1 12 Front Panel Indicators 1 7 FTP loading system software 2 14 General Troubleshooting 6 5 Grounding 2 2 CXUG 10 6 99 Hi
211. eneral Cont d Duplicate source VPI VCI pair A source vpi vci pair is used more than once for an interface Duplicate source channel group A source channel group of an STL SEL or HRIM interface is used more than once VPI VCI pair used by SVC The source vpi vci pair for the interface is already being used by the system s LAN Emulation Client Destination VPI VCI pair in use The destination vpi vci pair is used more than once for an interface Destination channel group in use The destination channel group of an STL SEL or HRIM interface is used more than once Destination VPI VCI used by SNMP The destination vpi vci pair for the interface is already being SVC used by the system s LAN Emulation Client Destination VPI VCI used by SNMP The destination vpi vci pair for the interface is already being PVC used for an SNMP PVC connection Not Ready for Redundant CPU Switch This message is only seen with a redundant CPU configuration There is danger of unsuccessful Redundant CPU switch when this message is displayed Ready for Redundant CPU Switch This message is only seen with a redundant CPU configuration The CPU is prepared to perform a Redundant CPU switch after this message is displayed Logical Interfaces Cannot remove current system timer User is trying to delete a logical interface that is being used as the source of system timing User must first change the source of system timing before deleting this interface Can t re
212. entifiers The network architecture uses unchannelized network transports Since there are no physical channels to distinguish the traffic in an ATM network logical connections are established Instead of voice and video channels ATM has voice and video connections These logical connections are established and maintained by means of a two part identifier structure the virtual path and the virtual channel A virtual path VP is a concept used to describe the transport of cells belonging to a set of virtual channels Each VP is assigned a unique identification value called the virtual path identifier VPI A virtual channel VC is a concept used to describe the transport of ATM cells associated by a unique identification value called the virtual channel identifier VCI A VP is a logical grouping A 1 of VCs that allows an ATM switch to perform operations on groups of virtual circuits ATM switches use the VPI and VCI fields located in the cell header to identify the next network segment that a cell needs to transit on its way to its final destination A virtual channel is equivalent to a virtual circuit both terms describe a logical connection between the two ends of a communications connection As a result ATM offers a private switched connection for each user The concept of virtual circuit simplifies routing once a path is established and allows components within the network to simply distinguish among different traffic flows for purposes
213. er timing originating from the carrier circuit and phase lock the reference clock to it to produce various timing rates required by the Cell Exchange system If the circuit chosen to provide reference should fail the Cell Exchange system will revert to the internal clock source as a secondary choice All other modules may now use this timing as the timing reference On Board Timing On Board timing is the least stable of all timing sources and should only be used if no other timing source is available On Board timing is provided as a source reference when testing the Cell Exchange system in a back to back mode This timing source may be used by all the channel ports on that particular module This timing source may also be selected as the reference timing source Selecting this timing source as the reference is accomplished in the same manner as for external timing from the Timing Configuration screen at the craft interface Lower speed circuits may use this timing reference as a primary clocking source Reference Timing Reference timing may be used on some modules to select the reference timing to be used to transfer data in and out of the selected interface on that module It is not applicable for E3C or DS3 modules Internal Timing Internal Timing is the clock that is resident on the CPU module and is presented to all the modules as an alternative timing selection Internal Timing is also used for the fall b
214. er CRC Errors Indicates the of data packet CRC errors received Lost Control Cells Indicates the number of instances that a control cell was generated but not received Tx Control Cells Indicates the number of control cells transmitted to interface cards CXUG 4 32 10 6 99 Station Clock Module SCM To view the statistics for the Station Clock Module SCM select Module Status from the View menu The window that appears provides a top level view of the hardware installed in the chassis More information can be obtained for the SCM by highlighting the module and pressing lt F2 gt This action will bring up the specific interface screen shown in Figure 4 37 Slot 12 Intf A Type SCM Card Status Up Interface Status Up Loopback No SCM lt ATM 0 Discarded Cells 0 Discard Cell Secs 0 Last Statistics Reset Hour 11 00 REFRESH 14 52 View Intf SCM ESC ESC Previous Figure 4 37 Logical Interface Status Window SCM Entries for this window include Card Status Up normal indicates that the card has been recognized by the CPU and a software download has been successfully executed Interface Status Indication of whether a valid T1 signal is being received at the interface Loopback User selectable from the configuration screen SCM lt ATM Number of cells from the network to the interface Discarded Cells Number of cells discarded due to FIFO overflo
215. erves on the network edge to multiplex and concentrate cell bearing ATM and legacy traffic Frame Relay IP Ethernet TDM asynchronous bi synchronous SNA These systems are ideal for the wide range of ATM applications because of their flexible architecture and diversified interface designs In addition powerful ATM service capabilities result with maximum network efficiency when full traffic management and Any to Any connectivity are combined in their operation The CX 1500 Family of Cell Exchange Systems The CX 1500 family of Cell Exchange systems provides a versatile scaleable secure and cost effective ATM cell platform The Cell Exchange systems provide for expansion of today s totally ubiquitous ATM networking concept by using ATM technology at lower bit rates while at the same time continuing to make use of existing equipment The Cell Exchange system is designed on a modular hierarchy of functionality that allows the user to add features and functionality on a need only basis Thus the user has the freedom to size the equipment to the requirements of the application The architecture of the Cell Exchange system is shown in Figure 1 1 CXUG 1 1 10 6 99 Cell Bus Power 5 Supply Cell Bearing o que Interface Module Non Cell Bearing Interface Module Cells Cell Bearing Interface Module Non Cell Bearing Interface Module Cells Cell Bearing Interface Module Non Cell Bearing Interface Module
216. es from interface modules to determine which modules are present and operating properly Recording interface module related alarms such as module up down and interface up down events Processing statistics from interface modules Polling the active CPU for any database changes that have occurred these are the only messages that are sent by the standby CPU and these messages only go to the active CPU i e the standby CPU never sends messages to interface modules Detecting loss of bus communications Following database updates from the active CPU the standby CPU reinitializes itself The standby CPU also reinitializes itself whenever it detects a loss of bus communications Whenever the standby CPU reinitializes for any reason CPU switchover is automatically enabled If the CPU switchover was previously disabled by the user it will automatically be re enabled when either CPU is reinitialized CXUG 10 6 99 Power Supply Module The CX 1500 chassis may be equipped with either an AC or DC Power Supply One or two Power Supply Modules of the same type may be installed depending upon the degree of reliability the user is striving for One Power Supply Module handles the full power load required for the number of interface modules placed in the chassis The Power Supply Modules feature a solid state switcher design If two modules are installed the modules are coupled to supply redundant power to the bus The Power Supply Modules are desi
217. ese sophisticated FTP Clients can be used only if configured to send one segment at a time The software upload feature requires use of both a telnet session and the FTP Client Through the Software Ver Menu screen the user selects the name of the new software version The CX will inform the user that it is erasing flash memory and then that it is ready to accept software Once the user sees the second prompt from the telnet screen the new software image can be sent to the CX via the FTP Client The following ftp command FTP gt put CPUROM BIN sends the software image to the CX General Information CXUG 10 6 99 e Flash contains two versions of software the that is currently running and one other e There is only one database version held in non volatile RAM e Although either the online or standby CPU can receive a software download via FTP or Craft Station it is recommended that only the online CPU be used for software download e Some PC based FTP Clients display both the client and server s directory tree These FTP Client applications cannot be used due to the fact that the CX does not have a disk system 2 5 Redundant CPU Database Synchronization The active CPU checksums blocks of its database Any blocks that have a changed checksum are sent to the standby CPU in messages that includes the database version The standby CPU updates its database only if the database version identifier matches If the database ve
218. esence or absence of a Carrier Group Alarm ALM Status Presence or absence of alarms Err Sec Thres User selectable from the configuration screen indicates the Bit Error Rate alarm threshold CXUG 10 6 99 Errored Secs Indicates the percentage of seconds that the BER exceeds the alarm threshold OOF Count Number of instances when there is no valid T1 framing Slip Count Number of instances when the framing has slipped Sig Freeze Cnt Number of instances of signal freeze 1 s Density Cnt Number of instances when 1 appears in less than three bits out of twenty four Eight 0 s Cnt Number of instances when eight 075 appear only valid when B8ZS coding selected B8ZS Sig Cnt Number of instances B8ZS signal received when B8ZS coding is NOT selected The remaining entries are the same as previously defined Selecting the CELL STATS button provides statistics for this module as shown in Figure 4 48 Name Hyattsburg Intf A Type Structured T1 Ch Conn TxC RxC TxC RxC Ch Conn TxC D1 4659 4658 3 De 4658 D2 6 9 12 15 1 18 21 24 REFRESH CLEAR 16 28 View Int STL CELL ESC ESC Previous Figure 4 48 Interface Statistics Window Structured T1 For each configured Channel a connection identifier and the number of cells transmitted and received is displayed under the corresponding headings CXUG 4 45 10 6
219. etwork the telephone company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required If advance notice is not practical the telephone company will notify the customer as soon as possible Also you will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary TELECOM INTERFACE PORT CODES Facility Interface Manufacturer s Port Codes Identifier Service Order Code Network Jacks 04DU9 BN T1C STL 4 STL 8 RJ48C 04DU9 DN T1C STL 4 STL 8 RJ48C 04DU9 1KN T1C STL 4 STL 8 RJ48C 04DU9 1SN T1C STL 4 STL 8 RJ48C CXUG 10 6 99 US 1 Radio Frequency Interference This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at the user s own expense If Problems Arise US 2 If trouble is experienced with this equipment please contact Timeplex Customer Support at 800 366 0126 for repair and or warranty inf
220. faces to enter the name the interface type the slot the physical interface A or B and the status indication Press lt F2 gt to enter the interface configuration menu Figure 5 26 shows the interface configuration menu with all fields set to the default values Intf Name Gaithersburg Slot 3 Intf A Intf Type Sync Leg Data Rate 1000 Adaptive Clock No Use TT No Invert ST No ST and RT Clock Source Internal EXECUTE Press ENTER To update the config database and return to the Main Menu 16 32 CFG Intf Sync Leg ESC ESC Previous Figure 5 26 Interface Configuration Window DSL The arrow keys are used to move between the different fields Beginning at the Data Rate field the down arrow key can be used to move the cursor through each field in order Enter text using the keyboard The space bar is used to move through the possible selections in tumbler fields given below in parentheses starting with the default e Data Rate edit field e Adaptive Clock No Yes Use TT No Yes e Invert ST No Yes e ST and RT Clock Source Internal Ref Clock When done move to the EXECUTE button and press ENTER to update the configuration database and return to the main menu 5 28 CXUG 10 6 99 Configuring Connections Connections are configured via the Connection Management menus Figure 5 27 shows the configuration map for the Dual Synchronous Legacy interface Name Gaithe
221. faces is very similar to configuring other connections see Configuring Interface Connections 1 Select the Connect Mgmt command from the Configure menu 2 To configure the connections move the cursor to highlight one of the interfaces 3 Press F2 or ENTER to bring up the connection management map for that interface 4 Usethe Up Down arrow key to move to the Inact field 5 Press F3 to add a new connection or F4 to delete an existing connection Follow the steps described in Configuring Interface Connections to add new connections 6 When done press F1 or move to the EXECUTE button and press ENTER to update the configuration database and return to the main menu or UPDATE and ENTER to update the configuration and remain in this window CXUG 10 6 99 Multicast Feature Configuration Multicast allows a single interface to deliver information to multiple destinations simultaneously The Cell Exchange supports up to 16 different interfaces to act as the source of the multicast data traffic Each of the 16 multicast interfaces is able to deliver data to 16 different destination interfaces which are pre selected during configuration of the multicast feature The multicast feature supports only uni directional data traffic from a single source to multiple destinations Multicast utilizes multicast cell receive capability to support up to 256 VCIs A source interface of a multicast group will be allowed to
222. ference Onboard Signal Loopbacks Self Test lt 7 Watts ITU G 703 G 804 af vtoa 0078 000 Channel Emulation Service CES v2 0 1 97 ATM Forum E1 UNI v3 1 af phy 0016 0000 umm eme m LED OPNL Green Illuminates when operational code begins running after the boot process is complete Blinks during operational code download LED Rx Syn Green Indicates that the module has achieved frame synchronization with the received E1 when lit loss of frame synchronization when extinguished LED Ce Syn Green Indicates that the module has achieved synchronization with the ATM cell HEC in the received E1 payload when lit loss of cell synchronization when extinguished 3 38 CXUG 10 6 99 Pinouts Pinouts for the RJ 45 connector are shown in Figure 3 27 and the accompanying table Rx to E1C E 4 Tx to Network 89670 Figure 3 27 RJ 45 Pin Location 1 To E1C Rx R 4 To Network Tx R 2 To E1C Rx T 5 To Network Tx T CXUG 3 39 10 6 99 E3 Cell Interface Module E3C Overview The E3 Cell Interface Module allows the Cell Exchange to interface with ATM cell bearing communications equipment The E3C Module performs the following primary functions takes the cell from the E3C interface and places them onto the ATM cell bus monitors the physical interface for alarms and collects statistics on module performance The E3C module termi
223. figuration database and return to the Main Menu or highlight the lt UPDATE gt button and press ENTER to update the database and remain in this screen NOTE 1 Pressing the escape key twice lt ESC gt lt ESC gt will exit the screen without saving any changes The configuration will revert to the data last saved through EXECUTE or UPDATE NOTE 2 Traffic originating on a structured legacy port type should terminate on another structured legacy port The same holds true for unstructured legacy ports they should terminate on another unstructured legacy port The only exception is that a single structured DSO may be terminated on an unstructured legacy port provided that the structured legacy port is configured in basic mode 5 9 Station Clock Module SCM Configuring Interfaces To configure a new SCM interface follow the steps described in Configuring Physical Interfaces to enter the name the interface type Station Clock Module the slot and the physical interface Press lt F2 gt to enter the interface configuration menu Figure 5 10 shows the configuration menu Slot 12 Intf A Type System Clock Mod Name Ref Clock Source Clock Rate EXECUTE Clock rate enter anumber between 1 and 6250 representing multiples of 8 KHz ESC ESC Previous 11 36 CFG Intf SCM Figure 5 10 Interface Configuration Window Station Clock Module To configure the Station Clock Modul
224. figure the connections move the cursor to highlight one of the interfaces 3 Press F2 or ENTER to bring up the connection management map for that interface 4 Use the Up Down arrow key to move to the Inact field 5 Press lt F3 gt to add a new connection or lt F4 gt to delete an existing connection Follow the steps described in Configuring Interface Connections to add new connections 6 When done press F1 or move to the EXECUTE button and press ENTER to update the configuration database and return to the main menu or UPDATE and ENTER to update the configuration and remain in this window CXUG 5 23 10 6 99 Structured T1 Legacy Module STL Configuring STL Interfaces To configure a new STL interface follow the steps described in Configuring Physical Interfaces Enter the name the interface type Structured T1 the slot and the physical interface A H Press lt F2 gt to enter the configuration menu Figure 5 23 shows the STL configuration menu with all fields set to the default values In the example the user is configuring interface A of the STL Module in slot 14 Intf Name Hyattsburg Slot 14 Intf A Intf Type Structured T1 Framing ESF Trunk Conditioning Data Code Idle UAC Coding B8ZS Trunk Conditioning Signaling Idle 0 Busy 1 Line Build Out Equal 0 Idle Channel Conditioning Voice Idle Err Sec Threshold 100 ATM CES w cas Tx Clock Out On Board Channel 1 2 Conn
225. g 1 11 Jumper Settings 4 Wire EML Module 3 86 AC Power Supply Module 3 11 BIM Module 3 83 CPU Module 3 7 DS3 Module 3 35 DSC Module 3 31 DSL Module 3 53 E1C Module 3 38 HRIM Module 3 64 HSL Module 3 57 HSSL Module 3 61 OC3 Module 3 23 OC3C Module 3 28 SCM Module 3 13 STL Module 3 46 Module 3 17 UD3L Module 3 75 UE3L Module 3 79 UTEL Module 3 70 Keystroke Correction 4 7 Laser Radiation Hazards 3 22 3 28 Loading System Software 2 14 2 22 2 24 Local Management Station 4 1 4 3 Location Name 5 2 setting 5 1 Logon 4 2 Logon Access Levels 4 3 IN 4 Low Speed Asynchronous Legacy Interface Module 3 65 LSAL Module configuring 5 41 indicators 3 66 overview 3 65 pinouts 3 67 specifications 3 66 statistics 4 59 Main Menu 4 7 Configure 4 7 Diagnostics 4 7 View 4 7 Main Menu Screen 4 5 Maintenance User 4 3 Management User 4 3 Menu Operation 4 5 Menu Selection 4 6 Microprocessor 1 5 Module Installation 2 3 Modules 4 Wire Analog Interface 3 84 AC Power Supply 3 9 Basic Interface 3 81 CPU 3 5 DC Power Supply 3 12 DS 3 Cell Interface 3 33 Dual E 1 Cell Interface 3 36 Dual Synchronous Cell Interface 3 29 Dual T 1 Cell Interface 3 16 E3C Cell Interface 3 40 High Speed Serial Interface Legacy 3 59 High Speed Synchronous Legacy Interface 3 55 Hub Router Legacy Interface 3 63 Low Speed Asynchronous Legacy Interface 3 65 OC 3 Cell Interface 3 19 OC 3C Cell
226. gement Mapping 5 8 Figure 5 10 Interface Configuration Window Station Clock Module eene 5 10 Figure 5 11 Interface Configuration Window Dual Cell 5 11 Figure 5 12 Connection Management Window csse nennen enne 5 12 Figure 5 13 Interface Configuration Window 5 13 Figure 5 14 Configuration Management Mapping Window Cell eese 5 14 Figure 5 15 Interface Configuration Window Dual Sync Cell eene 5 15 Figure 5 16 Configuration Management Mapping Window Dual Sync Cell 5 16 Figure 5 17 Interface Configuration Window DS3 5 18 Figure 5 18 Configuration Management Mapping Window 053 see 5 19 Figure 5 19 Interface Configuration Window 5 20 Figure 5 20 Configuration Management Mapping Window 5 21 Figure 5 21 Interface Configuration Window 5 22 Figure 5 22 Configuration Management Mapping Window E3C sere 5 23 Figure 5 23 Interface Configuration Window Structured T1 seen 5 24 Figure 5 24 Connection Management Mapping Window STL to Cell 5 26 Figure 5 25 Connection Management Mapping
227. gh Speed Serial Interface Legacy Module 3 59 High Speed Synchronous Legacy Interface Module 3 55 HRIM Module configuring 5 34 indicators 3 64 overview 3 63 pinouts 3 64 specifications 3 63 statistics 4 49 HSL Module cell bus 3 56 configuring 5 30 indicators 3 57 jumper settings 3 57 overview 3 55 pinouts 3 58 specifications 3 57 statistics 4 48 unique functionality 3 56 HSSL Module cell bus 3 60 configuring 5 32 Indicators 3 61 Jumper Settings 3 61 overview 3 59 pinouts 3 61 Specifications 3 61 statistics 4 49 Unique Functionality 3 60 Hub Router Legacy Interface Module 3 63 Idle Channel Data Insertion STL Module 3 46 Indicators 4 Wire EML Module 3 86 AC Power Supply Module 3 11 BIM Module 3 83 CPU Module 3 7 DS3 Module 3 35 DSC Module 3 32 E1C Module 3 38 E3C Module 3 42 HRIM Module 3 64 HSL Module 3 57 HSSL Module 3 61 LSAL Module 3 66 OC3 Module 3 23 OC3C Module 3 28 SCM Module 3 13 3 15 STL Module 3 49 IN 3 Module 3 18 UD3L Module 3 76 UE3L Module 3 79 UTEL Module 3 71 Initial Logon 4 3 Initial Startup 4 1 Installation 2 1 connecting power 2 2 grounding requirements 2 2 installing chassis 2 1 installing modules 2 3 required tools and equipment 2 1 Software 2 5 Upgrade 2 5 unpacking 2 1 Interface Connections configuring 5 7 Interface Loopback STL Module 3 46 Interface Modules 1 4 1 9 overview 1 2 Internal Timing channel timin
228. gned to allow removal and replacement into a working unit without affecting active operational traffic hot swap See Chapter 7 for installation removal precautions Each Power Supply Module has its own power connector and cord The DC Power Supply requires a different back panel than the standard CX1500 chassis to accommodate the DC power connector The DC Power Supply and AC Power Supply are physically the same form and fit but they are not compatible PRECAUTION The AC and DC Power Supply Modules are physically interchangeable Care must be taken to ensure the correct one is installed or damage to the module may result If a DC Power Supply Module is inadvertently plugged into an AC chassis the internal fuse on the power supply will blow If an AC module is plugged into a DC chassis nothing will happen and there will be no indication of any activity NOTE The only way to determine whether the CX1500 chassis is designed for the AC or DC Power Supply Module is to look at the rear panel See Figures 2 1 and 2 2 The CX 1540 is equipped with a single AC Power Supply Module that is integrated with the chassis The CX 1580 does not come equipped with a power supply Station Clock Module The Station Clock SCM Module allows the user to input and propagate an external clock source into the CX 1500 to be used as the internal reference clock for the unit The SCM requires a balanced electrical input signal The clock rate may be selected
229. h the default e Framing CAS CRC4 CAS Line Build Out Equal 75 Norm 120 Norm 75 P R 120 P R 75 HRL1 75 HRL2 120 HRL e Err Sec Threshold 100 10 25 50 75 e Scramble Cells Disable Enable e Tx Clock Out Recovered Ref Clock Internal On Board When done move to the EXECUTE button and press ENTER to update the configuration database and return to the main menu 5 20 CXUG 10 6 99 Configuring Connections Connections are configured via the Connection Management menus see Configuring Interface Connections Configuring connections to and from synchronous cell interfaces is very similar to configuring other connections Figure 5 20 shows the configuration management mapping window for the EIC Name Crisfield Slot 5 Int A Type E1C VPI VCI i Interface Name VPI VCI Chan Connection Name Priority Walkersville Walkers Two High SCROLL UP LINE SCROLL DOWN LINE SCROLL UP PAGE SCROLL DOWN PAGE Press ENTER to update the config database and returnto the Main Menu 11 22 CFG Con Mgmt Map ALARM eeeeeeeeeeeeeee ESC ESC Previous Figure 5 20 Configuration Management Mapping Window E1C Configuring connections to and from E1C interfaces is very similar to configuring other connections see Configuring Interface Connections 1 Select the Connect Mgmt command from the Configure menu 2 To configure the connections move the cursor to highlig
230. han one software image exists in flash one must be deleted before downloading new software The download procedure will take 2 7 approximately 15 to 45 minutes to complete depending on the CPU and operating system being used STEP 3 Execute a Code Swap This will transfer the other flash area into the online flash area Meanwhile the older release software is transferred from the online flash area into the other flash area A true swap occurs A separate section of NVRAM stores the Code Swap State This state is updated at the start of Code Swap after each block is swapped and at the end of the Code Swap If an event occurs during code swap which causes the CPU to stop executing upon reboot the CPU will pick up the Code Swap process from where it left off The Code Swap process cannot be interrupted until it has completed STEP 3B Automatic Nodal Reset Following the Code Swap the online CPU will automatically reboot This causes a toggle to the standby CPU making it the online CPU The formerly online CPU is now the standby The node does not reset The standby CPU has new software The online CPU has old software STEP 4 Download the new software version to the online CPU The new version of software is loaded into the section of flash for other software non executing STEP 5 Execute a Code Swap This will transfer the other flash area into the online flash area Meanwhile the older release soft
231. he STL Interface Module consists of the following e ATM Cell Bus Switching Logic IC ATM Cell Bus Switch along with a RAM IC provides connectivity to the backplane board e 96 Pin DIN connector used to connect onto the ATM Cell Bus e Motorola 68340 microprocessor Battery backed RAM e Capacitor filtering provided for control and noise suppression Unique Functionality Section The STL Interface Module includes the following unique functions Module equipped with one complete independent synchronous channel Connectors RJ 45 female type e High speed AAL1 segmentation and reassembly function A functional block diagram of the STL Interface Module is shown in Figure 3 35 CXUG 3 45 10 6 99 a lr ul INTERFACE DRIVERS amp RECEIVERS ATM CELL BUS WITCH INTERFACE TYPE SWITC DRIVERS amp RECEIVERS FUNCTIONS CPU 68340 FILTERS DIN CONNECTOR Figure 3 35 Structured T1 Legacy Interface Module Functional Block Diagram STL Operation Interface Loopback Any STL interface can be looped back via the loopback option of the diagnostics menu When loopback is enabled the STL configures the interface for remote loopback to connected equipment as well as framer loopback all T1 transmit data is looped back to the receiver STL to T1 Cell Bearing Connections For connections between STL channel groups and a T1 cell bearing interface the total number of T1 channels must not exceed 20 channels This is due to over
232. he connector is fully seated 2 Tighten the two screws in the module front panel securely NOTE Never force the screws when starting them If they become difficult to turn back them off and start over Other Modules 7 4 PRECAUTION Observe electrostatic discharge ESD precautions when handling any Cell Exchange system module If ESD precautions are not taken sensitive components may be permanently damaged To remove the modules 1 Remove any cables from the connectors on the front panel NOTE Observe the following precautions when removing the OC3 0C3C Interface Module a Remove the fiber optic cable connectors individually and cap with protective plastic caps b Stow any removed fiber optic cables in a protected spot where they will not be pulled or bent tighter than a 6 inch radius PRECAUTION Working with fiber optic cables can be hazardous to personnel and if mishandled can cause permanent damage to the cables WARNING THE FIBER OPTIC CONNECTORS MAY EMIT LASER LIGHT THAT CAN INJURE YOUR EYES NEVER LOOK INTO AN OPTICAL FIBER CONNECTOR OR CABLE PRECAUTION Fiber optic cables require special handling They must not be bent to a radius of less than six inches When exposed optical fibers contained within the fiber optic cable are extremely brittle and fragments from the fiber can easily penetrate the skin or eyes Wear protective goggles and clothing when working with the optical fibers 2 Loosen the two capt
233. he screen shown in Figure 4 14 CXUG 4 13 10 6 99 EXECUTE WARNING Pressing F1 ENTER will clear all information out of the database 11 13 DIAG Clear Dbase ALARM ESC ESC Previous Figure 4 14 Initialize Database Window from Diagnostics Menu Save DB This menu allows the user to save the contents of the current database to a new file on the local management station NOTE Save DB and Restore DB functions can only be executed in Hyper Terminal See the section on Windows Hyper Terminal Software for information on setting up a Hyper Terminal connection See the section on Telnet Support for information on remote access to these menus Selecting this menu item brings up the window shown in Figure 4 15 EXECUTE Select Transfer Capture Text enter a NEW filename then press F1 ENTER 11 18 DIAG Save DB ALARM ESC ESC Previous Figure 4 15 Save Database Window from Diagnostics menu From the Hyper Terminal menu select Transfer then Capture Text Hyper Terminal will prompt for the name of the file in which the text will be stored CXUG 4 14 10 6 99 CXUG 10 6 99 NOTE Itis very important to enter a NEW filename each time the database is saved If an old filename is used the capture text operation will append the text to the file instead of overwriting its contents and subsequent database restore operations will fail Once the new filename is entered
234. head required by ATM If more than 20 channels are connected to a T1 cell bearing interface cells will be discarded The result of attempting to connect more than 20 channels is a significant loss of signal quality across all channels Idle Channel Data Insertion For channels configured as idle channels not associated with any group the STL inserts idle data according to the interface configuration settings When the idle channel conditioning is configured as Data Idle the values inserted are e OxT7F binary 01111111 if Idle UAC is selected as the trunk conditioning data code e 0x1A binary 00011010 if MUX OOS is selected as the trunk conditioning data code When the idle channel conditioning is configured as Voice Idle the idle values inserted are e OxFF all ones if Idle 0 Busy 1 is selected for trunk conditioning signaling e 0x00 all zeroes if Busy 1 Idle 0 is selected for trunk conditioning signaling 3 46 CXUG 10 6 99 Trunk Conditioning Logic Trunk conditioning attempts to minimize the impact that link failures can have on connected equipment by inserting data and signaling into each of the affected channels according to the currently configured trunk conditioning parameters Figure 3 36 shows a typical case of trunk conditioning TI gt sie gt STL 1 3 8 SAR eel L N ald of __ t Interfaces 1 2 3 7 Q cell loss detected conditioning
235. header ATM Adaptation Layer The ATM adaptation layer AAL translates between the larger service data units SDUs for example video streams and data packets of upper layer processes and ATM cells Specifically the ATM adaptation layer AAL receives packets from upper level protocols such as AppleTalk Internet Protocols IP and NetWare and breaks them into the 48 byte segments that form the payload field of an ATM cell The primary function of the ATM adaptation layer AAL is to segment user data into ATM cells and to reassemble the ATM cells into user data at the destination end system This layer can provide end to end error control buffering flow control and multiplexing based on the applications requirements The AAL is divided into 4 classes of service as shown in Figure A 3 Timing Relationship Between Required Source and Destination Not Required Connection Mode Connection Oriented Figure A 3 Service Classification for AAL Some examples of different service classifications include Class A Circuit Emulation Video Class B Variable Bit Rate Video and Audio Class C Connection oriented Data Transfer CXUG A 4 10 6 99 Class D Connectionless Data Transfer Quality of Service When an ATM end station connects to the ATM network it is essentially making a contract with the network based on quality of service QoS parameters This contract specifies an envelope that describes the intended traffi
236. ht one of the interfaces 3 Press F2 or ENTER to bring up the connection management map for that interface 4 Usethe Up Down arrow key to move to the Inact field 5 Press F3 to add a new connection or F4 to delete an existing connection Follow the steps described in Configuring Interface Connections to add new connections 6 When done press F1 or move to the EXECUTE button and press ENTER to update the configuration database and return to the main menu or UPDATE and ENTER to update the configuration and remain in this window CXUG 10 6 99 E3C Cell Interface Module E3C Configuring Interfaces 5 22 To configure a new E3C interface follow the steps described in Configuring Physical Interfaces Enter the name the interface type E3C the slot the physical interface A and the status indication Press lt F2 gt to enter the configuration menu Figure 5 21 shows the E3C configuration menu with all fields set to the default values Intf Name Silver Spring Slot 2 Intf A Intf Type Tx Clock Out Recovered Scramble Cells Enable Tx Trail Trace EXECUTE Press ENTER To update the config database and return to the Main Menu 09 52 CFG Int ESC ESC ESC Previous Figure 5 21 Interface Configuration Window E3C To configure this interface position the cursor on the Tx Clock Out field by using the up and down arrow keys The arrow key
237. iable length subnet masks VLSM NOTE HRIM modules with release dates prior to 2 99 will not support the use of a variable length subnet mask This variable Remote Enet IP Mask should be left at the default The BW field is an edit field Any number from 1 to 99 may be entered into this field This field represents the maximum bandwidth allocated for the ATM encapsulated IP channel measured in blocks of 280kbps 10 2 8Mbps dedicated to this channel Once the BW value is entered the HRIM ATM components are optimized with regard to internal buffering and system resources to accommodate the physical throughput conditions of the actual ATM links through which the classical IP data travels For example if a T1 cell bearing interface existed between HRIM site A and HRIM site B you would set the B W parameter for Connection AB to 5 280 Kbps x 5 1 4 Mbps Setting this parameter to a value greater than 5 may oversubscribe the ATM connection and possibly cause dropped packets The channel configuration screen is implemented like the connection map screens in that IP channels can be dynamically added and or removed using the F3 and F4 function keys The maximum number of IP channels that may be added is 32 When done move to the EXECUTE button and press ENTER to update the configuration database and return to the main menu CXUG 5 37 10 6 99 Configuring Connections Connections are configured via the Connection Manage
238. iency for intermittent traffic ATM uses an unchannelized bandwidth approach for traffic transport Like X 25 and Frame Relay ATM defines the interface between the user equipment such as workstations and routers and the network This interface is referred to as the User Network Interface UND The asynchronous in ATM refers to the way in which ATM achieves its unchannelized bandwidth allocation ATM differs from synchronous transfer mode methods where time division multiplexing TDM techniques are employed to pre assign users to time slots ATM time slots are made available on demand with information identifying the source of the transmission contained in the header of each ATM cell Relative to ATM TDM is inefficient because a time slot is wasted when a station has nothing to transmit Also when a station has more information to transmit that can fit into its allotted time slots only part of the information can be sent at that time even though other time slots may be empty With ATM a station can send cells whenever necessary ATM networks allow for strict quality of service guarantees because network resources are allocated on a per connection basis Cell sequence integrity is maintained because routing decisions are made only at connection establishment time ATM Networks CXUG 10 6 99 ATM networks are connection oriented where virtual connections are established between end systems and cells are switched according to connection id
239. information on configuring a network consisting of one or more Cell Exchange nodes refer to the Synchrony Cell Exchange Management Application User s Guide MC17358 Setting the MAC Address of the CPU Each CPU can be uniquely identified by its MAC Address a 12 digit numeric identifier The first 6 digits are the TIMEPLEX CX company ID The next 6 digits are the CPU s serial number located on the CPU board On initialization of the database this value is 009010000001 To change this value go the login screen then remove and re insert the cable from the CPU s serial port type Q Enter MACMAN as the password and press ENTER On the next screen enter the new MAC address use the arrow keys to move to the EXECUTE button and press lt ENTER gt NOTE The MAC address MUST BE unique when operating with LANE since it becomes part of the CX 1500 1540 unique ATM address in an ATM network using LANE If two or more CPUs on different nodes have the same MAC address the first CPU to establish connectivity with the LAN Emulation Server becomes an active LANE client All others with the same MAC address will cause the CPU to constantly reboot Telnet Support 4 20 CX software provides the capability to launch a TELNET session directly to any CX node The TELNET protocol is used to log in to the remote CX and monitor or control the unit as if locally connected TELNET sessions may be established locally or remotely TELNET can
240. ing E E T E 5 47 UNSTRUCTURED DS3 T3 LEGACY INTERFACE MODULE CONFIGURATION UD3L a p ties Pelee ee ie eles t ARORA teo ttt 5 49 Configuring Interfaces D3L zm d e bebe bbb bbb bbb ub 5 49 Configuring 5 50 UNSTRUCTURED LEGACY INTERFACE MODULE CONFIGURATION UE3 L 5 51 Configuring Interfaces WES ssc ee ete eee 5 51 Configuring Connections te o e tien See Sea i teed E ei ect 5 51 BASIC INTERFACE MODULE CONFIGURATION BIM eee 5 53 Configuring Interfaces nennen nennen nennen nnn enne 5 53 Configuring Connections eesseesesssseeeeeeeeeeeee 5 54 4 WIRE ANALOG INTERFACE MODULE CONFIGURATION 4 WIRE EML 5 55 Configuring Interfaces 4 Wire 5 55 Config ring 8 2 e E TEAT E E TORERE o 5 56 MULTICAST FEATURE CONFIGURATION eene eene nnne 5 57 Configuring Interfaces 5 57 Limitations Cell Exchange Multicast Operation Involving Legacy Interfaces 5 59 Troubleshooting 5 oe 6 1 ALARMS AND TRAPS b pedea e a esee epe eene ae eene enne 6 1 Ttaps e e e t
241. ing provided for control and noise suppression Unique Functionality Section Unique Functionality of the Dual Synchronous Cell Interface Module includes 3 30 Module is equipped with two independent channels Connectors are High Density DB 26 female type DTE Drivers and receivers conform to EIA 530 A Cell Delineation Block Device circuit provides Header Error Control HEC checks on the incoming cell synchronous data stream to provide a reset signal to the encryption device CXUG 10 6 99 Jumper Settings The jumper settings listed are factory set defaults No user configuration is required Jumper Pins J1 2 3 J4 1 2 J5 1 2 J8 1 2 J9 1 2 All other pins are open not connected Specifications Port Capacity Two Media Shielded Multi twisted pair cable low capacitance Electrical EIA 530 which provides EIA 422 electrical interface this is a DTE interface connecting to DCE Connector HDB 26 Female Line Format Balanced Data Rates 16 Kbps 20 Mbps in 8 Kbps increments NOTE Maximum data rate is dependent on cable length For exact data rate versus cable length formula see EIA 422 NOTE When operating the DSC at data rates up to 16Mbps any timing option may be used When operating at data rates above 16Mbps timing must be sourced from the DCE device ST Sourcing from the DCE is the most common configuration Diagnostics Facility Loopback Terminal Loopback Alarm Sur
242. ing format is used The data is strictly clear channel non channelized In other words the entire payload is used for data transport Legacy data is placed in AAL1 or CBR type format given a VPI VCI address and transmitted over the ATM network This module is non channelized and is intended to be used in a point to point configuration A front panel view of the UTEL Module is shown in Figure 3 53 Figure 3 53 Unstructured T1 E1 Legacy Interface Module UTEL 3 68 CXUG 10 6 99 Cell Bus Microprocessor Power Section The Cell Bus Microprocessor Power section of the UTEL Interface Module consists of the following e ATM Cell Bus Switching Logic IC ATM Cell Bus Switch along with a RAM IC provides connectivity to the backplane board e 96 Pin DIN connector used to connect onto the ATM Cell Bus e Motorola 68340 microprocessor e Capacitor filtering provided for control and noise suppression Unique Functionality Section The UTEL Interface Module includes the following unique functions e Module equipped with one complete independent synchronous channel e Connectors are two BNC Tx Rx E1 and one RJ 45 E1 or e High speed AAL1 segmentation and reassembly function A functional block diagram of the UEL Interface Module is shown in Figure 3 54 INTERFACE DRIVERS amp RECEIVERS ATM CELL BUS SWITCH INTERFACE TYPE DRIVERS amp RECEIVERS FUNCTIONS CPU 68340 FILTERS LE 2 2 Q 2 a
243. ing up the screen shown in Figure 2 19 CXUG 2 22 10 6 99 New Version Name M1500 V4 0 Versions Currently Loaded in the System M1500 V3 0 UPDATE Enter a name to identify this version of the application code 09 52 CFG Software Ver ESC ESC Previous Figure 2 19 Software Version Selection Screen 2 Enter the name of the new version supplied with the diskette as shown in Figure 2 19 3 Select LOAD and press ENTER Observe that the Main Menu screen is repainted The time of day display will freeze which is an indication that the upload is in progress 4 the terminal emulation toolbar click the Transfer function and select Send Text File on the drop down menu 5 When the dialog box appears fill in the file name installed previously from the floppy diskette lt filename gt hex or bin and click OK or Open 6 This will load the new software version The process takes approximately 35 minutes to and hour and 45 minutes depending on the current software version loaded After the upload is completed the Main Menu is displayed again 7 Select Software Ver and observe that the new version is displayed on the screen 8 If the new version is to be used move the cursor to select the new version 9 Press the lt F2 gt function key After a short delay the new version will load into the CPU and subsequently to all installed interface
244. ion requires e Fore ATM Network Interface Card NIC 200E OC3SC module on the CX 1500 CX 1540 CX 1580 device or an OC3 interface on the ATMARP Server e A multimode fiber optic cable to connect the NIC card to the OC3 module You must e Install the FORE ATM NIC card on the network management workstation e Install and configure the driver software on the network management workstation e Connect the NIC card to an OC3 interface using a multimode fiber optic cable MX17358 1 4 30 00 23 of 29 Included with the NIC card is a CD ROM ForeRunner 200E ATM Network Adapters for UNIX that includes ForeThought 4 1 For information on installing the NIC card and installing and configuring the corresponding software see the ForeRunner SBA 200E ATM SBus Adapter User s Manual included on the CD ROM Connecting the Workstation Using Classical IP IP management support is provided by incorporating Classical IP into the Cell Exchange CX This allows any standard SNMP manager to manage the CX The SNMP platform connects via 10BaseT Ethernet to the HRIM module of the CX root node To take advantage of the Cell Exchange GUI SNMP manager connections must be established as described below e Static route between HRIM and the CPU at the root node Figure 5 60 e Remote node CPUs to the HRIM in the CX root node Figure 5 61 Workstation NOTE Static routes dashed lines are 2 0 0 2 HRIM a require
245. itsburg Cell Germantown OC3c Cell Frederick Dual Sync Cell Gaithersburg Dual Sync Leg Rockville High Speed Leg Urbana DS3 Hyattsburg STL Middletown SEL Bethesda Hub Router Darnestown LSAL Annapolis HSSI gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt SCROLL UP LINE SCROLL DOWN LINE EXECUTE UPDATE SCROLL UP PAGE SCROLL DOWN PAGE Press ENTER To update the config database and return to the Main Menu 09 52 CFG Interface ALARM roeren ESC ESC Previous Figure 5 4 Interface Menu A tumbler field contains three or more possible selections A toggle field is normally an on off field providing a choice between two alternative selections In both kinds of fields the lt SPACE gt bar allows movement through the available choices For initial configuration this screen will be blank each interface will need to be entered See Figure 5 5 Intf Name Intf Type Slot Physical Intf Inact Walkersville SCROLL UP LINE SCROLL DOWN LINE EXECUTE SCROLL UP PAGE POERA TES SCROLL DOWN PAGE F1 Execute F2 Goto Configure F3 Add Interface F4 Delete Interface Enter an alphanumeric string with a max of 14 characters 09 52 CFG Interface ALARM ESC ESC Previous Figure 5 5 Entering Interface Information NOTE For all menus selecting the UPDATE button and pressing lt ENTER gt will updat
246. ity Columbia D1 3 Columbia Three High SCROLL UP LINE SCROLL DOWN LINE SCROLL UP PAGE SCROLL DOWN PAGE F1 Execute Add Connection F4 Delete Connection 10 51 CFG Con Mgmt Map ALARM ESC ESC Previous Figure 5 58 Connection Management Mapping Window SEL to SEL Configuring connections to and from SEL interfaces is very similar to configuring other connections see Configuring Interface Connections 1 Select the Connect Mgmt command from the Configure menu 2 configure the connections move the cursor to highlight one of the interfaces 3 Press F2 or lt ENTER gt to bring up the connection management map for that interface MX17358 1 4 30 00 15 of 29 4 Use the Up Down arrow key to move to the Inact field Press lt F3 gt to add a new connection or lt F4 gt to delete an existing connection Follow the steps described in Configuring Interface Connections to add new connections 6 When done press lt F1 gt or move to the EXECUTE button and press lt ENTER gt to update the configuration database and return to the main menu or UPDATE and ENTER to update the configuration and remain in this window Network Management Cell Exchange Networks To manage Synchrony Cell Exchange devices the devices must be configured for either LANE or Classical IP management For additional information refer to Configuring Cell Exchanges Device
247. ive screws securing the module to the chassis 3 Remove the module by pulling it straight out Be careful not to twist or bend the module CXUG 10 6 99 CXUG 10 6 99 To replace the module 1 Slide the replacement module straight back into the chassis aligning the DIN connector with the backplane slot Make sure the connector is fully seated 2 Tighten the two screws in the module front panel securely NOTE Never force the screws when starting them If they become difficult to turn back them off and start over 3 Reattach any cables to the front panel connectors 7 5 Appendix A Asynchronous Transfer Mode Overview Asynchronous Transfer Mode ATM technology was developed for the high speed transfer of voice video and data through private networks and across public networks ATM technology provides a way of linking a wide range of devices from telephones to computers using one seamless network It removes the distinction between local area and wide area networks integrating them into one network ATM can integrate all traffic types eliminating parallel networks supporting different applications like voice and data and multiple links to the same location It supports both bursty data and delay sensitive traffic ATM is a cell switching and multiplexing technology that combines the benefits of circuit switching constant transmission delay and guaranteed capacity with those of packet switching flexibility and effic
248. iver Specifications Optical Transmitter Specifications Short reach multimode LED mn wax Daemon m Extinction Ratio emin dB 3 26 CXUG 10 6 99 Optical Receiver Specifications Short reach multimode LED Les ums Optical Transmitter Specifications Intermediate reach single mode MLM laser mn wax unns m m speoar serowa 7 wea Taner Power ey 35 aio eniy _ a 4 Optical Receiver Specifications Intermediate reach single mode MLM laser ums Optical Transmitter Specifications Long reach single mode MLM laser mn wee une as Soe caama a om average Taner 8 s sm aon _ wo 4 Optical Receiver Specifications Long reach single mode MLM laser Les ums CXUG 10 6 99 3 27 Laser Radiation Hazards The OC3C interface module with the single mode MLM laser emits a laser beam onto a fiber optic connection This is a Class 1 laser product complying with IEC 825 1 and FDA 21 CFR 1040 10 1040 11 Observe the warning and precaution listed below WARNING THE FIBER OPTIC CONNECTORS MAY EMIT LASER LI
249. l Networks Bearing Non Cel Bearing Figure 1 2 Cell Exchange System Interfaces Table 1 1 shows the modules that are currently available for use with the Cell Exchange system Table 1 1 Cell Exchange System Modules Pos Common System Modules CPU Module Station Clock Module Power Supply Module Cell Bearing Interface Modules T1 Cell Interface Module T1C 1 544 Mbps 155 Mbps Cell Interface Module OC3C 155 Mbps 2 1 1 Dual Synchronous Cell Interface 2 Module DSC 1 2 1 OC3 Cell Interface Module OC3 DS3 Cell Interface Module DS3 45 Mbps E1 Cell Interface Module E1C 2 048 Mbps Cell Interface Module E3C 34 368 Mbps CXUG 1 3 10 6 99 Table 1 1 Cell Exchange System Modules Cont d Type Ports Rate Non Cell Bearing Interface Modules Structured T1 Legacy Interface 1 544 Mbps Module STL Dual Synchronous Legacy Interface 16 Kbps 2 048 Mbps Module DSL High Speed Synchronous Legacy Interface Module HSL High Speed Serial Interface Module HSSL Hub Router Interface Module HRIM Low Speed Asynchronous Legacy 75 bps 38 4 Kbps Interface Module LSAL Unstructured T1 E1 Legacy 1 1 544 Mbps Interface Module UTEL Mbps E1 Unstructured DS3 T3 Legacy 1 44 736 Mbps Interface Module UD3L Unstructured Legacy Interface 1 34 368 Mbps Module UE3L Basic Interface Module BIM Application Specific Application Specific 4 Wi
250. l Interface Module DSC The Dual Synchronous Cell Interface Module is a compact subassembly designed to be used as a major system building block in the Cell Exchange system The Dual Synchronous Cell Interface Module provides the necessary hardware to terminate two Synchronous interfaces recover clock access the ATM cells within the payload data stream and provide these cells to the Cell Exchange switching fabric In the transmit direction the process is reversed ATM cells are taken off the switching fabric and mapped into the payload data stream which is then properly formatted and clocked out on the synchronous facility Figure 3 20 shows a functional block diagram of the Dual Synchronous Cell Interface Module CXUG 3 29 10 6 99 CELL FILTERS DELINEATION INTERFACE BLOCK DRIVERS amp RECEIVERS DEVICE CELL INTERFACE MEMORY g ATM CELL ATM CELL BUS SWITCH DRIVERS amp RECEIVERS DELINEATION B S BLOCK DEVICE CPU 80C31 SWITCH DIN CONNECTOR S LI S m Figure 3 20 Dual Synchronous Cell Interface Module Functional Block Diagram Cell Bus Microprocessor Power Section The Cell Bus Microprocessor Power section of the DSC module consists of the following ATM Cell Bus Switching Logic IC ATM Cell Bus Switch along with a RAM IC provides connectivity to the backplane board 96 Pin DIN connector used to connect onto the ATM Cell Bus Intel 80C31 microprocessor Capacitor filter
251. l groups In this example the name associated with the connection is German PBX200 Name Hyattsburg Slot 14 Inf A Type Structured T1 Interface Name VPI VCI Chan Connection Name Priority Germantown 2 12 German PBX200 High SCROLL UP LINE SCROLL DOWN LINE SCROLL UP PAGE SCROLL DOWN PAGE F1 Execute F3 Add Connection F4 Delete Connection 13 47 CFG Con Mgmt Map ALARM ESC ESC Previous Figure 5 24 Connection Management Mapping Window STL to Cell Bearing STL to STL Connections An STL to STL connection configuration is shown in Figure 5 25 Here a connection is configured between channel group D1 on one STL card and channel group D5 on another Note that both of the channel groups must contain the same number of but not necessarily the same channels 5 26 CXUG 10 6 99 CXUG 10 6 99 Name Hyatsburg Slot 14 Inf A Type SruduredT1 Interfae Name VPI VOI Chan Connection Name Priority Walkersville D5 3 Walker XC3 High SCROLL UP LINE SCROLL DOWN LINE SCROLL UPPAGE SCROLL DOWN PAGE F1 Exeaite F3 Add Connection F4 Delete Conrection 15 11 CFG Con Mgmt Map ALARM JERI III IIIA ESC ESC Previous Figure 5 25 Connection Management Mapping Window STL to STL 5 27 Dual Synchronous Legacy Interface Module DSL Configuring Interfaces To configure a new interface follow the steps described in Configuring Physical Inter
252. lS wenn an an aah eames 3 26 11470 i Sis 3 28 Pinouts eo eet eret eU RI EVE EE 3 28 DUAL SYNCHRONOUS CELL INTERFACE MODULE DSC 3 29 COVED VIEW seus ede vases E suesetaaebathtandoapntnabossutinaviabateedsbstedetesstesstatetodetene 3 29 Jumper Sete ES 3 31 ess scr sees M 3 31 dee latet tele oda beetle ete leet b obe Eh 3 32 serere Herten rtt re re uote re uou ri e e SER TUN Tau 3 32 DS3 CELL INTERFACE 53 3 33 eee eee eee ree eo d n A A A a re bete PE ETE 3 33 CXUG 10 6 99 CXUG 10 6 99 Specifications tee ee eere ir ERE EE P e eb Erbe D Se EE 3 35 3 35 BERRY PP PREPPY FAR PRPS rriv eee ped 3 35 El CELL INTERFACE 7777 3 36 COV EL VIE W535 EORR aN SOULS ESN RU GLAU Pv PETRA 3 36 JUMPER Setting Sro SG RD EO DERI ERES 3 38 SpecitiCatloniss eta ata e epe 3 38 NTI Cat OESL 5 o oodd rose ees ese re etre o 3 38 Rn meat nate 3 39 CELL INTERFACE 3 40 ERNEUT TP uL 3 40 Specifications NE 3 41 IndICatoEs or EE AAA A 3 42 AUTO E
253. le the older release software is transferred from the online flash area into the other flash area A true swap occurs A separate section of NVRAM stores the Code Swap State This state is updated at the start of Code Swap after each block is swapped and at the end of the Code Swap If an event occurs during code swap which causes the CPU to stop executing upon reboot the CPU will pick up the Code Swap process from where it left off The Code Swap process cannot be interrupted until it has completed STEP 4 Automatic Nodal Reset Following the Code Swap the CPU will automatically reboot This will bring the CPU online executing the new software and bring all other modules online executing the new software Updated configuration databases will be sent to all modules Redundant CPU Scenario CXUG 10 6 99 This section describes how software upgrade occurs for a pair of redundant CPUs in the CX node At the start the primary CPU is online and the other is in standby STEP 1 Logon to the Craft Station using the Administrator password The NVRAM is pulled from the online CPU and stored as a file on the Craft Station PC in case the user needs to revert to an earlier version of software STEP 2 Download the new software version to the online CPU The new version of software is loaded into the section of flash for other software non executing NOTE Only two images may be accommodated in flash at one time If more t
254. lic Network is used in accordance with suitable user installation and operating instructions supplied with the equipment Principles of Product Attachment Approval Requirements CXUG 10 6 99 The Public Network Attachment Approval of this equipment shall be invalidated in the event of the connection of any apparatus or cabling which does not comply with the following 1 Digital attachments to PTO Services shall be equipment approved for the purpose in which they are being used Attachments shall not materially affect the electrical performance characteristics of the interface to the PTO service All cables and wiring shall be compliant with appropriate codes of practice and relevant standards Apparatus approved for connection to PTO services must be connected to the Network Termination Point NTP using the approved listed cable or an alternate cable meeting the electrical characteristics of the Timeplex specified cable National requirements may restrict the carrying or interfacing of speech derived from or destined for the PSTN EUR 3 Safety Information and Warnings This equipment is only approved for use when operated in the following environment Temperature Range 0 to 45 C Humidity To 95 noncondensing e Atmospheric Pressure 13 000 feet 4000 meters Power Input Range 90 to 240Va c 50 60 Hz WARNING THIS EQUIPMENT HAS BEEN CERTIFIED COMPLIANT WARNING WARNING WITH EN55022 CLASS A ELECTROM
255. limePlex Group Synchrony Cell Exchange User s Guide MC17358 October 1999 TimePlex Group Products Americas 1619 North Harrison Parkway Sunrise Florida 33323 2802 U S A Telephone 800 333 4143 or 954 846 1601 Fax 954 846 3935 Europe Middle East Africa Landata House Station Road Hook Hampshire RG27 9JF England Telephone 44 0 1256 763911 Fax 44 0 1256 764717 Asia Pacific c o 1619 North Harrison Parkway Sunrise Florida 33323 2802 U S A Telephone 800 333 4143 or 954 846 1601 Fax 954 846 3935 3 00 NO WARRANTIES ARE EXTENDED BY THIS DOCUMENT The technical information in this document is proprietary to Timeplex Inc and the recipient has a personal non exclusive and non transferable license to use this information solely with the use of Timeplex products The only product warranties made by Timeplex Inc if any are set forth in the agreed terms and conditions for purchase of a Timeplex product Timeplex Inc disclaims liability for any and all damages that may result from publication or use of this document and or its contents except for infringement of third party copyright or misappropriation of third party trade secrets No part of this document may be reproduced in any manner without the prior written consent of Timeplex Inc U S GOVERNMENT RESTRICTED AND LIMITED RIGHTS All software and related software documentation supplied to the United States Government are provided wi
256. ling respectively Figure 3 70 SEL Connection with Mapped Payload to One VPI VCI Pair 4or8 El Interfaces SEL SAR VPI VCI gt sees gt El gt lt M _ gt Network y maa VPI VCI Each 1 payload timeslot mapped to different VPI VCI pairs non payload timeslots 1 and 16 carry framing and signaling respectively Figure 3 71 SEL Connection with Mapped Payloads to Different VPI VCI Pairs MX17358 1 6 of 29 4 30 00 For SEL to SEL connections the actual channel numbers of each group may differ at each end as long as each group contains the same number of channels The ordering of channels passed from the source channel group to the destination channel group is always preserved In other words the first channel of the destination receives the data from the first channel of the source the second channel of the destination receives the data from the second channel of the source and so on Cell Bus Microprocessor Power Section The Cell Bus Microprocessor Power section of the SEL Interface Module consists of the following e ATM Cell Bus Switching Logic IC ATM Cell Bus Switch along with a RAM IC provides connectivity to the backplane board e 96 Pin DIN connector used to connect onto the ATM Cell Bus e Motorola 68340 microprocessor e Capacitor filtering provided for control and noise suppression Unique Functionality Section The
257. ll appear This screen contains information that is tailored to the interface Middletown Slot 7 Intf A Type Structured E1 Legacy Framing Coding Traffic Type TC State TC Data Code TC Signaling Maj Alm Action CGA Status AIM Status BER Threshold ESF 0 Card Status Up Port Status Up Loopback No SEL gt ATM Cells HEC Error Cells Misrouted Cells Lost CLP Cells Lost Cell Seconds Last Statistics Reset Hour 13 00 REFRESH CELL STATS 16 25 View Intf SEL FOI RK ESC ESC Previous Figure 4 61 Specific Interface Window SEL To view module activity for the past 8 hours select the lt CELL STATS gt button and press lt ENTER gt This will bring up the screen shown in Figure 4 62 Name Middletown Slot 7 Intf A Type Structured E1 Legacy Ch Conn TX Rx N A N A N A Ch Conn 4 4 7 10 13 16 19 22 25 28 31 REFRESH Ch Conn Rx CLEAR 16 28 View Int SEL CELL doce eek ESC ESC Previous Figure 4 62 Interface Statistics Window SEL For each configured channel a connection identifier and the number of cells transmitted and received is displayed under the corresponding headings MX17358 1 11 of 29 Chapter 5 Configuration 1 Page 5 28 change the Data Rate bullet to read Data Rate edit field DSL 8 Kbps 2 048 Mbps in 8 Kbps increme
258. llects statistics on module performance 3 36 CXUG 10 6 99 Cell Bus Microprocessor Power Section The Cell Bus Microprocessor Power section of the EIC Module consists of the following e ATM Cell Bus Switching Logic IC ATM Cell Bus Switch along with a RAM IC provides connectivity to the backplane board e 96 Pin DIN connector used to connect onto the ATM Cell Bus e Intel 80C31 microprocessor e Capacitor filtering provided for control and noise suppression Unique Functionality Section The E1 Cell Interface Module includes the following unique functions e Module equipped with two complete E1 channels e Connectors are RJ 45 type A functional block diagram of the E1 Cell Interface Module is shown in Figure 3 26 INTERFACE DRIVERS amp RECEIVERS ATM CELL BUS INTERFACE TYPE SWITCH DRIVERS amp RECEIVERS FUNCTIONS CPU 68340 FILTERS DIN CONNECTOR Figure 3 26 E1 Cell Interface Module Functional Block Diagram CXUG 3 37 10 6 99 Jumper Settings The jumper settings listed are factory set defaults No user configuration is required Jumper Pins J2 2 3 Specifications Port Capacity Media Connector Line Build Out Framing Port Speed Timing Diagnostics Power Applicable Standards Indicators Two Shielded Twisted RJ 45 Female 75 Norm 120 Norm 75 P R 120 P R 75 HRL1 75 HRL2 and 120 HRL CAS CRC4 or CAS 2 048 Mbps Recovered Internal Re
259. lls Discard Cell Secs BPV Errored Seconds Out of Sync Events Last Statistics Out of Seq Cells Reset Hour 23 00 Invalid Cells Corrected Cells Buffer Events REFRESH HISTORY 09 47 View Intf UEL ALARM ESC ESC Previous Figure 4 55 Specific Interface Window UEL Entries in this window are the same as the UTL Selecting the lt HISTORY gt button provides statistics for this module similar to those shown in Figure 4 40 CXUG 4 53 10 6 99 Unstructured DS3 T3 Legacy Interface Module UD3L To view the statistics for the Unstructured DS3 T3 Legacy Interface Module UD3L select Module Status from the View menu More information can be obtained for a particular module by highlighting the module and pressing lt F2 gt This will bring up the logical interface screen for this module similar to Figure 4 38 Additional information for each logical interface can be obtained by highlighting the interface and pressing lt F2 gt which will bring up the screen shown in Figure 4 56 Name Dunkirk Slot 9 Intf A Unstructure T3 Card Status Up UD3L gt ATM Cells 0 Interface Status Up Loopback No UD3L lt ATM Cells Discarded Cells Discard Cell Secs BPV Errored Seconds 0 Out of Sync Events Out of Seq Cells Invalid Cells Corrected Cells Last Statistics Reset Hour 23 00 Buffer Events REFRES
260. lls 0 Interface Status Up Loopback No UTL lt ATM Cells Discarded Cells Discard Cell Secs BPV Errored Seconds Out of Sync Events Out of Seq Cells Invalid Cells Corrected Cells Buffer Events Last Statistics Reset Hour 13 00 REFRESH HISTORY 16 25 View Intf UTL ALARM PEELE ESC ESC Previous Figure 4 54 Specific Interface Window UTL BPV Errored Seconds Number of seconds when a Bi Polar Violation occurred The remaining entries are the same as previously described Selecting the lt HISTORY gt button provides statistics for this module similar to those shown in Figure 4 40 CXUG 4 52 10 6 99 Unstructured E1 Legacy Interface Module UEL To view the statistics for the Unstructured E1 Legacy Interface Module UEL select Module Status from the View menu More information can be obtained for a particular module by highlighting the module and pressing lt F2 gt This will bring up the logical interface screen for this module similar to Figure 4 38 Additional information for each logical interface can be obtained by highlighting the interface and pressing lt F2 gt which will bring up the screen shown in Figure 4 55 This screen contains information that is tailored to the interface Name Middletown 7 Intf A Type Unstructured E1 Leg Card Status UEL gt ATM Cells Interface Status Up Loopback No UEL lt ATM Cells Discarded Ce
261. lly enclosed it may also be used in a desktop environment Figure 1 3 shows a front panel view of the CX 1500 system with redundant Power Supply Modules Figure 1 3 CX 1500 Cell Exchange System Chassis Specifications Size 5 25 inches high 19 inches wide 13 inches deep Input Power 90 to 230 VAC 47 to 63 Hz 2 0 amps 38 to 60 VDC 5 0 amps The power supply slots are located in the left most part of the chassis The remaining slots may be populated with any type module The CPU Module must be installed in slot 8 for non redundant operation and in slots 7 and 8 for redundant operation and the remaining slots should be populated from the center outward PRECAUTION The CPU must not be installed in slot 1 of any Cell Exchange Slot 1 is an initialization slot Installing the CPU in this slot will erase initialize the database Except for the Power Supply module all Cell Exchange modules are composed of two sections the ATM Cell Bus control section containing the Microprocessor and memory and the module functionality section which contains the components needed to perform the module s unique function All interface modules exclusive of the CPU Module have an identical ATM Cell Bus Microprocessor and memory sections For additional information on individual modules see Chapter 3 Modules CX 1540 The CX 1540 is also based on a passive backplane design which allows all modules to be inserted f
262. m log will only store up to 54 alarms 3 pages If the alarm log is full and a new alarm is detected the system will automatically delete the oldest alarm and record the newest General Troubleshooting Procedures If the Cell Exchange system that is not working properly is local connect a VT100 terminal to the CPU module and enter the local management system See Chapter 4 If the Cell Exchange is remote attempt to discover where the problem is by checking the communication paths 1 Verify the path by building out from the local node to the node that is not responding 2 Ping from the local node to the first node in the net Node CX 1 in Figure 6 2 CXUG 10 6 99 6 5 Local Management Station Figure 6 2 Path Connectivity Check Ping the next node CX 2 etc in succession until the problem is isolated If the ping was successful open a Telnet session and verify cell interface to failed node If there are no errors contact the service provider for the communications link or network If errors are noted attempt to determine the problem by looking at alarms and module status If the interface is out of service contact the service provider Module Indications AC Power Supply Module 6 6 If the red FAIL LED illuminates on a Power Supply module there is a possibility the module has failed Here are a few quick checks to verify the status of the module 1 If there is only one
263. me VPI VCI combinations of legacy card ports that require differing VPIs or VCIs are prohibited from being present in the same multicast group For example a group containing ports A and B from a single DSL card would not be permitted Limitations on Cell bearing Interfaces Participating in Multiple Multicasts with each Multicast Containing a Legacy Port Again since all members of the multicast will receive the same VPI VCI two different multicasts will require the use of the same VPI VCI if each multicast group contains legacy ports that require the use of the same VPI VCI This precludes having both multicasts appear on the same cell CXUG 5 59 10 6 99 bearing interface For example consider two multicasts A and B Multicast A includes an LSAL port A as a group member Multicast B includes a different LSAL port A on a different LSAL card as a member Since both of these legacy ports force the use of VPI 1 VCI 32 it would not be permitted to include a particular cell bearing port in both multicast groups A and B Since both have the same VPI and VCI having them both present on the same cell bearing interface would effectively combine the two cell streams into a single composite stream of meaningless data NOTE rules for determining the VPI and VCI used on STL channel groups are complex requiring calculations that involve both the port interface number and the number representing the first channel in the channel group As s
264. ment menus Figures 5 35 and 5 36 show the configuration maps for HRIM interfaces Name New York 6 Intf A Type DS3 VPI VCI i Interface Name VPI VCI Chan Connection Name Priority 0 91 gt ds3 2 Dallas Low 0 92 ds3 7 wdc Washington Low SCROLL UP LINE SCROLL DOWN LINE SCROLL UP PAGE SCROLL DOWN PAGE Press ENTER to update the config database andreturnto the Main Menu 19 44 CFG Con Mgmt Map ALARM fee ESC ESC Previous Figure 5 35 Connection Management Mapping Window Cell based Source Interface Name Dallas 9 Intf A Type Hub Router Interface Name VPI VCI Chan Connection Name Priority ds3 12 0 91 New York High ds3 7 0 93 Washington Low SCROLL UP LINE SCROLL DOWN LINE EXECUTE UPDATE SCROLL DOWN PAGE SCROLL UP PAGE F1 Execute F3 Add Connection F4 Delete Connection 13 47 CFG Con Mgmt Map ALARM eee ESC ESC Previous Figure 5 36 Connection Management Mapping Window HRIM Source Interface Configuring connections to and from HRIM interfaces is very similar to configuring other connections see Configuring Interface Connections 1 Select the Connect Mgmt command from the Configure menu 2 configure the connections move the cursor to highlight one of the interfaces 5 38 CXUG 10 6 99 3 Press F2 or ENTER to bring up the connection management map for that interface 4 Usethe Up
265. move deactivate SNMP User is trying to delete a logical interface that is being used for connections SNMP connections User must first change the interface used for SNMP before deleting this interface Can t change card type Do To change the card type of an existing interface the user REMOVE ADD should delete the old interface F4 and add the new interface F3 Empty interface name slot slot gt User did not fill in the interface name field for a logical interface Duplicate interface name slot lt slot gt Duplicate interface names exist Duplicate definition slot lt slot gt User has entered more than one logical interface for the same slot For example user may have tried to define one module type for port A and a different module type for port B Exceeded max interfaces slot lt slot gt User has defined more logical interfaces than are allowed for the type of interface module For example three logical interface for a Dual Sync Cell Module CXUG 10 6 99 6 3 Table 6 1 Alarm Messages Cont d Channel bandwidth over limit User has defined aggregate bandwidth that exceeds the bandwidth limit for HRIM configuration Can t modify group in use chan For STL or SEL configuration lt channel gt READ COMMUNITY string lt 5 chars Community string must be at least five characters WRITE COMMUNITY string lt 5 chars Community string must be at least five characters TRAP COMMUNITY string lt 5 char
266. move the cursor to highlight one of the interfaces 3 Press F2 or ENTER to bring up the connection management map for that interface 4 Usethe Up Down arrow key to move to the Inact field 5 Press F3 to add a new connection or F4 to delete an existing connection Follow the steps described in Configuring Interface Connections to add new connections 6 When done press F1 or move to the EXECUTE button and press ENTER to update the configuration database and return to the main menu or UPDATE and ENTER to update the configuration and remain in this window 5 16 CXUG 10 6 99 CXUG 10 6 99 A Queue Mode selection on the Dual Sync Cell card allows the normal Split Queue mode of operation to be changed to Single Queue mode Split Queue operation permits prioritization of cell traffic into High Medium and Low priorities settable on the Connection Map screens The lengths of the queues in split queue mode are as follows High priority 57 cells Medium priority 32 cells Low priority 32 cells In single queue mode all cells pass through a single 123 cell queue When operating in this mode connection prioritization is disabled In most applications the default split queue operation is the preferred mode since this supports the prioritized queues There are however certain applications where the 57 cell High priority queue is not large enough to handle traffic involving large bursts of cells In these appli
267. must be sent to the manufacturer with charges prepaid CXUG 10 6 99 Contents 917 0 ex 1 1 THE 1500 FAMILY OF CELL EXCHANGE SYSTEMS eene 1 1 re RUE 1 2 EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION tese se nnb ede nth etes ehh 1 4 CX 1300 ete tome eee e AEE AEC eet tees ARAB OBO BAR etes 1 4 C X 1540 a ee et at a dete det a ete eet feda 1 5 Cin ee 1 6 Power Distribution hate ee ee ee ee 1 7 Indicators ette RR A Ak Ee Rs 1 7 CPU Modules 5 2 f ce Rune De E EEE depo sega Pe even 1 7 Power Supply Module 4 5 5 2 0 nnt BARA HAR A A teks 1 9 Staton Clock Modules eeraa N EE a te o entente node ce qu d 1 9 Interface Modules o leotele ela Ga bh heli ibe hol ada ef deae ead 1 9 guy coeno 1 10 System Timing i Doe doe tr Eoo tn bet aet tek eden ct votes 1 10 Data Bus Timing de a enne 1 10 Channel Port Timing ande nae edere reas tres tere eg veer cer eee e Erden 1 10 External limine esae ee etude 1 12 SYSTEM COOLING ERES 1 16 PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS esses nennen 1 17 COMPATIBILITY REQUIREMENTS cccessccesscecesseecssseeeeneecesaeecesaeeeseecesaeesetaeeeseeeeeas 1 19 DENK Panny
268. n AC version or de energize power feed cable s if the chassis is a DC version Unplug the power cord s from the power source receptacle and rear panel connector for AC version or disconnect DC power feed cable s if DC version Remove the grounding strap from the grounding lug on the rear panel backplane Remove the screws attaching the chassis to the equipment rack Slide the chassis out of the rack To replace the chassis 1 2 Slide the new chassis into the rack Replace the screws attaching the chassis to the equipment rack 7 1 Attach the grounding strap to the grounding lug on the rear panel 4 Plug the power cord s into the rear panel connector and power source receptacle if AC version or if DC version attach DC power feed cable s 5 Turn the power switch es to the ON I position for AC version or energize power feed cable s if DC version PRECAUTION Secure the power cable to the connector on the rear panel before connecting the cable to the power source Failure to comply with this procedure may result in electrical shock Removing and Replacing Modules All modules in the Cell Exchange system may be removed and replaced without removing electrical power from the chassis hot swap Figure 7 1 represents the removal of a Power Supply Module but the removal process for all Cell Exchange system modules is similar Figure 7 1 Removal of a Cell Exchange System Module Power Supply Model CX
269. n Menu screen is repainted The time of day display will freeze which is an indication that the upload is in progress 7 Prompts will appear indicating first that the host is erasing FLASH memory and then that it is ready to accept software 8 When the host is ready to accept software return to the window where CPUROM HEX is in the current path and start an FTP session Froma DOS command prompt enter ftp IPAddress IP address of the node being upgraded e From an HP UX command prompt enter ftp B 1 IPAddress This switch forces a single outstanding block of data 9 When prompted to log in enter the level 3 password as the user name default admin and press ENTER when prompted for a password 10 Enter the command put CPUROM HEX NOTES UNIX is case sensitive If you are performing this operation from HP UX workstation the filename you use in the put command must CXUG 10 6 99 match the case of the file name you created from the command prompt During the download the OPNL light on the CPU will randomly light and extinguish The Telnet session will timeout after 300 seconds 5 minutes A direct connection through the craft interface will not terminate the FTP session On a direct connection the clock will continue running unlike an upload from the craft interface 11 Once the load operation is complete quit the FTP session quit The completion of the load operation interrupts the current telne
270. n operational code begins running after the boot process is complete Blinks during operational code download Illuminated whenever the STL card is working properly and at least one T1 interface has been configured LED One A D 4 port Green STL has detected T1 frame synchronization on a per I F A H 8 port configured interface Extinguishes if channel dead or loss of frame LOF detected 3 49 Pinouts All of the RJ 45 connectors on the STL 4 and 8 have the following pin outs Pins 1 and 2 are Transmit out to the terminal equipment PBX in most cases Pins 4 and 5 are Receive in from the terminal equipment PBX in most cases Pinouts for the RJ 45 connector are shown in Figure 3 38 E 1 Tx to terminal equipment gt Rx from terminal equipment 8 9Sv Cl Figure 3 38 STL RJ 45 Pinouts 3 50 CXUG 10 6 99 Dual Synchronous Legacy Interface Module DSL Overview The Dual Synchronous Legacy Interface Module DSL is the gateway for synchronous non ATM traffic into the ATM network The DSL module provides an EIA RS 530 interface converts legacy traffic into ATM cells and establishes circuit emulation over the ATM network in AAL1 unstructured mode The DSL module supports data rates from 8 Kbps to 2 048 Mbps in 8 Kbps increments Adaptive Clock Recovery timing allows the module to be highly tolerant of network timing ambiguities A front panel view of
271. n synchronization with cells on the bus side DS3 AIS Presence or absence of an Alarm Indication Signal at the interface DS3 RAI Presence or absence of a Remote Alarm Indication from the far end equipment PLCP LOF Presence or absence of a PLCP frame PLCP RAI Presence or absence of an RAI from the far end equipment Tx Format User selectable at the configuration screen for transmit framing The remaining entries are the same as previously defined Selecting the HISTORY button provides statistics for this module similar to those shown in Figure 4 40 4 41 E1 Cell Interface Module E1C To view the statistics for the E1 Cell Interface Module select Module Status from the View menu More information can be obtained for a particular module by highlighting the module and pressing F2 This will bring up the logical interface screen for this module similar to Figure 4 38 Additional information for each logical interface can be obtained by highlighting the interface and pressing F2 which will bring up the screen shown in Figure 4 45 This screen contains information that is tailored to the interface Intf Name Crisfield Slot 5 Intf A Intf Type E1 Cell Card Status Interface Status Loss of Cell Sync Loopback 96 Err Sec thres Errored Secs Up No No 100 100 E1C gt ATM Cells HEC Error Cells Misrouted Cells E1C lt ATM Cells Discarded Cells Discard Cell Secs Last S
272. n the CPU module are as shown in Figure 3 3 and the accompanying table The mating cable should use a Female DB 9 connector Figure 3 3 DB 9M Connector CXUG 3 7 10 6 99 3 8 46 CPU Module B From CPU Module CXUG 10 6 99 AC Power Supply Module CX 1500 Chassis In the CX 1500 chassis the power supply slots are located in the left most part of the chassis A single power supply module may be installed in either slot The front panel of the AC power supply module for the CX 1500 is shown in Figure 3 4 O POWER O FAIL TimePlex Synchrony Cell Exchange AC POWER SUPPLY Figure 3 4 AC Power Supply Module CX 1500 One or two power supply modules may be installed One Power Supply Module will handle the full power load required for the number of interface modules placed in the chassis although a second module may be installed for enhanced reliability The Power Supply Modules feature a solid state switcher design If two modules are installed the modules are coupled to supply redundant power to the bus The Power Supply Modules are designed to allow removal and replacement into a working unit without affecting active operational traffic hot swap See Chapter 7 for installation removal precautions Each Power Supply Module has its own AC power connector and cord PRECAUTION AC and DC Power Supply Modules are physically interchangeable Care must be taken to ensure the correct one is in
273. nagement This menu is described in the section entitled Configuring Interface Connections Multicast This menu is described in the section entitled Multicast Feature Interface This menu is described in the section entitled Configuring Physical Interfaces Date Time The Date Time menu provides a means for setting or modifying the system parameters for date and time When selected the screen shown in Figure 4 6 will be displayed Year Month Day Hour Minute Second EXECUTE Enter the Year 07 52 CFG Date Time ALARM FOREX OUR ESC ESC Previous Figure 4 6 Date Time Window from Configure Menu Location Name This menu is described in the section entitled Setting Location Name Admin Ports This menu item is not yet implemented System Timing This menu is described in the section entitled Setting System Timing System Reset The System Reset menu provides a means to reboot the Cell Exchange system Selecting this menu item will bring up the window shown in Figure 4 7 CXUG 4 8 10 6 99 Reboot the system 9 32 cre System Reset ALARM donee ESC ESC Previous Figure 4 7 System Reset Window from Configure Menu Passwords This menu is described in the section entitled Changing Passwords Software Ver This menu is described in the section entitled Software Versions SNMP This menu is described in the section entitled
274. nana sanasana D 1 Index Regulatory CXUG 10 6 99 xiii Figures Figure 1 1 Cell Exchange System 1 2 Figure 1 2 Cell Exchange System 1 3 Figure 1 3 CX 1500 Cell Exchange nennen nennen nnne eene 1 5 Figure 1 4 CX 1540 Cell Exchange 1 6 Figure 1 5 C X 1580 Cell Exchange System fefe ie tete ie le tad 1 6 Figure 1 6 System Timing Diagram Page 1 Of 3 nee nne 1 13 Figure 1 6 System Timing Diagram Page 2 of 3 nene 1 14 Figure 1 6 System Timing Diagram Page 3 of 3 eene eene nennen 1 15 Figure 1 7 Cell Exchange with Stacking Fan Unit eese nennen 1 16 Figure 2 1 CX 1500 AC Power Connector Module Rear Chassis eese 2 3 Figure 2 2 CX 1500 DC Power Connector Module Rear Chassis 2 3 Figure 2 3 CX 1540 AC Power Connector Module Rear 15 2 3 Figure 2 4 Configure Menu ederet toe ect eee pete ved pet eese eee pete 2 10 Figure 2 5 Software Version MAO eas Taa aaa a raaa a a a a a T a aa aaea a aa a akekee h eenaa gate 2 11 Figure 2 6 New Version 2 12 Figure 2 7 Flashi Memory MeSSage o enet oe a le ee cet diet het 2 12 Figure 2 3 Send TextFile Window c ee a CLR CR e Ces 2 13 Figure 2 9
275. nates one E3 facility recovers clock accesses ATM cells within the payload and sends the cells to the bus In the transmit direction it maps ATM cells into the payload formats the payload and clocks it out on the E3 facility A front panel view of the E3 Cell Interface Module is shown in Figure 3 28 Figure 3 28 E3 Cell Interface Module E3C The E3 Cell Interface Module performs the following primary functions e Takes the cells and places them onto the ATM cell bus e Monitors the physical synchronous interface for alarms e Collects statistics on module performance 3 40 CXUG 10 6 99 Cell Bus Microprocessor Power Section The Cell Bus Microprocessor Power section of the E3C Module consists of the following e ATM Cell Bus Switching Logic IC ATM Cell Bus Switch along with a RAM IC provides connectivity to the backplane board e 96 Pin DIN connector used to connect onto the ATM Cell Bus e Motorola 68340 microprocessor e Capacitor filtering provided for control and noise suppression Unique Functionality Section The E3 Cell Interface Module includes the following unique functions e Module equipped with one complete E3C channel e Connectors are BNC type one transmit and one receive A functional block diagram of the E3 Cell Interface Module is shown in Figure 3 29 ATM CELL BUS INTERFACE TYPE SWITCH DRIVERS amp RECEIVERS FUNCTIONS 68340 FILTERS E 2 2 Q z a Figure 3 29 E
276. nections move the cursor to highlight one of the interfaces 3 Press F2 or ENTER to bring up the connection management map for that interface 4 Usethe Up Down arrow key to move to the Inact field 5 Press F3 to add a new connection or F4 to delete an existing connection Follow the steps described in Configuring Interface Connections to add new connections 6 When done press F1 or move to EXECUTE button and press ENTER to update the configuration database and return to the main menu or UPDATE and ENTER to update the configuration and remain in this window 5 12 CXUG 10 6 99 Cell Interface Module OC3 OC3C Configuring Interfaces CXUG 10 6 99 To configure a new interface follow the steps described in Configuring Physical Interfaces Enter the name the interface type the slot the physical interface and the active status Press lt F2 gt to enter the configuration menu The same window is used to configure the OC3 and OC3C interface modules Figure 5 13 shows the OC3 OC3C Cell configuration menu with all fields set to the default values Intf Name Germantown Slot 2 Intf A Intf Type OC3 Cell Parameters common to both OC3 and OC3C cards Tx Clock Out Recovered Scramble Cells Enable OC3C Parameters Resync Signal Idle State LOW Resync Delay Seconds 0 Resync Period Seconds 10 Resync Duration Seconds 0 Sonet SDH OC3C OC3 Parameters Tx Path
277. nector with the backplane slot Make sure the connector is fully seated The POWER LED will illuminate indicating that 5 VDC backplane voltage is present 3 Tighten the four screws in the module front panel securely NOTE Never force the screws when starting them If they become difficult to turn back them off and start over 4 Turn on power on the power supply Use the rear AC switch for the AC chassis or the external DC breaker for the DC chassis The Power Supply FAIL LED will go off on the face plate and system will provide an alarm that the power supply is up CPU Module PRECAUTION Observe electrostatic discharge ESD precautions when handling any Cell Exchange system module If ESD precautions are not taken sensitive components may be permanently damaged PRECAUTION The CPU Module must be installed in slot 8 of Model CX 1500 slots 7 and 8 for redundant CPUs and in any slot except slot 1 of Model CX 1540 PRECAUTION Slot 1 of the CX 1500 1540 is used for initialization Installing the CXUG 10 6 99 CPU module in Slot 1 will cause the database to be erased initialized 7 3 To remove the CPU Module 1 Loosen the two captive screws securing the module to the chassis 2 Remove the module by pulling it straight out Be careful not to twist or bend the module To replace the CPU Module 1 Slide the replacement module straight back into the chassis aligning the DIN connector with the backplane slot Make sure t
278. new software version The CX will inform the user first that it is erasing flash memory and then that it is ready to accept software Once the user sees the second prompt from the telnet screen the new software image can be sent to the CX via the FTP Client The following ftp command FTP gt put CPUROM BIN sends the software image to the CX MX17358 1 2 of 29 4 30 00 Chapter 3 Modules 1 Page 3 4 Table 3 1 add the following Structured E1 Legacy Interface Accepts synchronous non cell legacy traffic and Module SEL converts the data to ATM CBR cells Places the cells on the ATM cell bus Monitors the physical interface Collects module performance statistics 2 Page 3 51 delete the title and Overview paragraph and replace with the following Dual Synchronous Legacy Interface Module DSL DSL Overview The Dual Synchronous Legacy Interface Module DSL DSL is the gateway for synchronous non ATM traffic into the ATM network The DSL DSL module provides an EIA RS 530 interface converts legacy traffic into ATM cells and establishes circuit emulation over the ATM network in AALI unstructured mode The DSL module supports data rates from 8 Kbps to 2 048 Mbps in 8 Kbps increments The DSL module supports enhanced data rates of 1200 bps 2400 bps 4800 bps 9600 bps and 16 Kbps 2 048 Mbps in 8 Kbps increments Adaptive Clock Recovery timing allows the module to be highly tolerant of network timing ambiguities Th
279. nformation is available for each slot including module type and module status More information can be obtained for a particular module by highlighting the module and pressing lt F2 gt This will bring up the logical interface screen for this module similar to Figure 4 38 Additional information for each logical interface can be obtained by highlighting the interface and pressing lt F2 gt which will bring up the screen shown in Figure 4 42 This screen contains information that is tailored to the interface Name Frederick Slot 4 Intf A Type OC3c Cell Loss of Signal OC3 gt ATM Cells 0 Loss of Frame HEC Error Cells 0 Hardware Failure Misrouted Cells 0 Loss of Cell Sync OC3 lt ATM Cells 0 Loss of Cell Delineation Discarded Cells 0 Loss of Pointer Discard Cell Secs 0 Signal Label Mismatch Line AIS Path AIS Line RFI Path RFI Path Trace Mismatch Last Statistics Reset Hour 11 00 Card Status Up Port Status Up Loopback No REFRESH HISTORY 12 25 View Intf OC3c ALARM 4 ESC ESC Previous Figure 4 42 Specific Interface Window OC3c Cell The entries in this window are the same as the OC3 Selecting the HISTORY button provides statistics for this module similar to those shown in Figure 4 40 CXUG 4 39 10 6 99 Dual Synchronous Cell Interface Module DSC To view the statistics for the Dual Synchronous Cell Interface Module select Module
280. ng LAN interfaces to any higher layer entity such as the layer 3 IP and IPX protocols Each ATM adapter router or LAN switch can support multiple instances of an LEC with a separate LEC for each connected Emulated LAN ELAN Clients are typically implemented on devices such as adapters or LAN switches while LANE clients and LAN Emulation Servers LES can be implemented together in a router LAN or ATM switch or a standalone ATM equipped host ATMARP Address Resolution Protocol Servers can also be distributed on different routers switches or hosts across the ATM network MX17358 1 4 30 00 17 of 29 18 of 29 LANE defines three different types of server components the LAN Emulation Server LES the Broadcast and Unknown Server BUS and the LAN Emulation Configuration Server LECS These servers provide the following services e Resolve MAC addresses to ATM addresses LES e Perform direct unicast data transfers and multi broadcast data distribution among LAN Emulation clients on the emulated LANs ELANSs BUS e Maintain the relationship between emulated LANs and VLANs LECS The LAN Emulation Server LES provides address resolution services or directory assistance that resolve Ethernet or Token Ring MAC addresses to ATM addresses The LES itself is identified by a unique ATM address LECs can communicate directly with each other only when they are connected to the same LES Multiple LESs can exist on the same physical AT
281. nnecting the Workstation Using LANE SVC LANE management support is provided by incorporating a LANE Client onto the Cell Exchange CX This allows any standard SNMP manager to manage the CX However to take advantage of the Cell Exchange GUI SNMP manager it must be connected as shown in Figure 5 59 The SNMP platform connects via the same ATM OC 3 NIC as used in previous releases but connects to the ATM network cloud versus directly to a CX node MX17358 1 20 of 29 4 30 00 Workstation SS See ATMARP Server iit NICK 7 E OC 3 N Pt to Pt Connection Logical Connections I Network Workstation i g a nic e AAL5 1 Pt to Pt Connection CX 1500 CX 1500 CX 1540 SS Management Connection SVP LANE Service Connection Logical Figure 5 59 Logical Connectivity for LANE Incorporating SVC and LANE allows management via IP addresses versus PVCs An ATM network with LANE must have an ATMARP Server in the network The ATMARP Server provides the function of tabling and or converting IP and ATM addresses ATM Gateways provide the LES LECS and BUS services required for LANE operation The ATMARP Serve
282. nodes can be managed using Classical IP Workstation 2 0 0 2 HRIM ATM IP N Ethernet P 1 0 0 1 RIP gt Local LAN Segment 2 0 0 1 CPU ATM IP 1 0 0 2 HRIM LAN IP CX 1540 T CPU IP 2 0 0 3 2 0 0 8 M gt 2 Management Traffic se o o CX 1500 CX 1500 CPU IP 2 0 0 4 CPU IP 2 0 0 7 Local LAN Segment NOTE Static routes dashed lines are required to route IP HRIM to CPUs For Esp a different workstation the SNMP must CX 1500 Second or Other be routed through the original root CPU IP 2 0 0 5 Workstation HRIM Figure 5 61 Classical IP Workstation Connectivity Additional Nodes MX17358 1 4 30 00 25 of 29 Chapter 6 Troubleshooting 1 Page 6 1 delete the bullets listed under Traps and replace with the following 26 of 29 Power Supply UP Power Supply DOWN Board UP Board DOWN Incorrect Board Configured Interface UP Interface DOWN Management Validation Bad LEC UP LEC DOWN Incorrect Password Software System FULL Software Version Removed Download Good Download Bad Multicast Connection Validation Bad CPU ACTIVE Standby CPU Active CPU Manual Switchover CPU Manual Switchover Enabled CPU Manual Switchover Disabled CPU Switchover Requested CPU Enable Switchover Requested CPU Disable Switchover Requested AXS Failure AXS Cleared AXS Bad Location AXS Bad Address AXS
283. nto the ATM Cell Bus e Motorola 68340 microprocessor e Capacitor filtering provided for control and noise suppression Unique Functionality Section The DS3 Cell Interface Module includes the following unique functions e Module equipped with one complete DS3 channel e Connectors are BNC type A functional block diagram of the DS3 Cell Interface Module is shown in Figure 3 23 ATM CELL BUS INTERFACE TYPE SWITCH DRIVERS amp RECEIVERS FUNCTIONS Ys CPU 68340 FILTERS o z a o z a DIN CONNECTOR Figure 3 23 DS3 Cell Interface Module Functional Block Diagram 3 34 CXUG 10 6 99 Specifications Port Capacity One Media Coaxial Cable Connector BNC Female Data Rate 44 736 Mbps Signal Format C Bit Parity per ANSI T1 107a M23 per ANSI T1 107 Transmit Clock Recovered Receive DS3 rate On Board 44 736 MHz Diagnostics Signal Loopbacks Self Test Alarm Surveillance LOS LOF LOC AIS Sync Fail Hardware Fail FERM PLCP Path RAI DS3 Path RFI Alarm Statistics Physical Layer Line Layer DS3 Path Layer PLCP Path Layer and ATM Layer Applicable Standards UNI v3 1 ANSI T1 107 1988 ANSI T1 107a 1990 ANSI 1 231 1993 ITU TS Docs 1 432 1 610 G 703 G 804 Power lt 7 Watts Indicators we ume coir wearing LED OPNL Green when operational code begins running after the boot process is complete Blinks during operational code
284. nts DSL 1200 bps 2400 bps 4800 bps 9600 bps and 16 Kbps 2 048 Mbps in 8 Kbps increments 2 Page 5 28 insert the following note after the Data Rate bullet NOTE The lower port speeds will result in significantly increased cellification delays At 1200 bps each cell is filled in 313 ms Assuming a 3 cell delay end to end there is a one way delay of one second as measured from the input RS 530 port to the output of the remote RS 530 port If additional cell delay is introduced due to ATM switching equipment etc then additional delays will be incurred The delays for the higher port rates are proportionately lower 3 Page 5 53 change the Data Rate bullet to read Data Rate edit field 8 Kbps 4 096 Mbps in 0 8 Kbps increments 4 Following page 5 60 add the following new information Structured E1 Legacy Interface Module Configuration Configuring Interfaces To configure a new Structured Legacy Interface Module SEL interface follow the steps described in Configuring Physical Interfaces to enter the name the interface type the slot the physical interface and the active status indication Press lt F2 gt to enter the interface configuration menu Figure 5 56 shows the interface configuration menu with all fields set to the default values MX17358 1 12 of 29 4 30 00 Intf Name Middletown Slot Intf A Intf Type Structured E1 Framing CAS CRC4 Trunk Conditioning Data Code Idle UA
285. o go to the Location Name screen 10 50 Main Menu ALARM Q to Logout Figure 5 1 Configure Menu Location Name This action will bring up the screen shown in Figure 5 2 CXUG 5 1 10 6 99 Location Name Frederick Admin Phone Number EXECUTE Press ENTER To update the config database andreturnto the Main Menu 09 57 CFG Location Name ALARM ESC ESC Previous Figure 5 2 Location Name Screen Using the TAB or lt gt keys move to the Location Name field and enter the location If desired move to the Admin Phone Number field and enter the phone number of the point of contact for that location When done move to the lt EXECUTE gt button and press ENTER to save the entries and return to the main menu Configuring Physical Interfaces 5 2 To configure the interfaces for the Cell Exchange system select the Interface command from the Configure menu Figure 5 3 Configure Diagnostics Multicast Data Time Location Name Admin Ports System Timing System Reset Passwords Software Ver SNMP Press ENTER F2 to go to the Interface screen 10 50 Main Menu ALARM eee Q to Logout Figure 5 3 Configure Menu Interface CXUG 10 6 99 This will bring up the screen shown in Figure 5 4 Text Tumbler Tumbler Tumbler Toggle Inf Name Intf Type Physical Walkersville Dual T1 Cell Emm
286. ocessor Power section of the High Speed Synchronous Legacy Interface Module consists of the following e ATM Cell Bus Switching Logic IC ATM Cell Bus Switch along with a RAM IC provides connectivity to the backplane board e 96 Pin DIN connector used to connect onto the ATM Cell Bus e Intel 80C31 microprocessor e Capacitor filtering provided for control and noise suppression Unique Functionality Section Unique functionality of the High Speed Legacy Interface Module includes e Module equipped with one complete independent synchronous channel e Connector is a HSSI type e Configured as a DCE device using a HSSI connector e High speed AAL1 segmentation and reassembly function process data speeds up to and including 52 Mbps at the user interface CBR type A functional block diagram of the High Speed Synchronous Legacy Interface Module is shown in Figure 3 46 INTERFACE ATM CELL DRIVERS amp RECEIVERS BUSS SWITCH INTERFACE TYPE DRIVERS amp RECEIVERS FUNCTIONS CPU 80031 FILTERS DIN CONNECTOR Figure 3 46 High Speed Synchronous Legacy Interface Module Functional Block Diagram 3 60 CXUG 10 6 99 Jumper Settings The jumper settings listed are factory set defaults No user configuration is required Jumper Pins J3 1 2 Specifications Port Capacity Media Electrical Connector Line Format Data Format One Shielded Multi twisted pair cable low capacitance EIA 530
287. odem cable into the PC serial port and the other into the port on the front of the active CPU Module as shown in Figure 4 1 4 s V lt 5 Hise Active CPU Module Figure 4 1 Local Cell Exchange VT100 Connection It is important that the emulation package used is VT100 compatible such as ProComm or Windows terminal emulation software The configuration environment makes use of attributes that are not always correctly emulated by non compatible packages The Cell Exchange will not be affected by missing reverse video in the display but it can be tiring for the operator Setup instructions for two terminal emulation packages Windows Terminal and Windows Hyper Terminal are described in the following paragraphs CXUG 4 1 10 6 99 Windows Hyper Terminal Software If using the Hyper Terminal application open the program Program Files Accessories Hyper Terminal When the New Connection window opens name it and select an icon if desired then click OK On the next Phone Number screen in the Connect using box select Direct to Com 1 or 2 click OK When the COM 1 Properties window opens choose the following settings Bits per second 9600 Data Bits 8 Parity None Stop Bits 1 Flow Control Xon Xoff Click OK When the Hyper Terminal window opens select View Font In that window choose the following Font Terminal Font Style
288. odule 3 72 Power Connections 2 2 Power Distribution 1 7 Power Supply Module 1 7 1 9 3 9 3 12 7 3 Overview 1 9 CX 1500 7 2 removing 7 2 troubleshooting 6 6 Recovered Timing channel timing 1 10 Reference Timing channel timing 1 11 Removing Chassis 7 1 Removing Modules 7 2 Repair and Replacement 7 1 Replacement Procedures 7 1 Replacing Chassis 7 1 Replacing Modules 7 2 SCM 3 14 SCM Module configuring 5 10 indicators 3 15 Indicators 3 13 overview 3 14 pinouts 3 15 specifications 3 13 IN 6 statistics 4 33 Segmentation and Reassembly STL Module 3 48 Setting Location Name 5 1 Setting System Timing 5 6 Site Preparation 2 1 Software loading 2 22 loading with FTP 2 14 2 24 version 2 22 Specifications 4 Wire EML Module 3 86 AC Power Supply Module 3 10 BIM Module 3 83 DS3 Module 3 35 DSC Module 3 31 E3C Module 3 41 HRIM Module 3 63 HSL Module 3 57 HSSL Module 3 61 LSAL Module 3 66 OC3 Module 3 21 OC3C Module 3 26 SCM Module 3 13 3 15 STL Module 3 49 Module 3 17 UD3L Module 3 75 UE3L Module 3 79 UTEL Module 3 71 Station Clock Module 3 14 overview 1 9 STL Module alarms 3 49 cell bearing connections 3 46 configuring 5 24 idle channel data insertion 3 46 indicators 3 49 interface loopback 3 46 overview 3 43 pinouts 3 50 specifications 3 49 statistics 4 44 T1 signaling 3 48 trunk conditioning logic 3 47 unique functionality 3 45
289. onfiguring Physical Interfaces to enter the name the interface type the slot the physical interface and the active status indication Press lt F2 gt to enter the interface configuration menu Figure 5 46 shows the interface configuration menu with all fields set to the default values Intf Name Dunkirk Slot 9 Intf A Intf Type UD3L Adaptive Clock Disable Transmit Clock Source Internal Coding B8ZS Transmit All Ones Disable EXECUTE Press ENTER To update the config database and return to the Main Menu 12 48 CFG Intt UD3L ESC ESC Previous Figure 5 46 Interface Configuration Window UD3L The arrow keys are used to move between the different fields Beginning at the Adaptive Clock field the down arrow key can be used to move the cursor through each field in the order shown The space bar is used to move through the possible selections which are given below in parentheses starting with the default e Adaptive Clock Disable Enable e Transmit Clock Source Internal On Board Recovered Ref Clock e Coding B8ZS AMI e Transmit All Ones Disable Enable CXUG 5 49 10 6 99 Configuring Connections Connections are configured via the Connection Management menus see Configuring Interface Connections Configuring connections to and from synchronous legacy interfaces is very similar to configuring other connections Figure 5 47 shows the configuration map for an Unstructur
290. onfiguring Physical Interfaces to enter the name the interface type the slot the physical interface and the status indication Press F2 to enter the interface configuration menu Figure 5 33 shows the HRIM interface configuration menu with all fields set to the default values 5 34 CXUG 10 6 99 CXUG 10 6 99 Intf Name Dallas Slot 9 Intf A Type Hub Router IP address of router interface 172 16 103 53 IP mask of router interface 255 255 255 0 IP broadcast address 172 16 103 255 IP address of default gateway 172 16 103 100 Ethernet MAC address 009010000001 IP address of ATM interface 172 16 101 53 IP mask of ATM interface 255 255 255 0 CHANNEL CONFIG EXECUTE UPDATE Enter IP address of HRIM s Ethernet Port eg 192 100 102 103 09 52 CFG Intf HRIM ALARM ESC ESC Previous Figure 5 33 Interface Configuration Window HRIM The arrow keys are used to move between the different fields Beginning at the IP address of router interface field the down arrow key can be used to move the cursor through each field in the order shown Enter text using the keyboard e address of router interface edit field e mask of router interface edit field e IP broadcast address edit field e address of the default gateway edit field e Ethernet MAC address edit field e IP address of ATM interface edit field e mask of ATM interface edit
291. oning Signaling Idle 0 Busy 1 or Busy 1 Idle 0 Idle Channel Conditioning Voice Idle or Data Idle Standard status and statistics provided Facility Loopback Terminal Loopback FIFO Overrun Underrun 256 VPIs 10 240 VCIs lt 7 Watts ITU 703 G 804 af vtoa 0078 000 Channel Emulation Service MX17358 1 4 30 00 Indicators Type Label Color Meaning LED OPNL Green On Steady Indicates that module is operational and has successfully received configuration from CPU for at least one E1 interface On Blinking Downloading program Off No power to module no port configured or CPU failed LED A thru D 4 port Green Indicates that a configured port has achieved frame synchronization with the received E1 when lit loss of frame or synchronization when extinguished A thru H 8 port Pinouts Pinouts for the RJ 45 connector are shown in Figure 3 73 and the accompanying table 1 Tx to terminal equipment 3 7 Rx from terminal equipment 8 9SV Cl Figure 3 73 SEL RJ 45 Pinouts MX17358 1 4 30 00 9 of 29 Chapter 4 Operation 1 Page 4 46 change DSL to DSL DSL wherever it appears 2 Page 4 46 add the following note at the bottom of the page NOTE the module status screen the same statistics will be displayed for both modules The only difference is that the DSL module will display DSL
292. ords still operate Will the network management channel work to remote nodes Answer Reverse database conversion new to old is not supported The new database will be flushed by the old software during conversion Code Swap Time The code swap takes seconds to execute The craft screen time clock freezes for the duration of the code swap Once the swap is completed the logon screen will reappear Alarm events are generated to indicate progress success and failures during a code swap From a craft station or telnet the user can access the alarm logs to retrieve this information CXUG 10 6 99 2 21 Software Versions When the user receives a new version of software initially distributed on a diskette it is normally uploaded using terminal emulation software as described above in the craft interface procedures Software loads may also be accomplished using FTP and Xmodem transfers as described above Once uploaded new software versions are activated by following these procedures 1 Log into the Cell Exchange system and select Software Ver under the Configure menu as shown in Figure 2 18 Configure Diagnostics Connect Mgmt Multicast Interface Data Time Location Name Admin Ports System Timing System Reset Passwords SNMP Press ENTER F2 to go to the Software Version configuration screen 10 50 Main Menu ALARM i Q to Logout Figure 2 18 Software Version Command This will br
293. ormal indicates synchronization with source On indicates synchronization lost i e not receiving cells LED BUFF Red Off normal On indicates data output buffer is completely full or completely empty due to a mismatch in data rates between the HSL and the far end source or due to loss of cells CXUG 3 57 10 6 99 Pinouts Pinouts for the high density DB 26 connector are shown in Figure 3 44 and the accompanying table Figure 3 44 HDB 26F DCE Pin Location To HSL Module j To Terminal 3 58 CXUG 10 6 99 High Speed Serial Interface Legacy Module HSSL Overview The High Speed Serial Interface Legacy Module HSSL allows the Cell Exchange to interface with non ATM cell bearing equipment at speeds up to and including 52 Mbps The synchronous channels operate in steps of 8 Kbps A front panel view of the High Speed Synchronous Legacy Interface Module is shown in Figure 3 45 Figure 3 45 High Speed Serial Interface Legacy Module HSSL The High Speed Synchronous Legacy Interface Module performs the following primary functions e Takes synchronous non cell bearing traffic Legacy traffic and converts the data stream to ATM CBR cells adding the appropriate cell overhead e Takes the cells and places them onto the ATM cell bus e Monitors the physical synchronous interface for alarms e Collects statistics on module performance CXUG 3 59 10 6 99 Cell Bus Microprocessor Power Section The Cell Bus Micropr
294. ormation If the trouble is causing harm to the telephone network the telephone company may request that you remove the equipment from the network until the problem is resolved The following repairs may be done by the customer None This equipment cannot be used on telephone company provided coin service Connection to Party Line Service is subject to state tariffs In the event repairs are ever needed on this equipment they should be performed by Timeplex Inc or an authorized representative of Timeplex Inc For information contact Timeplex Inc 1619 North Harrison Parkway Sunrise Florida 33323 2802 1 800 366 0126 CXUG 3 15 00
295. overview 1 2 Basic Interface Module 3 81 BIM Module cell bus 3 82 configuring 5 53 indicators 3 83 jumper settings 3 83 overview 3 81 specifications 3 83 statistics 4 56 unique functionality 3 82 Bus Timing overview 1 10 CXUG 10 6 99 Cell Bearing Connections STL Module 3 46 Cell Bus 1 5 3 6 3 16 3 20 3 25 3 30 3 34 3 37 3 41 3 45 3 56 3 60 3 69 3 74 3 78 3 82 3 85 4 Wire EML Module 3 85 BIM Module 3 85 CPU Module 3 6 DS3 Module 3 34 DSL Module 3 53 EIC Module 3 37 E3C Module 3 41 HSL Module 3 56 HSSL Module 3 60 OC3 Module 3 20 OC3C Module 3 25 overview 1 2 STL Module 3 45 Module 3 16 UD3L Module 3 74 UE3L Module 3 78 UTEL Module 3 69 Cell Exchange Systems 1 1 Changing Passwords 4 4 Channel Timing dynamic timing 1 11 internal timing 1 11 on board timing 1 11 recovered timing 1 10 reference timing 1 11 Channel Port Timing overview 1 10 Chassis 1 17 1 18 2 1 2 3 CX 1500 1 4 CX 1540 1 5 CX 1580 1 6 installation 2 1 removing 7 1 replacing 7 1 Compatibility 1 19 Command Operation 4 6 Command Parameter Entry 4 6 Command Response 4 7 IN 1 Configuration 5 5 5 8 5 9 Network Interfaces FTP 4 28 Telnet 4 20 Configure Menu 4 8 Configuring Channel HRIM Module 5 36 Configuring Channel Groups STL Module 5 25 Configuring Connections 4 Wire EML Module 5 56 BIM Module 5 54 DS3 Module 5 19 DSC Module 5 16 DSL Module 5 29 E1
296. p to the right most selection The reverse is also true To use the quick key approach press the key of the highlighted letter in each menu name Command Operation From the Menu screen the operator must perform the following steps to execute a command 1 Select the desired menu as the current menu 2 Use the arrow key or quick key to select the desired command Once a command is selected it will be displayed in reverse video 3 Select the command for execution by pressing lt ENTER gt or lt F2 gt as shown on the prompt line The Command screen will now be displayed Moving around between commands is very similar to the menus using the up and down arrow keys or a quick key Using the arrow keys works exactly the same as for the menus including the capability to wrap from top to bottom or vice versa To use the quick key press the key of the highlighted character in the command name Command Parameter Entry 4 6 Once a command is selected for execution the operator will be prompted for all parameters associated with that command For each required parameter an entry area will be provided along with a prompt on the prompt line explaining the type of data required As each parameter field is displayed a default is provided To select the default parameter press the lt ENTER gt key before pressing any other key Whenever possible parameter selections will be made by toggle selections using the spac
297. packages cells into the appropriate type of frame for the physical medium being used ATM can use any physical medium capable of carrying ATM cells Some existing standards that can carry ATM cells are SONET Synchronous Optical Network SDH DS 3 E3 100 Mbps local fiber Fiber Distributed Data Interface FDDI physical layer and 155 Mbps local fiber Fiber Channel physical layer A 3 ATM Layer The ATM layer is fully independent of the physical medium physical layer used to transport the ATM cells and applications it supports above the ATM layer This allows a wide range of upper layer services to be supported by a single transfer mode over multiple physical media The result is not only an integrated data transfer but also the ability to support novel integrated applications The ATM layer is responsible for establishing connections and passing cells through the ATM network To do this it uses the information contained in the header of each ATM cell The ATM layer maps network layer addresses to ATM addresses The primary function of the cell header is to identify cells that belong to a virtual channel VC The ATM layer also supports a virtual path VP identified by the virtual path identifier VPI The information field of a cell is transported transparently by the ATM layer In addition the ATM layer preserves the cell sequence integrity on a virtual channel connection The ATM layer provides single bit error correction on the ATM
298. per settings 3 70 overview 3 68 pinouts 3 72 specifications 3 71 statistics 4 52 unique functionality 3 69 UTEL Module E1 configuring 5 46 statistics 4 53 Verifying Network Topology HRIM Module 5 39 View Menu 4 9 Virtual Channel Identifier 5 5 5 8 5 9 Virtual Path Identifier 5 5 5 8 5 9 Windows Hyper Terminal Software 4 2 ag c IN 7 Regulatory Requirements This section contains regulatory information for geographical areas that require specific text to appear in the manual documentation This equipment has been approved for use in areas other than those listed in this section For areas not listed below regulatory requirements and approvals information can be obtained from your local Timeplex office The information in this section includes mandatory or recommended requirements of certification authorities for the following areas e Canada e Europe e United States NOTE All ports on this equipment are Safe Extra Low Voltage SELV unless otherwise noted and should only be connected to SELV ports on other equipment Canada Telephone Line Connection Information The Canadian Department of Communications label identifies certified equipment This certification means that the equipment meets certain telecommunications network protective operational and safety requirements as prescribed in the appropriate Terminal Equipment Technical Requirements documents The department does not guarantee the e
299. pted as follows Channel assignment Valid choices I idle D1 D24 data 1 V24 voice To configure a channel group choose a unique channel group ID and enter it into each of the channel assignment fields of the group Channel group IDs for data channels 64 KHz clear channel always begin with D and channel group IDs for voice channels signaling enabled begin with V Only one ID can be assigned to a particular channel An idle channel a channel that does not belong to a group is configured by entering an in the channel assignment field As shown in Figure 5 27 all channels are initially idle when a new interface is configured The channels comprising a group may be contiguous or noncontiguous NOTE channels established in the local management screens are referenced by the names assigned by the system operator The operator should exercise caution when assigning logical channel names and making entrees on the configuration screens When changes are made on a management screen they are implemented on the system database and will immediately affect the channels where the change or name assignments are made These changes can be implemented on active channels so any changes should be made intentionally by the system operator Configuring STL Connections CXUG 10 6 99 STL connections are configured via the Connection Management menus see Configuring Interfaces Configuring connections to and from
300. quent Refer to the Release Notes for upgrade procedures for versions prior to 3 1 1 Table 2 1 Upgrade Path Version 3 1 1 and Subsequent From Version To Version Method Available File Type 3 1 1 4 0 Craft Interface send text file cpurom hex 3 2 4 0 Craft Interface send text file cpurom hex 3 2 4 0 FTP cpurom hex 4 0 4 0 and higher Craft Interface Xmodem cpurom bin 4 0 4 0 and higher FTP cpurom bin CXUG 2 6 10 6 99 Single CPU Scenario This section describes generically what happens during software upgrade in a single CPU CX node See the detailed procedures for using the craft station FTP or Xmodem for software upgrade STEP 1 Log on using the Administrator password The NVRAM is pulled from the online CPU and stored as a file on the Craft Station PC in case the user needs to revert to an earlier version of software STEP 2 Download the new software version to the CPU The new version of software is loaded into the section of flash for other software non executing NOTE Only two images may be accommodated in flash at one time If more than one software image exists in flash one must be deleted before downloading new software The download procedure will take approximately 15 to 45 minutes to complete depending on the CPU and operating system being used STEP 3 Execute a Code Swap This will transfer the other flash area into the online flash area Meanwhi
301. quipment will operate to the user s satisfaction Before installing this equipment users should ensure that it is permissible to be connected to the facilities of the local telecommunications company The equipment also must be installed using an acceptable method of connection The customer should be aware that compliance with the above conditions may not prevent degradation of service in some situations Repairs to certified equipment should be coordinated by a representative designated by the supplier Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment or equipment malfunctions may give the telecommunications company cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of the power utility telephone lines and internal metallic water pipe systems if present are connected together This precaution may be particularly important in rural areas CAUTION Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves but should contact the appropriate electric inspection authority or electrician as appropriate The required connection arrangement telephone jack for this product is CB1D Canadian Compliance Statement This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class A limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus set out in the Radio Interference Regulations of the Canadian Department of Communications Le pr sent appareil num
302. r B Inactive Press 2 to show the intf status for the highlighted selection 9 32 View Module Status ALARM ESC ESC Previous Figure 4 9 Module Status Window from View Menu Entries in this window include Entry Column Meaning Undefined Module Type No card in slot or interface not configured N A Module Status No card in slot or interface not configured Invalid Module Status Mismatch between the card installed and the interface configuration for the slot Active Module Status For redundant modules CPU Power Supply indicates the on line module for interface cards indicates the card is up and has a connection Inactive Module Status For redundant modules CPU Power Supply indicates the standby module Idle Module Status Indicates the interface card is up but does not have a connection The Module Status menu and associated windows are further described in the section entitled Module Statistics Admin Info This menu provides a summary of administrative information that has been previously entered in other screens Selecting this menu item brings up the window shown in Figure 4 10 CXUG 10 6 99 CXUG 10 6 99 Software Version Database Version Location Admin Phone Number Management Interface SNMP Read Community SNMP Write Community SNMP Trap Community Power Supply A Power Supply B m1500 4 0 09 30
303. r and ATM Gateway can be the same ATM device A Lane Client resides in both the Cell Exchange and the ATM SNMP management platform in order to communicate via the ATMARP Server The network management workstation connection to the ATMARP Server is through an OC3 interface This can be a CX 1500 CX 1540 CX 1580 OC3 module or an OC3 interface on a Fore switch ATMARP Server Other devices can connect to the network using OC3 interfaces or non OC3 interfaces for their SNMP channels For example you could route an SNMP channel to a DS3 interface on a Fore switch ATMARP Server To establish network management using LANE you must 1 Add an ATMARP Server to your ATM Network 2 Configure the SNMP connection to the ATMARP Server may be OC3 interface on CX or on Fore switch Configure LANE connections for the network 4 Connect the network management workstation to the OC3 interface Install and configure HP OpenView and Synchrony SNMS software on the network management workstation MX17358 1 4 30 00 21 of 29 Adding an Server to your ATM Network TimePlex has qualified Fore Systems ForeRunner ATM switches for use as ATMARP Servers This includes the ASX 200 and the ASX 1200 For more information contact your TimePlex sales representative Configuring the SNMP Connection to the ATMARP Server The network management workstation connection to the ATMARP Server is through an OC3 interface This can be a CX 1
304. re 2 11 appears ensure that there is only one software image in Flash If only one image appears as shown proceed to Step 5 New Version Name NENEEEEEEEEEEEEEEN Uersions Currently Loaded in the System test xmod SEE Connected 0 23 13 vr100 9600 8 N 1 SCROLL CAPS NUM Capture Print echo Figure 2 11 Software Version Window To remove a second copy of an image in Flash use the arrow key to highlight the last image listed The uppermost image is the current image being executed by the CPU Press the F4 key Use the arrow key to highlight the UPDATE button and press lt ENTER gt CXUG 10 6 99 NOTE This step is very important If it is not performed the second image remains in Flash Since only two images can reside in Flash any attempt to load a new image will fail 5 Using the arrow key highlight the New Version Name field Enter a descriptive name to indicate the version of the software loaded and or operating in the Flash location In the example pictured the version loaded is CPU400 bin The bin extension indicates that this is a binary file required for Xmodem MX1500 HyperTerminal iof xi File Edi View Call Transfer Help Dis ex sols e New Version Name cpu4 bin Versions Currently Loaded in the System M1566 3 1 Press ENTER to begin the download of the new version of appication code 88 17 CFG Softuare Uer HEEE ESC ESC Previous Conne
305. re EML Module EML 64 Kbps T1 2 048 Equipment Description The Cell Exchange system is available in several physical modular designs that can integrate with a variety of ATM interface modules to provide the versatility and scalability needed to accommodate the rapidly growing ATM market today and in the future The CX 1500 system has a 15 slot chassis the CX 1540 system a 4 slot chassis and the CX 1580 system an 8 slot chassis the CX 1580 is available only as a custom build All chassis accommodate the same modules both common functionality modules needed to provide basic unit operation and interface modules The common modules are the CPU Power Supply and Station Clock modules The CX 1500 comes standard with a chassis passive backplane CPU module and AC power supply module The CX 1540 operates from a single internal AC Power Supply Module The CX 1540 comes standard with a chassis passive backplane internal AC power supply and a CPU module The CX 1580 comes standard with a chassis passive backplane and a CPU module The CX 1580 does not have a power supply Power is supplied from an external source CX 1500 The CX 1500 is based on a passive backplane design which allows all modules to be inserted from the front The chassis has slots for 15 modules including the CPU plus two slots for power 1 4 CXUG 10 6 99 supply modules It is designed for easy rack mounting in a standard 19 inch rack but because it is fu
306. re no special tools or equipment required for installation of the Cell Exchange system Chassis Installation Procedures Installing a Cell Exchange system chassis into the rack is simply a matter of selecting a mounting position with adequate room and ventilation for the Cell Exchange A Cell Exchange system should have at least one rack unit 1 3 4 inches of space open above and below it to provide unrestricted airflow to the venting ports in the chassis Once the chassis is mounted on the tray slides push it back into the rack until the ears on each side of the front panel contact the rack Secure the chassis to the rack with 4 screws CXUG 10 6 99 2 1 Grounding Requirements Once the chassis is installed ground the installation by attaching a grounding strap not supplied between the common equipment rack ground and the grounding lug located on the backplane WARNING ALWAYS ENSURE THAT THE CELL EXCHANGE SYSTEM IS PROPERLY GROUNDED BEFORE COMMENCING OPERATIONS INJURY TO PERSONNEL AND DAMAGE TO THE EQUIPMENT COULD RESULT IF THIS IS NOT OBSERVED Power Connections The Cell Exchange systems require AC or DC CX 1500 only input power For AC the range must be 90 230 VAC 47 63 Hz For DC the range must be 38 to 60 VDC Ensure that the available station power can meet these criteria WARNINGS FOR DC INPUT THE CHASSIS MUST BE CONNECTED TO AN ISOLATED SECONDARY CIRCUIT OR SOURCE SECURE THE POWER CABLE TO THE CONNECTO
307. ress lt ENTER gt NOTE Loopback tests on all modules will remain active indefinitely after they have been initiated Loopback tests must be deactivated through operator intervention CXUG 10 6 99 Chapter 7 Replacement Procedures This section provides information for replacement of failed modules on the Cell Exchange system The basic maintenance concept for the Cell Exchange system is limited to on equipment repair Electrostatic Discharge ESD Anti Static Procedure When performing any maintenance action on the Cell Exchange system observe the following procedures 1 2 3 4 5 Ensure that the Cell Exchange system is properly grounded Connect an ESD wrist strap to the same ground as the Cell Exchange system Put the wrist strap on before handling any module or the chassis of the Cell Exchange system Use protective ESD bags to handle store or ship Cell Exchange system components If the maintenance or replacement action requires removing a module do the following Remove the replacement module from its protective ESD bag and lay it on the bag Remove the defective module and lay it on another ESD bag or on the same bag When maintenance or replacement is complete remove the wrist strap and disconnect it from ground Removing and Replacing Chassis CXUG 10 6 99 To remove the Cell Exchange system from the rack 1 3 4 5 Turn the power switch es to the OFF 0 position if the chassis is a
308. rface Press lt F2 gt to enter the interface configuration menu Figure 5 28 shows the interface configuration menu with all fields set to the default values Intf Name Rockville Slot 11 Intf A Intf Type High Speed Leg Data Rate 8000 Adaptive Clock No Use TT No Invert ST No ST and RT Clock Source Internal ST Source Normal EXECUTE Press ENTER To update the config database and return to the Main Menu 11 44 CFG Intf HSL ALARM ESC ESC Previous Figure 5 28 Interface Configuration Window High Speed Leg The arrow keys are used to move between the different fields Beginning at the Data Rate field the down arrow key can be used to move the cursor through each field in order Enter text using the keyboard The space bar is used to move through the possible selections in tumbler fields given below in parentheses starting with the default Data Rate edit field Adaptive Clock No Yes Use TT No Yes Invert ST No Yes ST and RT Clock Source Internal Ref Clock External ST Source Normal From RT When done move to the EXECUTE button and press ENTER to update the configuration database and return to the main menu 5 30 CXUG 10 6 99 Configuring Connections Connections are configured via the Connection Management menus Figure 5 29 shows the configuration map for a High Speed Synchronous Legacy interface Name Rockville Slot 11 Intf A Type High Speed L
309. rial Interface Legacy Module HSSL 4 48 To view the statistics for the High Speed Serial Interface Legacy Module HSSI Interface HSSL select Module Status from the View menu More information can be obtained for a particular module by highlighting the module and pressing lt F2 gt This will bring up the logical interface screen for this module similar to Figure 4 38 Additional information for each logical interface can be obtained by highlighting the interface and pressing lt F2 gt which will bring up the screen shown in Figure 4 51 This screen contains information that is tailored to the interface Name Annapolis Slot 11 Int A Type HSSL Card Status Interface Status Loopback Last Statistics Reset Hour 23 00 HSSL gt ATM Cells HSSL ATM Cells Discarded Cells Discard Cell Secs Out of Sync Events Out of Seq Cells Invalid Cells Corrected Cells Buffer Events REFRESH HISTORY 08 01 View Intf HSSL Figure 4 51 Specific Interface Window High Speed Serial Interface Legacy HSSL ALARM ESC ESC The entries for this window are the same as the HSL Previous Selecting the HISTORY button provides statistics for this module similar to those shown in Figure 4 40 CXUG 10 6 99 Hub Router Interface Module HRIM To view the statistics for the Hub Router Interface Module HRIM select Module Status from
310. rim 5 Service Type IP Telnet Disconnect Timeout 388 LANE CFG SNMP Conf ig ESC ESC Previous Connected 0 18 51 VT100 9600 8 N 1 SCROLL CAPS NUM Capture Print echo Figure 4 25 SNMP Configuration Window 4 23 8 Use the ARROW keys to move to the LANE IP Interface field 9 With the lt SPACE gt bar toggle through the interfaces until the HRIM appears 10 11 Move to the Service Type field and toggle to IP Move to the Telnet Disconnect Timeout and enter a timer expiration in seconds 60 to 999 12 Move to the IP button and press lt ENTER gt This will bring up the screen shown in Figure 4 26 Te MX1500 HyperTerminal File Edit View Call Transfer Help Di 215 olal lel Es IP over ATM Configuration Parameters UPI CI 33 U HRIM Channel CPU IP fiddress CPU Subnet Mask U ATM Address Gateway IP Address 3 0 0 9 Trap IP Addr 1 Trap IP Addr 2 Trap IP Addr 3 1 134 196 15 2 255 255 255 0 4766000000000000000000000000000000000008 134 196 15 1 6 6 3 0 0 9 3 0 0 9 EXECUTE Press ENTER To update the config database and return to the Main Menu CFG IP Config ESC ESC Previous Connected 2 17 30 13 NOTE 14 15 16 17 4 24 ivr100 8600 amp N 1 SCROLL CAPS NUM Capture Print echo Figure 4 26 IP over ATM Configuration Window The VPI and VCI fields will show the default values 0 and 33 respectively When th
311. rn to the Main Menu 09 52 CFG Intt UEL ESC ESC Previous Figure 5 43 Interface Configuration Window UEL The arrow keys are used to move between the different fields Beginning at the Adaptive Clock field the down arrow key can be used to move the cursor through each field in the following order the space bar is used to move through the possible selections which are given below in parentheses starting with the default e Adaptive Clock No Yes e Transmit Clock Source Internal Ref Clock External On Board Line Build Out E1 Short Haul 12dB Gain E1 Short Haul 43dB Gain E1 Short Haul Coax 43dB Gain e Coding HDB3 AMI When done move to the EXECUTE button and press ENTER to update the configuration database and return to the main menu 5 46 CXUG 10 6 99 Configuring Connections Connections are configured via the Connection Management menus Figures 5 44 and 5 45 show the configuration maps for UEL interfaces Name Baltimore Slot 4 Intf A Type Unstructured E1 VPI VCI i Interface Name VPI VCI Chan Connection Name Priority ds3 9 0 93 German PBX High SCROLL UP LINE SCROLL DOWN LINE SCROLL UP PAGE SCROLL DOWN PAGE Press ENTER to update the config database and return to the Main Menu 14 27 CFG Con Mgmt Map ALARM eee ESC ESC Previous Figure 5 44 Connection Management Mapping Window UEL to Cell Bearing Name Baltimore Slot 4 Intf
312. rom the front It has slots for 4 modules including the CPU The CPU may be installed in any slot except slot 1 See precaution above The AC power supply is integrated with the chassis The CXUG 1 5 10 6 99 CX 1540 may be rack mounted used on a desktop or with optional hardware wall mounted A typical front panel view of the CX 1540 is shown in Figure 1 4 Synchrony TimePlex Cell Exchange CX 1540 POWER Figure 1 4 CX 1540 Cell Exchange System Chassis Specifications Size 1 75 inches high 19 inches wide 13 inches deep Input Power 90 to 230 VAC 47 to 63 Hz 0 8 amps CX 1580 NOT GENERALLY AVAILABLE The CX 1580 is also based on a passive backplane design which allows all modules to be inserted from the front It has slots for 8 modules including the CPU The CPU must be installed in slot 5 in a single CPU configuration and slots 5 and 6 in a redundant configuration see precaution above Power 5V DC Ground is supplied to the chassis from an external connector customer furnished The chassis does not support an AC or 48V DC power input The CX 1580 is designed to be rack mounted A typical front panel view of the CX 1580 is shown in Figure 1 5 2 o 7 o a 2 2 o n a o Figure 1 5 CX 1580 Cell Exchange System Chassis Specifications Size Designed for vertical mounting 12 inches high 3 5 inches wide 13 inches deep Inp
313. rsburg Slot 3 Intf Type Dual Sync Leg VPI VCI i Interface Name VPI VCI Chan Connection Name Priority Germantown 2 12 German PBX200 High F1 Execute F3 Add Connection F4 Delete Connection 14 42 CFG Con Mgmt Map ALARM eee ESC ESC Previous Figure 5 27 Connection Management Mapping Window DSL Configuring connections to and from DSL interfaces is very similar to configuring other connections see Configuring Interface Connections 1 Select the Connect Mgmt command from the Configure menu 2 configure the connections move the cursor to highlight one of the interfaces 3 Press F2 or ENTER to bring up the connection management map for that interface 4 Usethe Up Down arrow key to move to the Inact field 5 Press F3 to add a new connection or F4 to delete an existing connection Follow the steps described in Configuring Interface Connections to add new connections 6 When done press F1 or move to the EXECUTE button and press ENTER to update the configuration database and return to the main menu or UPDATE and ENTER to update the configuration and remain in this window CXUG 5 29 10 6 99 High Speed Synchronous Legacy Interface Module HSL Configuring Interfaces To configure a new interface follow the steps described in Configuring Physical Interfaces to enter the name the interface type the slot and the physical inte
314. rsions do not match no update occurs Save and Restore The Database Save and Restore operations are performed from the FTP client The FTP command FTP gt get lt filename gt saves the CX s current database configuration into the file given as filename Any filename can be used except CPUROM HEX or CPUROM BIN The FTP command FTP gt put filename restores the CX database configuration with the contents on filename Any filename can be used except CPUROM HEX or CPUROM BIN Once the database restore operation is complete the CX will reboot so that it can initialize itself with the new database configuration For step by step instructions on saving and restoring a database see Chapter 4 of this manual Boot Failsafe There is a failsafe during the reboot from a code swap If after 8 seconds the boot code detects the CPU code execution has not occurred or the CPU is not stable the system will automatically revert to the old flash image by executing a code swap This will insure a stable executing version of software If the database has been converted forward a download of the old configuration database and a nodal reboot will be required to bring the node back to its original state Procedures for Software Upgrade Software upgrade procedures will vary depending upon the version of the old software being upgraded The table below summarizes the upgrade method and file type for upgrading software versions 3 1 1 and subse
315. running Windows 95 Windows 98 or Windows NT e Terminal emulation software HyperTerminal located in Windows 95 Windows 98 or Windows NT Accessories e At least SMB of hard disk space CX Release 4 0 1 supports the FTP feature which allows users to remotely update software versions The FTP feature allows CX users to save and restore databases and upload new software from a remote location The FTP feature requires use of an FTP Client application Most simple off the shelf FTP Client applications hosted on a PC or Unix workstation will work To upgrade a Cell Exchange device and configure a workstation to manage it e Save the existing CX database upgrade the software and restore the CX database e For detailed information on creating and restoring backups see Saving a Database Using FTP and Restoring a Database Using FTP in the Operation chapter of the Synchrony Cell Exchange User s Guide e For detailed information on upgrading Cell Exchange software see the Synchrony Cell Exchange 4 0 1 release notes However not all off the shelf FTP Client applications can be used with the CX The CX has difficulty keeping up with FTP clients that send the FTP Server multiple segments at a time These sophisticated FTP Clients can be used only if configured to send one segment at a time The software upload feature requires use of both a telnet session and the FTP Client Through the Software Ver Menu screen the user selects the name of the
316. s V 35 X 21 2 048M s G 703 120Q Digital Lease Line Unstructured 2 048M s G 703 120Q Digital Lease Line Structured 2 048M s G 703 75Q Digital Lease Line U K 34M s Digital Unstructured and Structured Lease Line CXUG 10 6 99 Regulatory Guidance It is considered a criminal offence to install Telecommunications Terminal Equipment which is not approved or to install it in a non compliant manner Advice should be obtained from a competent Engineer BEFORE making Public Network Connections European Telecommunications Regulatory legislation is concerned mainly with the following aspects of connection to Public Telecommunications Networks il That all equipment in a Network connected directly or indirectly to a public network is approved and appropriately marked to show this That all equipment connected directly to a Public Network is approved for connection to the service concerned That any equipment connected directly to the Public Network does not present hazardous conditions to the network or place the user at risk from hazards present on the Public Network That the equipment used as a direct or indirect attachment to the Public Network does not affect the integrity of that Public Network That networks installed in one country but linked to international circuits comply with international agreements That the equipment approved for operation under certain conditions and connected in an acceptable manner to the Pub
317. s Community string must be at least five characters Connection lt PVC connection gt VPI VCI pair is already in use for the selected interface VPI VCI pair in use Connection lt PVC connection gt Invalid vpi vci numbers were entered e g 0 0 invalid VPI VCI choice Connection lt PVC connection gt The pvc vpi vci is already being used for a LAN Emulation VPI VCI used by SVC Client connection Management validation failed Configuration request from SNMP management failed Failure lt additional failure reason gt reasons are similar to those for Screen validation failed A typical alarm screen is shown in Figure 6 1 CXUG 10 6 99 Description Time Stamp Power Supply is up A 10 01 98 09 42 Incorrect password 10 01 98 09 42 Card is alive in slot 6 10 01 98 09 43 Card is alive in slot 11 10 01 98 09 43 Card has died in slot 6 10 01 98 10 14 Software load successful 10 01 98 13 35 SCROLL UP LINE SCROLL DOWN LINE DELETE ALL ACTIVE ALARMS ALL ALARMS SCROLL UP PAGE SCROLL DOWN PAGE Press ENTER to scroll records up one line 15 45 View Alarm Log ESC ESC Previous Figure 6 1 Alarm Log Window The operator can delete all alarms from the alarm log e Using the TAB or ARROW key move to the DELETE ALL button e Press the ENTER key Clearing alarms is at the operator s discretion but it is recommended that alarms be cleared as soon as the condition is resolved or properly isolated The alar
318. s are used to move between the different fields Beginning with the Tx Clock Out field use the down arrow key to move the cursor through each field Enter text using the keyboard The space bar is used to move through the possible selections in tumbler fields given below in parentheses starting with the default e Tx Clock Out Recovered On Board e Scramble Cells Enable Disable e Tx Trail Trace Text string of up to 15 characters placed in the transmit path and used for checking connectivity When done move to the EXECUTE button and press ENTER to update the configuration database and return to the main menu CXUG 10 6 99 Configuring Connections Connections are configured via the Connection Management menus Figure 5 22 shows the configuration management mapping window for the E3C Name Silver Spring Int A Type E3C Inact VPI VCI i Interface Name VPI VCI Chan Connection Name Priority Germantown German One High SCROLL UP LINE SCROLL DOWN LINE SCROLL UP PAGE SCROLL DOWN PAGE Press ENTER to update the config database andreturnto the Main Menu 11 22 CFG Con Mgmt Map ALARM fries ESC ESC Previous Figure 5 22 Configuration Management Mapping Window E3C Configuring connections to and from E3C interfaces is very similar to configuring other connections see Configuring Interface Connections 1 Select the Connect Mgmt command from the Configure menu 2 con
319. s for LANE or Classical IP below Configuring Cell Exchange Devices for LANE or Classical IP LANE 16 of 29 The following sections provide introductory information on LANE and Classical IP and procedures for configuring a CX network to use LANE or Classical IP mulation LANE Many organizations are migrating networks to ATM to meet rising demands for bandwidth The challenge is how to support existing Ethernet and Token Ring LANs while migrating to ATM or integrating ATM only for parts of the network Users want applications to run transparently over the network whether it is an Ethernet Token Ring or ATM LAN LAN switches are an economical way to increase bandwidth without requiring expensive changes to adapters wiring network software or applications LAN switches can deliver high speed dedicated connections to individual users and combine bandwidth for better performance LAN switches also enable the creation of virtual LANs VLANs groupings of users based on logical function rather than physical location In networks that incorporate both ATM and existing LAN technology LAN to ATM conversion functions become important LAN Emulation LANE provides one option for this conversion LANE is a bridging protocol that makes a connection oriented ATM network look and behave like a shared connectionless Ethernet or Token Ring LAN segment LANE can handle both routable protocols such as TCP IP IPX and DECnet as well as non rout
320. same as with legacy LAN technologies such as Ethernet Classical IP over ATM is a straightforward protocol that is easy to understand and implement for net managers familiar with configuring IP nets Classical IP can run over both ATM permanent virtual circuits PVCs and switched virtual circuits SVCs It also supports logical IP subnets and allows net managers to define ATM quality of service features on a subnet by subnet basis Perhaps the most significant virtue of Classical IP over ATM is its simplicity In a simple PVC network IP addresses are mapped to virtual circuits or virtual connections manually The user configures each station with a local address table that specifies which virtual connection corresponds to each IP address on the ATM network MX17358 1 4 30 00 19 of 29 Classical IP over ATM requires no changes to a conventional router based internetwork Classical IP can be routed in the same way as conventional IP packets are forwarded from the originator to a router and from router to router until reaching the final destination Along the way the IP header and upper layer protocols and data remain essentially unchanged The prerequisite for two ATM stations to communicate with each other over an ATM network is that each station knows the other stations ATM address When a workstation starts up it does not know which other workstations are on the network and as it cannot broadcast to every station on the network another way
321. se shown in Figure 4 40 CXUG 4 56 10 6 99 4 wire Analog Interface Module EML CXUG 10 6 99 To view the statistics for the 4 wire Analog Interface Module EML select Module Status from the View menu More information can be obtained for a particular module by highlighting the module and pressing lt F2 gt This will bring up the logical interface screen for this module similar to Figure 4 38 Additional information for each logical interface can be obtained by highlighting the interface and pressing lt F2 gt which will bring up the screen shown in Figure 4 59 Name EML 5 Slot 5 Int Type 4 Wire EML Interface Type SF Card Status Up Receive Gain AMI Port Status Up Transmit Gain 0 0 Loopback NO Mode Network PCM Samples 0 4 Wire gt ATM Cells 0 Law mu Local Hook Status On Hook 4 Wire lt ATM Cells 0 Remote Signaling 00 Discarded Cells 0 CD Signaling 00 Discard Cell Secs 0 TxC 0 Last Statistics RxC 0 Reset Hour 23 00 REFRESH CELL STATS 10 01 View Intf 4 Wire ALARM RIO KORR ESC ESC Previous Figure 4 59 Specific Interface Window 4 Wire EML Interface Type Reflects user selection from the configuration window Receive Gain Reflects user selection from the configuration window Transmit Gain Reflects user selection from the configuration window Mode Reflects user selection from the configuration window PCM Samples Number of s
322. sh an FTP session onto any CX node in the network by initiating an FTP session to the CPU IP address within the node At the password prompt the user must enter the Administrator level password on the craft interface in order to establish an FTP session An incorrect password entry will result in termination of the FTP session From the FTP session a user may GET the NVRAM file PUT an NVRAM file or PUT a software flash image The file name for the software flash image is cpurom hex The status of file transmissions is monitored by the FTP session itself No SNMP support is available in CX to configure monitor or control the FTP session The procedure for software upgrade using FTP or Craft interface is described in Chapter 2 Saving a Database Using FTP 4 28 You can save back up the configuration database that resides on the CPU of a CX 1500 or CX 1540 device remotely using FTP The following instructions assume you are using Windows 95 Windows NT or an HP UX workstation To save a CX database to a file using FTP CXUG 10 6 99 4 Open an MS DOS window or xterm window as appropriate and path to the directory where you want the backed up file to reside on your PC Start an FTP session From a DOS command prompt enter ftp IPAddress of the CX node being accessed From an HP UX command prompt enter ftp B 1 IPAddress When prompted to log in enter the level 3 password as the user name default admin and pre
323. shed via the connection management menu See Configuring Connections in Chapter 5 The Cell Exchange allows any channel group to be connected to Any VPI VCI of any configured cell bearing interface e Any compatible SEL channel group any channel group that carries the same type of traffic voice or data and contains the same number of channels The SEL utilizes an AAL1 Segmentation And Reassembly SAR processor to pass data to and from the ATM network In Figure 3 69 two connections have been established between an E1 interface and the ATM network In this example E1 channels 2 13 and 18 are mapped to one VPI VCI pair and channels 3 15 27 are mapped to another VPI VCI pair Figures 3 70 and 3 71 show other possible connections MX17358 1 4 30 00 5 of 29 SEL b SEL SAR 4or8El d IL Interfaces 1 7 18 7 4H pt channel ON groups Network x TUS 32 X VPINCI 4 is 76 1 4 2 SEL 4 8 Two SEL to VPI VCI connections Figure 3 69 SEL Connection Using Two VPI VCI Pairs 4or8 Interfaces SEL SAR 1 N 2 joe ATM N El 64K x30 X VPI VCI art a channel Network X group S n 32 32 x 7 All 30 payload timeslots mapped to one VPI VCI pair non payload timeslots 1 and 16 carry framing and signa
324. signal Internal means the transmit clock is supplied by the main CPU board Ref Clock means the transmit clock is supplied by the currently configured reference clock source see Setting System Timing On Board means the transmit clock is supplied by the module s on board clock source Setting System Timing To select the timing reference for the Cell Exchange systems select the System Timing command from the Main Menu This will bring up the screen shown in Figure 5 7 Reference Interface Reference Clock on Interface Rx CLock Select interface for system timing reference 09 57 CFG Sys Timing ESC ESC Previous Figure 5 7 System Timing Window 1 Move the cursor to the Reference Interface field This is a tumbler field Pressing the SPACE bar will move between the available selections NOTE The entry indicates that the REFERENCE OUT is by the CPU and is the same as INTERNAL 5 6 CXUG 10 6 99 2 Tab to Reference Clock on Interface field This is also a tumbler field Pressing the SPACE bar will move between selections Rx Clock TX Clock 3 When done tab or arrow to the EXECUTE button and press ENTER to save and execute the system timing references Network Clocking When configuring the Cell Exchange to handle synchronous legacy traffic special attention needs to be paid to timing The OC3 E3C and DS3 modules cannot accept timing from the system timing on the node
325. sk may be entered into this field This field represents the subnet mask of the ATM interface for this HRIM NOTE This window has a secondary window associated with it Care must be taken that the configuration shown in the primary window is the one desired moving to the secondary window automatically accepts or executes the configuration displayed in the primary window Channel Configuration 5 36 Selecting the Channel Config button will bring up the channel configuration screen shown in Figure 5 34 The channel configuration screen will allow the user to define an IP channel on the HRIM ATM interface There may be a total of up to 32 IP interfaces These IP channels define how LAN traffic is routed to a remote Ethernet LAN HRIM a remote CX CPU or another IP router supporting classical IP This IP channel will be coupled to a VPI VCI pair of the HRIM ATM interface and navigated through the ATM network via standard VPI VCI connection connection screen The HRIM supports RFC 1463 Multiprotocol over IP IP routed only and 1577 Classical IP NOTE All channels established in the management screens are referenced by the names assigned by the system operator The operator should exercise caution When changes are made on the management screen they are implemented on the system database and will immediately reset the module Since these changes can be implemented on active channels any changes should be made carefully b
326. slots in the CX 1500 Cell Exchange system are populated overheating may occur if ventilation fans are not installed Figure 1 7 Cell Exchange with Stacking Fan Unit 1 16 CXUG 10 6 99 Performance Characteristics The physical electrical and environmental characteristics of the Cell Exchange system are shown in Tables 1 2 to 1 4 Table 1 2 Physical Electrical and Environmental Characteristics CX 1500 Category Standard Characteristics System Capacity Case with backplane Up to 14 interface modules AC power supply DC power supply CPU Module Redundant power supply 15 empty slots Redundant CPU module Enclosure Size 5 25 high 19 wide and 13 deep Same as standard Chassis Weight 22 32 pounds depending upon Same as standard configuration Clearance Requirements 1 75 above and below case required Same as standard for ventilation 90 230 VAC 47 63 Hz 2 0 amps 38 to 60 VDC 5 0 amps Operating Environment 0 50 C Same as standard Up to 85 relative humidity non condensing at 50 C Table 1 3 Physical Electrical and Environmental Characteristics CX 1540 Category Standard Characteristics System Capacity Case with backplane Up to 3 interface modules AC power supply CPU Module 3 empty slots UT 175 high 19 wide and 127 deep Chassis Weight 8 11 pounds depending upon Same as standard Clearance Requirements 1 75 above case required for Same as standar
327. sor Power Section The Cell Bus Microprocessor Power section of the Basic Interface Module consists of the following e ATM Cell Bus Switching Logic IC ATM Cell Bus Switch along with a RAM IC provides connectivity to the backplane board e 96 Pin DIN connector used to connect onto the ATM Cell Bus e Motorola 80C31 microprocessor e Capacitor filtering provided for control and noise suppression Unique Functionality Section The Basic Interface Module includes the following unique functions e Module supports two complete independent synchronous channels e High speed AAL1 segmentation and reassembly function A functional block diagram of the Basic Interface Module is shown in Figure 3 64 ATM CELL BUS Daughterboard TYPE SWITCH FUNCTIONS CPU 80C31 FILTERS E 2 2 Q 2 a Figure 3 64 Basic Interface Module Functional Block Diagram 3 82 CXUG 10 6 99 Jumper Settings The jumper settings listed are factory set defaults No user configuration is required Jumper Pins P7 1 2 Specifications Port Capacity Electrical Port Speed Connector Data Format Timing Status amp Statistics Diagnostics Supports two synchronous channels Provided by daughterboard Programmable at 9 6 12 8 19 2 25 6 or 38 4 Kbps and n 8 Kbps with a range from 8 Kbps to 4 096 Mbps Provided by daughterboard ATM Cells Reference Internal External Standard status and sta
328. ss ENTER when prompted for a password Enter the command get filename where filename is the name of the file you are saving the database to This can be any name except CPUROM HEX or CPUROM BIN 8 the save operation is complete quit the FTP session by entering quit Restoring a Database Using FTP Alarms CXUG 10 6 99 You can restore the database from a previously saved file for a remote CX device using FTP To restore a database to a CX device using FTP 1 4 Open an MS DOS window or xterm window as appropriate and path to the directory where you want the backed up file to reside on your PC Start an FTP session Froma DOS command prompt enter ftp IPAddress From HP UX command prompt enter ftp B 1 IPAddress When prompted to log in enter the level 3 password for the user name default admin and press ENTER when prompted for a password Enter the command put filename where filename is the name of the file you restoring This can be any name except CPUROM HEX or CPUROM BIN 5 Once the restore operation is complete quit the FTP session by entering quit Alarm messages are displayed on the prompt line When an alarm condition occurs or clears a brief message appears lasting about 5 seconds At the same time the string ALARM appears in the status line This string will remain until all alarms are cleared If multiple alarms occur simultaneously the alarms will be
329. sses it to from ATM cell bearing equipment Monitors the physical interface Collects module performance statistics Accepts synchronous non cell legacy traffic and converts the data to ATM CBR cells Places the cells on the ATM cell bus Monitors the physical interface Collects module performance statistics Accepts synchronous non cell legacy traffic and converts the data to ATM CBR cells Places the cells on the ATM cell bus Monitors the physical interface Collects module performance statistics Accepts synchronous non cell legacy traffic and converts the data to ATM CBR cells Places the cells on the ATM cell bus Monitors the physical interface Collects module performance statistics Allows IP Ethernet traffic to be integrated into an ATM network Provides 4 or 8 RJ 45 and 1 BNC physical connectors As a hub each physical connector shares a configurable portion of the aggregate bandwidth Accepts asynchronous non cell legacy traffic and converts the data to ATM AAL5 cells Places the cells on the ATM cell bus Monitors the physical interface Collects module performance statistics Optionally provides reliable transport 3 3 3 4 Table 3 1 Module Summary Cont d Non Cell Bearing Interface Modules Cont d component ncn Unstructured T1 E1 Legacy Interface Module UTEL Unstructured DS3 T3 Legacy Interface Module UD3L Unstructured Legacy Interface Module UE3L Basic Interface Module
330. stalled or damage to the module may result If a DC Power Supply Module is inadvertently plugged into an AC chassis the internal fuse on the power supply will CXUG 3 9 10 6 99 blow If an AC module is plugged into a DC chassis nothing will happen and there will be no indication of any activity NOTE The only way to determine whether the CX1500 chassis is designed for the AC or DC Power Supply Module is to look at the rear panel AC power distribution within the CX 1500 is relatively simple Standard AC power is received at the backplane of the chassis and transferred via the power connector interface to the Power Supply Module The Power Supply Module converts the AC input to 5 VDC for transistor transistor logic TTL use then sends it to a voltage regulator and the backplane bus The voltage regulator reduces the 5 VDC input to a 1 2 VDC output for Gunning Transistor Logic GTL use There are three signal components to the DC power output 5 VDC TTL 1 2 VDC GTL and ground A functional block diagram of the AC power supply module is shown in Figure 3 5 GTL POWER VR SUPPLY DIN CONNECTOR Figure 3 5 AC Power Supply Module Functional Block Diagram Specifications 3 10 Input Voltage 90 to 230 VAC Input Frequency 47 to 63 Hz Input Current 2 0 amps CX 1500 or 0 8 amps CX 1540 Output Voltages 5 VDC TTL 1 2 VDC GTL CXUG 10 6 99 Indicators m um ce Wes
331. status indication Press lt F2 gt to enter the interface configuration menu Figure 5 30 shows the interface configuration menu with all fields set to the default values Intf Name Rockville Slot 11 Intf A Intf Type HSSL Data Rate 8000 Adaptive Clock No Use TT No Invert ST No ST and RT Clock Source Internal ST Source Normal EXECUTE Press EN TER To update the config database andreturnto the Main Menu 11 44 CFG Intf HSSL ALARM ESC ESC Previous Figure 5 30 Interface Configuration Window HSSL The arrow keys are used to move between the different fields Beginning at the Data Rate field the down arrow key can be used to move the cursor through each field in the order shown Enter text in the edit field using the keyboard The space bar is used to move through the possible selections which are given below in parentheses starting with the default Data Rate edit field Adaptive Clock No Yes Use TT No Yes Invert ST No Yes ST and RT Clock Source Internal Ref Clock External ST Source Normal From RT CXUG 10 6 99 Configuring Connections Connections are configured via the Connection Management menus see Configuring Interface Connections Configuring connections to and from synchronous legacy interfaces is very similar to configuring other connections Figure 5 31 shows the configuration map for a HSSL interface Name Rockville Slot 11 Intf A Typ
332. t on the CPU module provides Data Bus timing Its function is to transfer ATM Cell traffic to and from installed modules in the Cell Exchange system chassis Channel Port Timing Channel Port Timing represents the various timing reference signals that may be selected on a particular interface module residing in the Cell Exchange system Normally the reference signal dictates how the timing on that particular channel port will operate The following timing options are available to various interface modules although not all options are used on all modules Recovered Timing Adaptive Timing On Board Timing Send Timing Reference Timing Receive Timing Internal Timing Recovered Timing In digital networks the high speed network interface circuit connected to the service provider s network is normally used as the master timing reference This digital interface is referenced in multiple geographic locations throughout the service provider s network to a reference source 1 Stratum 1 which provides the network with a highly reliable and stable timing source This timing source can be used as a timing source for the Cell Exchange system CXUG 10 6 99 During initial configurations the user can choose this timing source on most of the interface modules by selecting the interface circuit A B C D connected to the service provider and setting it as the reference timing source Most modules have the capability to recov
333. t session 12 Start a new telnet session with the CX and log into the Cell Exchange system as admin 13 Select Software Ver and observe that the new version is displayed the screen 14 If the new version is to be used move the cursor to select the new version 15 Press the lt F2 gt function key After a short delay the new version will load into the CPU and subsequently to all installed interface modules Other versions of the software are selected and made active in the same manner Loading New Software Using Xmodem These procedures describe upgrading software from version 4 0 to 4 0 and subsequent versions For upgrading versions prior to 4 0 see Table 2 1 and the Release Notes In Version 4 0 files may also be transferred using Xmodem Xmodem is used to transfer binary files To set up for Xmodem transfer 1 Log in with the appropriate password default is admin 2 Select Software Ver from the Configure menu Figure 2 10 CXUG 10 6 99 2 15 2 16 Di al 3 alal Connect Mgmt Multicast Interface Date Time Location Name Admin Ports System Timing System Reset Passwords STE SNMP Press ENTER F2 to go to the Software Version configuration screen 15 54 Main Menu JCOXOCOCOOOOOOOOOOE Q to Logout n Connected 0 18 10 100 9600 8 1 SCROLL CAPS Capture Print echo Figure 2 10 Configure Menu 3 When the window shown in Figu
334. tach required cable s to module connector s 5 Some modules may have fiber optic components carefully observe the following PRECAUTION Working with fiber optic cables can be hazardous to personnel and if mishandled can cause permanent damage to the cables WARNING THE FIBER OPTIC CONNECTORS MAY EMIT LASER LIGHT THAT CAN INJURE YOUR EYES NEVER LOOK INTO AN OPTICAL FIBER CONNECTOR OR CABLE CXUG 10 6 99 Software Installation Diskette Installation Installation instructions for the CPU software file are included in the readme txt file on the first diskette See the Release notes for details Software Upgrade Requirements Software upgrade requires IBM compatible PC running Windows 95 Windows 98 or Windows NT Terminal emulation software HyperTerminal located in Windows 95 Windows 98 or Windows NT Accessories At least 5MB of hard disk space CX Release 4 0 supports the FTP feature which allows users to remotely update software versions through an IP or LANE interface The FTP feature allows CX users to save and restore databases and upload new software from a remote location The FTP feature requires use of an FTP Client application Most simple off the shelf FTP Client applications will work hosted on a PC or Unix workstation However not all off the shelf FTP Client applications can be used with the CX The CX has difficulty keeping up with FTP clients that send the FTP Server multiple segments at a time Th
335. talled in accordance with the user manual instructions meets the requirements of the European Electromagnetic Low Voltage and Telecommunications Terminal Directive and may be connected to the Public Telecommunications Networks of the European Union Countries CEG The equipment when correctly installed in accordance with the user manual instructions meets the requirements of the European Electromagnetic Low Voltage and Telecommunications Terminal Directive but cannot be connected to the pan European Public Telecommunications Networks of the European Union Countries CELI Where CE 15 a National Approval Label implies the equipment when correctly installed in accordance with the user manual instructions meets the requirements of the European Electromagnetic and Low Voltage Directives and in addition has been granted Public Network Attachment Approval in those countries whose labels are affixed NOTE Refer to the country specific sections of this regulatory section to determine the National Attachment Approvals granted to the equipment Timeplex Inc has endeavored to undertake the mandatory TYPE APPROVAL TESTING of Public Network Interfaces on their products to both Pan European and selected country specific requirements Certificates and reports permitting the CE marking of the products Placed On The European Market and the Public Network Attachment Approval Certificates associated with National Interfaces are held on file by
336. tatistics Reset Hour 13 00 REFRESH HISTORY 14 52 View Intf E1C ALARM kkkkkkkkkk ESC ESC Previous Figure 4 45 Specific Interface Window E1C The entries in this window are the same as the TIC Selecting the lt HISTORY gt button provides statistics for this module similar to those shown in Figure 4 40 4 42 CXUG 10 6 99 E3 Cell Interface Module E3C CXUG 10 6 99 To view the statistics for the E3 Cell Interface Module select Module Status from the View menu More information can be obtained for a particular module by highlighting the module and pressing lt F2 gt This will bring up the logical interface screen for this module similar to Figure 4 38 Information for each logical interface can be obtained by highlighting the interface and pressing lt F2 gt which will bring up the screen shown in Figure 4 46 Name Elk Grove Slot 11 Intf A Type Cell Loss of Signal gt Cells Loss of Frame HEC Error Cells Hardware Failure Misrouted Cells Loss of Cell Sync lt Cells Loss of Cell Delineation Discarded Cells E3 AIS Discard Cell Secs E3 RFI Payload Type Mismatch Trail Trace Mismatch Last Statistics Reset Hour Card Status Interface Status Loopback REFRESH HISTORY 14 52 View Intf ESC ESC ESC Previous Figure 4 46 Sp
337. tatus This menu provides information on LAN Emulation Client LEC status The LEC Status window displays the statistics accumulated by the LANE client in the CPU Selecting this menu item brings up the window shown in Figure 4 12 LEC Status Config Req Sent Config Req Rev Config Resp Sent Config Resp Rev Register Req Sent Register Req Rcv Register Resp Sent Register Resp Rev ARP Req Sent ARP Req Rcv ARP Resp Sent ARP Resp Rcv NARP Req Sent NARP Req Rcv Up 16843009 16843009 16843009 16843009 16843009 16843009 16843009 16843009 16843009 16843009 16843009 16843009 16843009 16843009 REFRESH Ready Ind Sent Ready Ind Rev Ready Queries Sent Ready Queries Rcv Tx Data Frames Discarded Rx Data Frames Discarded 16843009 16843009 16843009 16843009 16843009 16843009 16 25 View LEC Status ALARM dee ke eee ESC ESC Previous Figure 4 12 LEC Status Window from View Menu To clear the statistics use the arrow key s to highlight the CLEAR button and press the ENTER key This action resets all the SNMP statistics to zero To refresh the screen use the arrow key s to highlight the REFRESH button and press the ENTER key this will display the current accumulated values 4 12 CXUG 10 6 99 SNMP Stats This menu allows the user to view statistical information collected from the network management system
338. te lebe eo tote 6 5 Figure 6 2 Path Connectivity 6 6 Figure 6 3 Loopback Window from Diagnostics 22 22 24000 6 8 Figure 6 4 Loopback Data F OT EL ee 6 8 Figure 7 1 Removal of a Cell Exchange System Module Power Supply eese 7 2 ATM Cell Str ct re etit ette ete te ce etes Ee pe eet Le e eee te e eae bet baa L ELE oe de A 2 Figure 2 ATM Reference 3 Figure 3 Service Classification for A 4 Figure B 1 CPU Craft Interface to VT 100 Terminal Non redundant B 5 Figure B 2 CPU Craft Interface to B 6 Figure B 3 DSC DSL HSL SCM Modules to RS 530 V 11 613008 X Sheet 1 of 2 B 7 Figure B 3 DSC DSL HSL SCM Modules to RS 530 V 11 613009 X Sheet 2 B 8 Figure B 4 DSL HSL Modules DCE to LINK 2 or entr eLINK ILC Module 613004 X B 9 Figure 5 DSL HSL SCM Modules to RS 449 613005 X Sheet 1 2 1 1 B 10 Figure B 5 DSL HSL SCM Modules to RS 449 613006 X Sheet 2 B 11 Figure B 6 DSL HSL SCM Module to V 35 613003 X Sheet 1 of 2 B 12 Figure B 6 DSL HSL SCM Module
339. tf A Type Dual T1 Cell VPI VCI i Interface Name VPI VCI Chan Connection Name Priority SCROLL UP LINE SCROLL DOWN LINE SCROLL UP PAGE SCROLL DOWN PAGE Press ENTER to update the config database and return to the Main Menu 09 52 CFG Con Mgmt Map ALARM ESC ESC Previous Figure 5 9 Configuration Management Mapping Menu This screen shows the connection mapping for the selected interface Dual T1 Cell Interface Moving the cursor to the affected line enters connection data for each interface 1 Position cursor in the Inact field This is a toggle field press the SPACE bar to toggle between active blank or inactive modes 2 Tab to the VPI field for the input interface and enter the appropriate value VPI values are in the range 0 255 3 Tab to the VCI field and enter a value If the VPI value is 0 39 the VCI may be 0 255 or the special character indicating a VPI only translation In the latter case the VCI is passed through unchanged If the VPI value is greater than 39 the VCI passes the VPI without translation 4 Tab to the Direction field and select the connection s traffic direction This is a tumbler field press the SPACE bar to move between the three possible directions to from or bi directional 5 Tab to the Interface Name field and select the connection s interface This is a tumbler field press the SPACE bar to move through the available entries
340. th Restricted Rights Use duplication or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph c 1 ii of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFARS 252 227 7013 or subparagraph c 2 of the Commercial Computer Software Restricted Rights at CFR 52 227 19 as applicable All documentation other than software documentation which are provided with Restricted Rights are provided with Limited Rights U S Government rights to use duplicate or disclose documentation other than software documentation are governed by the restrictions defined in paragraph a 15 of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFARS 252 227 7013 and FAR 52 227 19 DFARS is the Department of Defense Supplement to the Federal Acquisition Regulation Manufacturer is Timeplex Inc 1619 North Harrison Parkway Sunrise Florida 33323 2802 The information in this document is subject to change without notice Revisions may be issued at such time VT100 is a registered trademark of Digital Equipment Corporation Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation Express Routing and LINK 100 are trademarks of Timeplex Inc ProComm is a registered trademark of Datastorm Technologies Incorporated Intel is a registered trademark of Intel Corporation Timeplex Synchrony Express Switching LINK 2 and entr eLINK are registered trademarks of Timeplex Inc NOTICE Telecomm
341. tion Follow the steps described in Configuring Interface Connections to add new connections 6 When done press F1 or move to the EXECUTE button and press ENTER to update the configuration database and return to the main menu or UPDATE and ENTER to update the configuration and remain in this window CXUG 5 19 10 6 99 E1 Cell Interface Module E1C Configuring Interfaces To configure a new interface follow the steps described in Configuring Physical Interfaces Enter the name the interface type E1C the slot the physical interface A and the status indicator Press lt F2 gt to enter the configuration menu Figure 5 19 shows the E1C configuration menu with all fields set to the default values Intf Name Crisfield Slot 5 Intf A Type E1C Framing CAS CRC4 Line Build Out Equal 75 Norm Err Sec Threshold 100 Scramble Cells Disable Tx Clock Out Recovered EXECUTE Press ENTER To update the config database andreturnto the Main Menu 09 52 CFG Intf EiC ESC ESC Previous Figure 5 19 Interface Configuration Window E1C To configure this interface position the cursor on the Framing field by using the up and down arrow keys The arrow keys are used to move between the different fields Use the down arrow key to move the cursor through each field The space bar is used to move through the possible selections given below in parentheses starting wit
342. tistics provided Terminal Loopback Bi directional Power lt 7 watts Indicators Type Label Color Meaning LED OPNL Green Illuminates when operational code begins running after the boot CXUG 10 6 99 process is complete Blinks during operational code download Off No power to module BIM failed CPU failed 3 83 4 wire Analog Interface Module EML Overview The 4 wire Analog Interface Module allows the user to connect 4 wire E amp M interfaces to co located lines data lines through modems and switched voice lines for small capacity applications The CX itself does not support call by call switching of voice circuits but will pass supervisory and addressing information end to end Note The EML does not provide any echo control External solutions may be required in some applications The 4 wire Analog Interface Module will support 2 voice channels The module is intended for use in a point to point environment using an ATM network to provide WAN transport A front panel view of the 4 Wire EML Module is shown in Figure 3 65 Figure 3 65 4 wire Analog Interface Module EML The 4 wire Analog Interface Module performs the following primary functions e Takes voice analog input and converts it to a 64 Kbps PCM signal e Translates the PCM signal to AAL cell format for transmission across the ATM network e Supports connections between E amp M analog and T1 E1 DSO interfaces 3 84 CXUG 10 6 99
343. to 19 dBm in 0 1 dBm increments Interface Type V I II Law mu A See note Reference Select Internal Ref Clock Configuration requirements for the law parameter are as follows lt gt The law parameter must be the same for each end If one end has the CD signaling parameter set to AB the other end must also be set to AB All combinations of fixed patterns are interchangeable 5 55 amp STL The law parameter must be set to mu law The CD signaling parameter must be set to AB SEL The law parameter must be set to A law The CD signaling parameter must be set to one of the fixed patterns Configuring Connections 5 56 Connections are configured via the Connection Management menus see Configuring Interface Connections Configuring connections to and from synchronous legacy interfaces is very similar to configuring other connections Figure 5 53 shows the configuration map for 4 Wire interface Name EML 5 Slot 5 Int A Type 4 Wire EML VPI VCI i Interface Name VPI VCI Chan Connection Name Priority 1 Catonsville CatonOne High SCROLL UP LINE SCROLL DOWN LINE SCROLL UP PAGE SCROLL DOWN PAGE Press ENTER to update the config database andreturn to the Main Menu 12 43 CFG Con Mgmt Map ALARM ESC ESC Previous Figure 5 53 Connection Management Mapping Window 4 Wire EML Configuring connections to and from 4 Wire EML inter
344. to V 35 613007 X Sheet 2 B 13 Figure B 7 STL Module to LINK 2 BFM BIM 1 Modules LINK 100 DLI 1 Module entr eLINK CSU Module or ST D Panel 4 PRI to CSU Smart Jack Straight 610127 X essen nnne nennen B 14 Figure B 8 to CSU Smart Jack Crossover 610126 X sess B 14 Figure B 9 STL Module to ST D Panel 4 PRI TIM E1M Via BIM PBX Cable to CSU Smart Jack Straight Via DSX 1 CSU Cable 61362 B 15 Figure B 10 STL Via BADP Cable to ST D Panel 4 DSX 1 61359 B 15 Figure B 11 Via BADP Cable to CSU Smart Jack Crossover 61385 B 16 Figure B 12 DS3 Module DS3 45 Mbps Service 120405 X essen B 16 Figure B 13 Module to 155 Mbps SONET Single Mode Fiber 0004 B 16 Figure B 14 Module to 155 Mbps SONET Multimode Fiber FOXNO005 B 17 Figure B 15 DSC Module to V 11 X 21 613012 79 6 B 17 Figure B 16 IEEE 802 3 Ethernet II Cable 001 1 B 18 Figure B 17 LSAL to 25 Pin DTE Male B 18 Figure B 18 LSAL to 25 Pin DTE Female B 19 Fig re B
345. tor A functional block diagram of the Synchronous Legacy Interface Module is shown in Figure 3 43 INTERFACE ATM CELL Bl DRIVERS amp RECEIVERS BUSS m SWITCH INTERFACE TYPE DRIVERS amp RECEIVERS FUNCTIONS CPU 80C31 FILTERS DIN CONNECTOR Figure 3 43 High Speed Synchronous Legacy Interface Module Functional Block Diagram 3 56 CXUG 10 6 99 Jumper Settings The jumper settings listed are factory set defaults No user configuration is required Jumper Pins J3 1 2 All other pins are open not connected Specifications Port Capacity One Media Shielded Multi twisted pair cable low capacitance Electrical EIA 530 which provides EIA 422 electrical interface this is a DCE interface connecting to DTE Connector HDB 26 Female Line Format Balanced Data Format Serial Synchronous Data Rates 128 Kbps 20 Mbps in 8 Kbps increments NOTE Maximum data rate is dependent on cable length For estimated data rates versus cable lengths see the description in EIA 422 Timing Internal External Ref Clock Diagnostics Facility Loopback Terminal Loopback Alarm Surveillance Applicable Standards ITU T 1 432 af phy 0043 000 Indicators Type Label Color Meaning LED OPNL Green Illuminates when operational code begins running after the boot process is complete Blinks during operational code download LED SYNC Red Off n
346. trol signaling CTS Status of control signaling Tx Frames Number of AALS frames transmitted Rx Frames Number of AALS frames received SDU Discards Number of SDU discards due to buffer overrun Retry Events Number of attempts to retransmit SDU CXUG 10 6 99 Link Resets Number of times the ARQ link is reinitialized Link State Indicates the current state of the ARQ link Setup indicates the link is initializing Open indicates the link is established Retry indicates the link is reinitializing Closed indicates ARQ is off The remaining entries are the same as previously described Selecting the lt HISTORY gt button provides statistics for this module similar to those shown in Figure 4 40 CXUG 4 51 10 6 99 Unstructured T1 Legacy Interface Module UTL To view the statistics for the Unstructured T1 Legacy Interface Module UTL select Module Status from the View menu More information can be obtained for a particular module by highlighting the module and pressing lt F2 gt This will bring up the logical interface screen for this module similar to Figure 4 38 Additional information for each logical interface can be obtained by highlighting the interface and pressing lt F2 gt which will bring up the screen shown in Figure 4 54 This screen contains information that is tailored to the interface Intf Name Damascus Slot 9 Intf A Intf Type Unstructured T1 Card Status Up UTL gt ATM Ce
347. tter Amplitude UI p p Meets Bellcore s requirement from TR NWT 000253 3 22 CXUG 10 6 99 Indicators Type Label Color Meaning LED OPNL Green Illuminates when operational code begins running after the boot process is complete Blinks during operational code download LED Rx Syn Green Indicates that the module has achieved frame synchronization with the received OC3 when lit loss of frame synchronization when extinguished LED Ce Syn Green Indicates that the module has achieved synchronization with the ATM cell HEC in the received OC3 payload when lit loss of cell synchronization when extinguished Pinouts Pinouts for the SC connector are as shown in Figure 3 15 CXUG 10 6 99 lol Ol Figure 3 15 SC Duplex Connector 3 23 OC3C Cell Interface Module OC3C Overview The OC3C Cell Interface Module terminates an OC3C facility interface recovers clock accesses the ATM cells within the SONET payload and provides these cells to the Cell Exchange system switching fabric The OC3C module is available in either single or multimode configuration The OC3C Cell Interface Module is part of a broad group of standard Interface Modules that have been developed for the Cell Exchange system The OC3C Cell Module allows the Cell Exchange system to interface with ATM switches Engineering Workstations and ATM cell bearing transmission systems The data rate is 1
348. u When the window appears move to select the HRIM card and press F2 The window shown in Figure 4 30 will appear T MX1500 HyperTerminal File Edit View Call Transfer Help x Dia 5135 sole el Slot 5 Intf A Type Hub Router Dir Interface Name UPI UCI Chan Connection Name i1 34 SCROLL UP LINE N SCROLL DOWN LINE SCROLL UP PAGE SCROLL DOWN PAGE Fi Execute F3 fidd Connection F4 Delete Connection Optional Enter alphanumeric string with a max of 15 characters CFG Con Mgmt ESC ESC Priority HIGH Previous Connected 0 17 40 vT100 360081 SCROLL CAPS NUM Capture Print echo Figure 4 30 Connection Management Window CXUG 10 6 99 8 Use the ARROW keys to move into the connection mapping area Move to Chan and toggle until 2 appears In a similar fashion set the Dir and Interface fields Enter the VPI and VCI values for incoming ATM access to the CPU 9 Move to EXECUTE and press ENTER to update the database and return to the main menu From the remote node execute the following steps Return to the main menu and select SNMP from the Configure menu The screen shown in Figure 4 31 will appear Te 1500 HyperTerminal OY x File Edit View Call Transfer Help Community Strings Read public Write public Trap public LANE IP Interface ds3 12 Service Type IP Telnet Disconnect Timeout 388 779 EXECUTE Press ENTER
349. uch great care is required when including an STL channel group in a multicast All of the limitations described above apply Effectively two STL channel groups belonging to the same multicast group must consist of the same port interface and the same starting channel on two different STL cards NOTE HRIM channels must be configured as bi directional This precludes the use of HRIM channels in a multicast since a multicast is inherently unidirectional 5 60 CXUG 10 6 99 Chapter 6 Troubleshooting Alarms and Traps Traps SNMP traps are issued for alarm events and can be sent to up to three IP addresses programmed within the node Traps include e Power Supply Up e Power Supply Down e Interface Up e Interface Down e Board Up e Board Down e Incorrect Board Configuration Alarms Craft Interface CXUG 10 6 99 Normally the first indication of a malfunction will be an alarm display An alarm is any out of parameter condition detected during Cell Exchange operation If such a condition is detected an alarm message is generated and placed in the alarm queue and an alarm indicator is displayed on the status line The alarm indicator provides the operator with an indication that an alarm has been generated since the last time the current list of alarms was viewed This serves as an alarm acknowledgment mechanism for the operator The operator can view the current list of alarms held in the alarm queue by selecting the
350. ule by highlighting the module and pressing lt F2 gt This will bring up the logical interface screen for this module similar to Figure 4 38 Additional information for each logical interface can be obtained by highlighting the interface and pressing lt F2 gt which will bring up the screen shown in Figure 4 50 This screen contains information that is tailored to the interface Name Rockville Slot 11 Int Type High Speed Sync Leg Card Status Up HSL gt ATM Cells 0 Interface Status Up Loopback No HSL lt ATM Cells Discarded Cells Discard Cell Secs Out of Sync Events Last Statistics Out of Seq Cells Reset Hour 23 00 Invalid Cells Corrected Cells Buffer Events REFRESH HISTORY 08 01 View Intf HSL ALARM PE e ESC ESC Previous Figure 4 50 Specific Interface Window High Speed Sync Leg Out of Sync Events Number of instances when invalid cells were received Out of Seq Cells Number of cells received where the internal sequence was out of order Invalid Cells Number of cells received containing uncorrectable errors Corrected Cells Number of errored cells that were corrected Buffer Events Number of instances of buffer overrun underrun The remaining entries are as previously described Selecting the HISTORY button provides statistics for this module similar to those shown in Figure 4 40 CXUG 4 47 10 6 99 High Speed Se
351. uminate Other Modules Information on the front panel indicators for other Cell Exchange system modules is provided in Chapter 3 Modules If any module indicator is not indicating normal operation for that module the module may be defective User initiated Tests CXUG 10 6 99 The user can diagnose a range of system components from a single interface module to network connectivity The operator can control each data port s role in the diagnostic procedure Each port has the capability to loop the data traffic in either direction back to the external connecting equipment or back into the Cell Exchange system The loopbacks are unique to the port used The 6 7 configuration screen for conducting loopback testing is shown in Figure 6 3 The loopback data flow is shown in Figure 6 4 Associated Logical Interface Loopback Status Enable EXECUTE Select interface for configuring loopback state 18 46 DIAG Loopback ESC ESC Previous Figure 6 3 Loopback Window from Diagnostics Menu Equipment Network o 3 a Interface Card Figure 6 4 Loopback Data Flow To execute a loopback test 1 Select Loopback from the Diagnostics menu 2 Use the SPACE bar to move through the logical interface selections until the desired interface is reached 3 Use the arrow keys to move to Loopback Status and the SPACE bar to select ENABLE 4 Use the arrow keys to move to the EXECUTE button and p
352. unction in the LED circuitry The module should be replaced as soon as is practicable b If the Cell Exchange system is not operational and the front panel of the power supply module is blank DC input to the module has been lost or the fuse is blown If there is a redundant power supply installation the backup power supply will automatically assume the load Check the front panel LEDs for one of the following indications a If the red FAIL LED is illuminated the power supply module has failed Since the green POWER LED only indicates that 5 VDC is being read at the bus the LED may be illuminated even though the power supply has failed b Ifthe front panel of the power supply module is blank DC input to the module has been lost If the FUSE LED is illuminated the internal fuse has blown CPU Module If the red FAIL LED illuminates on a CPU module the module has possibly failed 1 In a single CPU installation a failed CPU module may not be immediately evident because it only affects cell bus timing and configuration Over a short period of time however performance of the Cell Exchange system will degrade In a dual CPU configuration if one module fails the other will automatically take over This will be indicated by the illumination of the ACTIVE LED If the primary CPU module has in fact failed its ACTIVE LED should extinguish and the secondary module s ACTIVE LED should ill
353. unications products must be installed and operated in compliance with the relevant National Regulatory requirements summarized in the REGULATORY section of this manual READ IN FULL PRIOR TO INSTALLATION any product specific National Regulatory requirements applicable to the country of installation 1998 1999 2000 Timeplex Inc CXUG ll 3 15 00 TimePlex Group User Manual Change Document This change document revises information contained in the Synchrony Cell Exchange User s Guide MC17358 The information in this document supports Release 4 0 1 of the Synchrony Cell Exchange Insert this document directly after the title page of your manual as a record of the change s This change document addresses the following product features and other changes Dual Synchronous Legacy DSL DSL Module e Structured Legacy SEL Module e Network Management LANE and IP Configuration Front Matter 1 Under About This Manual the information should read This manual supports Release 4 0 1 of the Synchrony Cell Exchange system Chapter 1 Overview 1 Page 1 11 in the first line of the paragraph titled Adaptive Timing change DSL to DSL DSL MX17358 1 2000 Timeplex Inc 4 30 00 1 of 29 Chapter 2 Installation 1 Page 2 5 replace the section titled Software Upgrade Requirements with the following Software Upgrade Requirements Software upgrade requires IBM compatible PC
354. uring Connections Connections are configured via the Connection Management menus Figure 5 14 shows the connection management mapping window Name Germantown Slot 2 Intf A Type OC3 Cell VPI VCI i Interface Name VPI VCI Chan Connection Name Priority Emmitsburg Emmit One Low Walkersville Walkers Two High SCROLL UP LINE SCROLL DOWN LINE SCROLL UP PAGE SCROLL DOWN PAGE Press ENTER to update the config database and return to the Main Menu 11 22 CFG Con Mgmt Map ALARM ESC ESC Previous Figure 5 14 Configuration Management Mapping Window OC3 Cell Configuring connections to and from OC3 OC3C interfaces is very similar to configuring other connections see Configuring Interface Connections 1 Select the Connect Mgmt command from the Configure menu 2 Toconfigure the connections move the cursor to highlight one of the interfaces 3 Press F2 or ENTER to bring up the connection management map for that interface 4 Usethe Up Down arrow key to move to the Inact field 5 Press F3 to add a new connection or F4 to delete an existing connection Follow the steps described in Configuring Interface Connections to add new connections 6 When done press F1 or move to the EXECUTE button and press ENTER to update the configuration database and return to the main menu or UPDATE and ENTER to update the configuration and remain in this window 5 14 CXUG 10
355. ut Power 5 1 VDC 5 14 0 amps 1 6 CXUG 10 6 99 Power Distribution Power distribution within the Cell Exchange systems is relatively simple Standard AC power 90 to 230 VAC 47 to 63 Hz is received at the backplane of the chassis and transferred via the power connector interface to the Power Supply Module The Power Supply Module converts the AC input to 5 VDC which is then sent to a voltage regulator and the backplane bus DC power is very similar Standard DC power 38 to 60 VDC is received at the backplane of the chassis and transferred via the power connector interface to the Power Supply Module The DC DC Converter Module converts the DC input to 5 VDC which is then sent to a voltage regulator and the backplane bus NOTE The CX 1580 does not include a power supply therefore power distribution is limited to the 5 VDC and Ground supplied by an external source Not generally available Indicators All indicators are located on the front panel of each module Indicators for the various modules are described in the appropriate subsections in Chapter 3 Modules CPU Module The CPU Module is designed around a Motorola 68340 microprocessor and is used to control configure collect statistics and provide all general management functionality within the unit The CPU module also provides master timing for the cell bus and drives the INTERNAL and REFERENCE OUT clock lines The CPU Module provides all configuration
356. ut a need to reboot CX1500 If the multicast group is used in a connection modifications to this group membership will not be permitted 5 57 5 58 If a group name is not entered on this screen the user will be prevented from opening the corresponding second screen The screen alarm will come on and inform the operator that no group name was entered To configure the multicast group name with members use the TAB key to move to the MEMBERS button for that group Pressing lt ENTER gt will bring up the screen shown in Figure 5 55 Members configuration for multicast group Multicast1 1 HSL Slot 6 2 E1C Slot 11 A 3 DSC Slot 12 B EXECUTE Select an interface 12 48 CFG Mcast Members ESC ESC Previous Figure 5 55 Configuring Member Interfaces Enter up to 16 interfaces for the multicast group When done select EXECUTE and press lt gt to update the database and return to the previous screen or UPDATE and ENTER to update the database and remain in this screen Multicast group names can only be configured as the destination for a uni directional connection connection source to the multicast group The user will be prevented from configuring a bi directional or uni directional connection in the opposite direction multicast group to the source The appropriate screen alarm will come on NOTE All multicast group members must use the same destination VPI VCI for
357. ve status indication Press lt F2 gt to enter the interface configuration menu Figure 5 40 shows the interface configuration menu with all fields set to the default values Intf Name Middletown Slot 7 Int Intf Type Unstructure T1 Adaptive Clock No Transmit Clock Source Internal Line Build Out T1 Short Haul 0 133 ft 0 6dB 12dB Gain Coding B8ZS EXECUTE Press ENTER To update the config database and return to the Main Menu 09 52 CFG Intf UTL ESC ESC Previous Figure 5 40 Interface Configuration Window UTL The arrow keys are used to move between the different fields Beginning at the Adaptive Clock field the down arrow key can be used to move the cursor through each field in the order shown The space bar is used to move through the possible selections which are given below in parentheses starting with the default e Adaptive Clock No Yes e Transmit Clock Source Internal Ref Clock External On Board Line Build Out Short Haul 0 133 ft 0 6dB 12dB Gain Short Haul 133 266 ft 1 2dB 12 dB Gain Short Haul 266 399 ft 1 8dB 12dB Gain Short Haul 399 533 ft 2 4dB 12dB Gain T1 Short Haul 533 655 ft 3 0dB 12dB Gain T1 Long Haul 0 0dB Pulse 36dB Gain T1 Long Haul 7 5dB Pulse 36dB Gain T1 Long Haul 15 0dB Pulse 36 dB Gain T1 Long Haul 22 5dB Pulse 36dB Gain T1 Long Haul 0 0dB Pulse 24dB Gain T1 Long Haul 7 5dB Pulse 24dB Gain T
358. veillance HEC Crypto Reset Signal Single ended EIA 530 activated on corrupted HEC ATM Layer AAL 1 CBR Applicable Standards ITU T 1 432 af phy 0043 000 CXUG 3 31 10 6 99 Indicators Cmm ume Gm LED OPNL Green Illuminates when operational code begins running after the boot process is complete Blinks during operational code download Pinouts Pinouts for the high speed DB 26F connectors are as shown in Figure 3 21 and the accompanying table Figure 3 21 HDB 26F DTE Pin Location M To DSC Module Pbi To Network 3 32 CXUG 10 6 99 DS3 Cell Interface Module DS3 Overview The DS3 Cell Interface Module allows the Cell Exchange system to interface with ATM cell bearing communications equipment A front panel view of the DS3 Cell Interface Module is shown in Figure 3 22 O Rx Syn Ce Syn Figure 3 22 DS3 Cell Interface Module DS3 The DS3 Cell Interface Module performs the following primary functions e Takes the cells and places them onto the ATM cell bus e Monitors the physical synchronous interface for alarms e Collects statistics on module performance CXUG 3 33 10 6 99 Cell Bus Microprocessor Power Section The Cell Bus Microprocessor Power section of the DS3 module consists of the following e ATM Cell Bus Switching Logic IC ATM Cell Bus Switch along with a RAM IC provides connectivity to the backplane board e 96 Pin DIN connector used to connect o
359. w Discard Cell Secs Number of seconds in which cells were discarded CXUG 4 33 10 6 99 Dual T1 Cell Interface Module T1C 4 34 To view the statistics for the Dual T1 Cell Interface Module select Module Status from the View menu The window that appears provides a top level view of the hardware installed in the chassis Information is available for each slot including module type and module status More information can be obtained for a particular module by highlighting the module and pressing lt F2 gt This action will bring up the logical interface screen shown in Figure 4 38 Intf_ Name Intf_ Type Slot Physical Intf Inact Intf_ Status Walkersville Dual T1 Cell 5 A Up SCROLL UP LINE SCROLL DOWN LINE SCROLL UP PAGE SCROLL DOWN PAGE Press ENTER F2 to go to the interface statistics screen 15 17 View Intf Dual T1 ALARM Repone ESC ESC Previous Figure 4 38 Logical Interface Status Window Dual T1 Cell The logical interface status window displays status information for each logical interface defined for a specific module In addition to configuration information name type slot physical interface active the status of the interface is shown This represents a snapshot of the current state of the interface up or down Additional information for each logical interface can be obtained by highlighting the interface and pressing F2 The screen shown in Figure 4 39 will appear This screen
360. ware is transferred from the online flash area into the other flash area A true swap occurs A separate section of NVRAM stores the Code Swap State This state is updated at the start of Code Swap after each block is swapped and at the end of the Code Swap If an event occurs during code swap which causes the CPU to stop executing upon reboot the CPU will pick up the Code Swap process from where it left off The Code Swap process cannot be interrupted until it has completed STEP 5B Automatic Nodal Reset Following the Code Swap the online CPU will automatically reboot This causes a toggle to the standby CPU Now both CPUs have new software STEP 6 Manual Node Reset The user executes a node reset Both CPUs reboot All modules come online executing the new software version All modules receive the updated configuration database The CPU that was online will remain the online CPU following a manual reset CXUG 10 6 99 Flow Diagrams Table 2 2 illustrates the message flows for redundant CPU operation and SW upgrade The symbol indicates the current operating version of software loaded in I O modules Table 2 2 Software Flow Diagrams Online CPU Standby CPU ACTION Online Other NVRAM Online Online Other NVRAM Online SW SW Y N SW SW Y N Start 3 2 3 2 Y 3 2 3 2 N Load SW Online CPU 3 2 4 0 3 2 Y 3 2 3 1 3 2 N Code Swap 4 0 3 2 3 2 N 3 2 3 1 3 2 Y
361. watts Indicators Type Label Color Meaning LED OPNL Green Illuminates when operational code begins running after the boot process is complete Blinks during operational code download Off No power to module EML failed CPU failed LED M Green Illuminates when the M lead is in active mode off hook LED E Green when the E lead is in active mode off hook LED LOD Red Loss Of Data Controlled by Software when a connection has been lost During normal operation if a user removes the cable connected to the EML it does not necessarily illuminate the LED The LED will illuminate for a short time when the connection is reestablished and the EML is receiving valid cells from the bus 3 86 CXUG 10 6 99 Pinouts Pinouts for the DB 9 connectors are as shown in Figure 3 67 and the accompanying table Figure 3 67 DB 9 Pin Location CXUG 3 87 10 6 99 Chapter 4 Operation Initial Startup On startup the Cell Exchange will run through a short set of diagnostics check for range errors in the current system configuration settings and install the current system configuration or the default configuration if range errors were detected Local Management Station The Cell Exchange can be configured via a local VT 100 emulation device PC connected via a null modem cable see Appendix B for a description of the null modem cable Plug one end of the null m
362. xample of Trunk Conditioning eene eee nennen 3 48 Pigure 3 38 S TEPBRJ 45 P pep E Ue Lee oie ur eee eria Eoo 3 50 Figure 3 39 Dual Synchronous Legacy Interface Module DSL eene 3 51 Figure 3 40 Dual Synchronous Legacy Interface Module DSL Functional Block Diagram 3 52 Figure 3 41 HDB 26F DCE Pin Location esses 3 54 Figure 3 42 High Speed Synchronous Legacy Interface Module 81 224 4040222020 3 55 Figure 3 43 High Speed Synchronous Legacy Interface Module Functional Block Diagram 3 56 Figure 3 44 HDB 26F DCE Pin Location 3 58 Figure 3 45 High Speed Serial Interface Legacy Module 5651 3 59 Figure 3 46 High Speed Synchronous Legacy Interface Module Functional Block Diagram 3 60 Figure 3 47 HSSL Pin Location 3 62 Figure 3 48 Hub Router Legacy Interface Module HRIM eene eene 3 63 Figure 3 49 BNC Pin Location Aen an a aA AAR AR ARAM ARAN AR GUAR GUAR ANS eet 3 64 Figure 3 50 RJ 45 meet ere gerettet 3 64 Figure 3 51 Low Speed Asynchronous Legacy Interface Module 5 22 2222 3 65 Figure 3 52 LSAL RJ 45 Pinout 5 nenne 3 67 Figure 3 53 Unstructured T1
363. y short time When the last alarm message has timed out the prompt line will revert to the help function The status line displays the current local time the screen or menu name alarm status location name and menu escape instructions where e Time is displayed in 24 hour clock format i e 2 30 PM is displayed as 14 30 e The screen menu name area gives an indication of the path taken from the Main menu to the currently displayed screen A colon is used to separate each element of the path e The alarm status area tells the user if any alarms currently exist If an alarm exists the string ALARM will be displayed If no alarm exists this area will be blank e The location name area displays the user assigned location name for each system 4 5 e The menu escape area displays the command required to exit the current screen At the Main menu the string Q to Logout is displayed At any other menu or screen the string ESC ESC Previous is displayed Menu Selection Within the Menu screen the operator can move between menus by using the arrow keys or by quick key To use the arrows simply press one of the left or right arrow keys The menu selection will move left or right and the new selection will be highlighted by displaying the menu name in reverse video and opening its command selections drop down menu If the current menu is the left most menu and the left arrow is pressed the display will wra
364. y the system operator Ch Remote ATM IP Rem Enet IP Net Rem Enet IP Mask nyc 172 16 101 52 172 16 102 0 255 255 255 0 wdc 172 16 101 54 172 16 104 0 255 255 255 0 SCROLL UP LINE SCROLL DOWN LINE SCROLL UP PAGE SCROLL DOWN PAGE F1 Execute F2 Go to Configure Add Connection F4 Delete Connection 1531 CFG Intf HRIM Chan ESC ESC Previous Figure 5 34 Channel Configuration Window HRIM CXUG 10 6 99 Parameters that define an IP channel are The Ch field is an edit field Any alphanumeric identifier up to 3 characters may be entered into this field This field represents the identifier for this IP channel This identifier will be used on other screens in the CX 1500 to associate the IP channel with some set of information 1 e connections The Remote ATM IP field is an edit field Any valid IP address may be entered into this field This field represents the ATM IP address for the remote node The Remote Enet IP field is an edit field which represents the remote Ethernet IP address for the remote LAN For applications where no remote LAN exists i e where connected to a remote CPU enter all zeros The Remote Enet IP Mask field is an edit field Enter the IP address of the remote Ethernet LAN subnet mask This field represents the mask of the subnet supported by the node and permits association of different masks to different remote LANs to allow for var

Synchrony Cell Exchange User`s Guide

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents